RENOVATIONS - Anacond Contracting Inc.€¦ · CB Chalkboard Conc Concrete CMU Concrete Block C-Board Cement Board CP Control Panel Cpt Carpet CT Ceramic Tile Gl Glass GB Gypsum Board

RENOVATIONS

AT

YORKMILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE

490 York Mills Road North York ON M3B 1W6

FOR

TORONTO DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD

Project No. 19-40

November 29, 2019 TDSB Project No. TR-19-0398

FOR TENDER

YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE

Toronto District School Board Project No. 19-40

Renovations CONSULTANT TEAM

1

Prime Consultant / Architect Susan Friedrich Architect Inc. 643 St. Clair Ave. West, Toronto, Ontario M6C 1A7 telephone: (416) 588-3740 fax: (416) 588-2401 Structural Engineers LEA Consulting Ltd. Structural Consulting Engineers 425 University Ave, Site 400 Toronto,Ontario, M5G 1T6 telephone: (416) 572 1801 fax: (416) 487-9766 Mechanical & Electrical Engineers Suri & Associates Ltd. 1022 White Clover Way Mississauga, Ontario L5V 1C8 telephone: 905-290-7861 fax: 289-327-3420



Renovations

LIST OF CONTACTS

1

GENERAL Owner: Toronto District School Board telephone: (416) -395-4223 fax: (416) 000–0000 Contact: ARCHITECTURAL AND GENERAL Architect: Susan Friedrich Architect Inc. telephone: (416) 588-3740 fax: (416) 588-2401 Contact: Susan Friedrich / Antonio Soria Medina STRUCTURAL Structural Engineer: Lea Consulting Ltd. telephone: (416) 572-1790 Contact: Shahe Sagharian MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Mechanical Engineers: Suri & Associates Ltd. telephone: 905-290-7861 fax: 289-327-3420 Contact: Rohin Suri Electrical Engineers: Suri & Associates Ltd. telephone: 905-290-7861 fax: 289-327-3420 Contact: Rohin Suri



Renovations TABLE OF CONTENTS

Number Section Name Pages

SFAI 1

Title Page 1 Consultant Team 1 List of Contacts 1 Table of Contents 3 SCHEDULES Room Finish Notes Hardware Schedule

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, SPECIFICATIONS 01060 Regulatory Requirements 3 01300 Administrative Submittals 4 01301 Declaration of Required Inspections

by Authorities Having Jurisdiction 1

01340 Construction Submittals 4 01400 Quality Control 2 01500 Temporary Facilities 4 01600 Materials and Equipment 7 01700 Contract Close-Out 3 01710 Site Safety Protocol for Occupied Buildings 6 SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02110 Demolition 11 02200 Excavation and backfilling 6 02510 Asphalt Paving 4 02770 Concrete Curbs and Pavement 9 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE NOT USED DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04220 Masonry 14 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05500 Metal Fabrications 4 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 4 06200 Finish Carpentry 9





SFAI 2

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07810 Fireproof 4 07850 Fire stopping and smoke seals 4 07900 Sealants and Caulking 4 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 Hollow Metal Doors, Frames and Screens 4 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Board 7 09300 Ceramic Tile 5 09490 Terrazzo Restoration 5 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceiling 4 09657 Safety Flooring 6 09900 Painting 3 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10800 Washroom Accessories 5 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL





SFAI 3

LIST OF DRAWINGS Architectural

A001 TITLE PAGE A100 LEGEND AND GENERAL NOTES A101 EXISTING SITE PLAN A201 EXISTING 2ND FLOOR KEY PLAN A202 EXISTING GROUND FLOOR KEY PLAN A203 PART EXISTING GROUND FLOOR PLAN A204 PART EXISTING GROUND FLOOR PLAN A301 NEW UNIVERSAL WASHROOM LAYOUT A401 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS A501 SCHEDULES & DETAILS A601 MILLWORK DETAILS Structural

S01 GENERAL NOTES, TYP. DETAILS, PART PLAN & SECTIONS Mechanical

M101 MECHANICAL LEGEND AND NOTES M102 FIRST FLOOR KEY PLANS M103 SECOND FLOOR KEY PLAN M104 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PLANS M105 NEW UNIVERSAL WASHROOM – HVAC PLANS Electrical

E101 ELECTRICAL LEGEND AND NOTES E102 BASEMENT FLOOR KEY PLANS E103 FIRST FLOOR KEY PLAN E104 ELECTRICAL PART PLANS E105 ELCTRICAL PART PLANS NEW UNIVERSAL WASHROOM E106 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES & SCHEMATICS



Renovations

SFAI

SCHEDULES



Renovations

SFAI

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE

TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS AND ALL PLANS,ELEVATIONS, DETAIL DRAWINGS, ETC.

List of Abbreviations and Materials: ACT Acoustic Ceiling Tile (24" x 48" existing) CA Clear Anodized Cab Cabinet / Millwork CB Chalkboard Conc Concrete CMU Concrete Block C-Board Cement Board CP Control Panel Cpt Carpet CT Ceramic Tile Gl Glass GB Gypsum Board GWG Georgian Wired Glass Met Metal Pt Paint Pl Plaster P-lam Plastic Laminate R Rubber Res Resilient Sheet Flooring TB Tackboard Terr Terrazzo VCT Vinyl Composition Tile WB White Board Wd Wood WP Waterproofing GENERAL FINISH NOTES: a) Walls shown painted shall be properly prepared including removal of existing wall coverings, adhesives, paneling, etc. unless finishes noted to be retained. b) Make good all existing finishes where new work joins. c) All existing and new walls and previously painted finishes to be re-painted. d) Remove all metal grilles, to be cleaned and re-painted for re-use where indicated. e) All heating units, recessed convectors, grilles, pipes, access panels, hangers and miscellaneous exposed metal work (other than stainless steel, anodized aluminum and baked enamel) to be painted to match the surfaces on which they occur, unless otherwise directed by Architect. f) All exposed structural steel and mechanical ducts in finished areas to be painted. g) Existing floor finishes to be removed. Make good subfloor to receive new finishes. h) All hollow metal door frames, guard rails, and nosing of steel stairs shall be epoxy painted. i) All masonry and drywall shall be extended to u/s steel deck to provide fire rated separations as noted on drawings. Where walls run parallel and under OWSJ , the OWSJ shall be enclosed both sides with gypsum board to provide rated separations and sound barrier between rooms. j) All exposed concrete floor surfaces finished with sealer. k) All exposed concrete block corners shall be bull nose block.



Renovations

SFAI

HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Page 1 of 40

Commercial Doors & Hardware Ltd.43 Millwick Dr Weston, On, M9L 1Y4, Ph 416-749-7231

YORK MILLS CTI, BF RENOVATIONS 490 YORK MILLS RD

Job No. 19-40

Submittal Date: OCT 18/19,OCT 22/19, NOV 28/19,

Finishing Hardware List

YORK MILLS CTI, BF RENOVATIONS490 YORK MILLS RD

Job No. 19-40

ArchitectSusan Friedrich Architect Inc

643 St. Clair Ave West Toronto, Ontario

M6C 1A7Tel: 416-588-3740Fax: 416-588-2401

Detailer: RYAN RUPRECHTConsultant: Ross Ruprecht B.B., A.H.C.

Plan Revision: 2-SEPT 26/19, Submittal Date: OCT 18/19,OCT 22/19, NOV 28/19, Dec 2/19

Page 2 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 3 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Manufacturers & Finishes

Manufacturers

ALTRONIX 'ALTRONIX

Camden 'Camden

Gyro Tech 'GyroTechGyro-Tech 'Gyro-Tech

HES Innovations (Pgs 22-24)

LCN 'LCN

McKinneyRixson Specialty Door Control (Pgs 30-31)

Rockwood ManufacturingRutherford Controls 'Rutherford

ControlsSargent (Pgs 32-36)

Standard Metal 'StandardMetal

Finishes

628 - Satin aluminum, clearanodized

630 - Satin stainless steel689 - Aluminum painted

US26D - Satin chromium platedover nickel

US32D - Satin stainless steelUSP - Primed for painting

Page 4 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Openings Schedule

OpeningNumber(s) Qty Location 2

NominalWidth

NominalHeight

DoorThickness Type Hand Label

DegreeofOpening Hardware Group

HeadingNum. Remarks

1: D1 1 EXIT 02 914 2134 45 Single RHR ADO EXISTING , ES NOT RATED 1 EXIST DR & FR, ADO

2: D2 1 CORRIDOR 02A 914 2134 45 Single LHR 45 MIN ADO EXISTING OPENING,ES 2 EXIST DR & FR, ADO

3: D2A 1 CORRIDOR 02A 914 2134 45 Single LHR 45 MIN EMHO WALL 3 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

4: D2B 1 CORRIDOR 02A 914 2134 45 Single RHR 45 MIN EMHO WALL 3 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

5: D3 1 OFFICE 01D 914 2134 45 Single RHR ADO EXISTING 4 EXIST DR & FR, ADO

6: D4 1 EXIT 01 914 2134 45 Single RHR 45 MIN ADO EXISTING OPENING,ES 2 EXIST DR & FR, ADO

7: D4A 1 CORR 01B 914 2134 45 Single LHR 45 MIN EMHO WALL 3 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

8: D4B 1 CORR 01B 914 2134 45 Single RHR 45 MIN EMHO WALL 3 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

9: D5 1 POOL VEST O1P 914 2134 45 Single RHR 45 MIN ADO EXISTING , ES 1500C 5 EXIST DR & FR, ADO

10: D5A 1 POOL VEST O1P 914 2134 45 Single LHR 45 MIN ADO EXISTING OPENING,ES 2 EXIST DR & FR, ADO

11: D6 1 GYM 914 2134 45 Single RHR 45 MIN ADO EXISTING , ES, RM 6 EXIST DR & FR, ADO

12: D7 1 CAFF 914, 914 2134 45 Pair LHRA/RHRA 45 MIN EXISTING ,EMHO, WALL ,DBL 7 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

13: D7A 1 CORR 07 914, 914 2134 45 Pair LHRA/RHRA EXISTING , MECH HO CL 8 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

14: D7B 1 CORR 08 914, 914 2134 45 Pair LHRA/RHRA 45 MIN EXISTING ,EMHO, WALL ,DBL 7 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

15: D8 1 CORR 06 914, 914 2134 45 Pair LHRA/RHRA 45 MIN EXISTING ,EMHO, WALL ,DBL 7 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

16: D9 1 CORR 05A 914 2134 45 Single RHR 45 MIN ADO EXISTING , ES, RM 6 EXIST DR & FR, ADO

17: D10 1 CORR 05 914 2134 45 Single LHR 45 MIN EMHO WALL 3 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

18: D10A 1 CORR 05 914 2134 45 Single RHR 45 MIN EMHO WALL 3 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

19: D11 1 CORR 04A 914, 914 2134 45 Pair LHRA/RHRA 45 MIN CL EMHO, WALL EMHO 9 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

20: D11A 1 CORR 04A 914, 914 2134 45 Pair LHRA/RHRA 45 MIN CL EMHO, WALL EMHO 9 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

21: D12 1 LIBRARY 115 914 2134 45 Single LHR 45 MIN ADO EXISTING , ES, RM 6 EXIST DR & FR, ADO

22: D13 1 CORR 04 914, 914 2134 45 Pair LHRA/RHRA 45 MIN CL EMHO, WALL EMHO 9 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

Page 5 of 40



Job No. 19-40


OpeningNumber(s) Qty Location 2

NominalWidth

NominalHeight

DoorThickness Type Hand Label

DegreeofOpening Hardware Group

HeadingNum. Remarks

23: D13A 1 CORR 04 914, 914 2134 45 Pair LHRA/RHRA 45 MIN CL EMHO, WALL EMHO 9 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

24: D14 1 CORR 03 914 2134 45 Single LHR 45 MIN EMHO WALL 3 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

25: D14A 1 CORR 03 914 2134 45 Single RHR 45 MIN EMHO WALL 3 EXIST DR & FR, EMHO

26: D30 1 WR 030 1000 2150 45 Single LH 45 MIN WR , UNIVERSAL, OP 10 ADO

Page 6 of 40



Job No. 19-40


GERERAL NOTES

-SUCCESSFUL HARDWARE SUPPLIER TO CONFIRM OPERATOR HEADER SIZES , PUSH OR PULL APPLICATION PRIOR TO ORDERING.

-ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR DIV 16/26 TO PROVIDE ALL 120VAC AND ALL LVW IN CONDUIT OR SURFACE WIREMOLD TO ALL ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS LISTED.

-ALL EMHO UNITS TIED INTO F/A PANEL HAVE BEEN LISTED AS WALL MOUNTED TYPE , WITH A 3" & 6" EXTESION THAT CAN BE USED IF REQUIRED.

-GC WILL NEED TO MODIFY EXISTING FRAMES ON SITE TO ACCEPT SOME NEW HARDWARE (ELECTRIC STRIKE, LOCKS , DEADLOCKS ETC.) AS LISTED IN THE HARDWARE LIST.

Page 7 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Hardware Schedule

Heading #1 (Group: ADO EXISTING , ES NOT RATED)

Item #1 1 Single door D1, EXIT 02 RHR

914 x 2134 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR

EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO REMAIN.RE USE EXISTING HARDWARE.PROVIDE ADDED ADO , ELECTRIC STRIKE AND HARDWARE COMPONENTS LISTED.

1 Electric Strike HES 9600-630 6301 Electronic Closer Gyro-Tech Operator GT8710 x SGL DR Width Header 628 (CONFIRM PUSH

OR PULL)628

2 Accessory Rutherford Controls Actuator 940LP36-HW 630 6301 Accessory Gyro Tech GT8710 Drop plate as required 1/4 " thick 628 6281 Miscellaneous Item ALTRONIX RB12241 Miscellaneous Item WIRING DIAGRAM BY 087101 Miscellaneous HardwareCamden RELAY CX-331 Miscellaneous HardwareCamden SS KEYSWITCH CM-170/23 MTD IN OP HEADER

ADOHARDWARE SUPPLIER SECTION 08710 TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL AUTO OPERATOR.

UNSECURE MODE: ACTUATOR BUTTONS EITHER SIDE OPEN DOOR AUTOMATICALLY ELECTRIC STRIKEALLOWS LATCH BOLT TO PASS..SECURE MODE: LATCH BOLT ENGAGED INTO ES, DOOR IS SECURE. HEADER MOUNTED KEYSWITCHCM160-2 IS TURNED TO OFF POSITION.EGRESS IS ALWAYS FREE VIA EXIT DEVICES.

DIV 16 TO PROVIDE 120VAC TO HEADER OF FRAME AND ALL LVW IN CONDUIT OR SURFACE WIRE MOLD TOALL ACTUATOR BUTTONS , ES, & ALL ELECTRIFIED COMPONENTS LISTED IN THE HARDWARESCHEDULE(PER WIRING DIAGRAM PROVIDED BY HARDWARE SUPPLIER) .

Page 8 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Heading #2 (Group: ADO EXISTING OPENING,ES)

Item #2 1 Single door D2, CORRIDOR 02A LHR

Item #3 1 Single door D4, EXIT 01 RHR

Item #4 1 Single door D5A, POOL VEST O1P LHR

914 x 2134 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 45 MIN


3 Electric Strike HES 9500-630- 2005M3 6303 Electronic Closer Gyro-Tech Operator GT8710 x SGL DR Width Header 628 (CONFIRM PUSH

OR PULL)628

6 Accessory Rutherford Controls Actuator 940LP36-HW 630 6303 Accessory Gyro Tech GT8710 Drop plate as required 1/4 " thick 628 6283 Miscellaneous Item WIRING DIAGRAM BY 087103 Miscellaneous HardwareCamden SS KEYSWITCH CM-170/23 MTD IN OP HEADER




Page 9 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Heading #3 (Group: EMHO WALL)

Item #5 1 Single door D2A, CORRIDOR 02A LHR

Item #6 1 Single door D2B, CORRIDOR 02A RHR

Item #7 1 Single door D4A, CORR 01B LHR

Item #8 1 Single door D4B, CORR 01B RHR

Item #9 1 Single door D10, CORR 05 LHR

Item #10 1 Single door D10A, CORR 05 RHR

Item #11 1 Single door D14, CORR 03 LHR

Item #12 1 Single door D14A, CORR 03 RHR

914 x 2134 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 45 MIN

EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO REMAIN. RE USSE EXISTING HARDWARE EXCEPT AS NOTED BELOW.

8 Electro-Magnetic Holder Rixson 998 TRI VOLT 689 6898 Electro-Magnetic Holder Rixson EXTENSIONS BASE 900 X EXT 900-300 & 600 689 689

EMHO WALL MTD. DIV 16 TO INTERFACE WITH F/A PANEL.

Page 10 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Heading #4 (Group: ADO EXISTING)

Item #13 1 Single door D3, OFFICE 01D RHR

914 x 2134 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR

EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO REMAIN. RE USE EXISTING HARDWARE.PROVIDE ADDED ADO AND HARDWARE COMPONENTS LISTED.

1 Electronic Closer Gyro-Tech Operator GT8710 x SGL DR Width Header 628 (CONFIRM PUSHOR PULL)

628



UNSECURE MODE: ACTUATOR BUTTONS EITHER SIDE OPEN DOOR AUTOMATICALLY ELECTRIC STRIKEALLOWS LATCH BOLT TO PASS..SECURE MODE: LATCH BOLT ENGAGED INTO ES, DOOR IS SECURE. HEADER MOUNTED KEYSWITCHCM160-2 IS TURNED TO OFF POSITION.


Page 11 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Heading #5 (Group: ADO EXISTING , ES 1500C)

Item #14 1 Single door D5, POOL VEST O1P RHR

914 x 2134 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 45 MIN


1 Electric Strike HES 1006CLB-630- 2005M3 6301 Electronic Closer Gyro-Tech Operator GT8710 x SGL DR Width Header 628 (CONFIRM PUSH

OR PULL)628



UNSECURE MODE: ACTUATOR BUTTONS EITHER SIDE OPEN DOOR AUTOMATICALLY ELECTRIC STRIKEALLOWS LATCH BOLT TO PASS..SECURE MODE: LATCH BOLT ENGAGED INTO ES, DOOR IS SECURE. HEADER MOUNTED KEYSWITCHCM160-2 IS TURNED TO OFF POSITION.EGRESS IS ALWAYS FREE LOCKSET


Page 12 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Heading #6 (Group: ADO EXISTING , ES, RM)

Item #15 1 Single door D6, GYM RHR

Item #16 1 Single door D9, CORR 05A RHR

Item #17 1 Single door D12, LIBRARY 115 LHR

914 x 2134 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 45 MIN


3 Removable Mullion Sargent EL980 USP USP3 Cylinder Sargent 72-46 US26D GMK TO EXISTING (mullion Cylinder) US26D3 Electric Strike HES 9500-630- 2005M3 6303 Electronic Closer Gyro-Tech Operator GT8710 x SGL DR Width Header 628 (CONFIRM PUSH

OR PULL)628





Heading #7 (Group: EXISTING ,EMHO, WALL ,DBL)

Item #18 1 Pair of doors D7, CAFF LHRA/RHRA

Item #19 1 Pair of doors D7B, CORR 08 LHRA/RHRA

Item #20 1 Pair of doors D8, CORR 06 LHRA/RHRA

914, 914 x 2134 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 45 MIN

RE USE EXISTING HARDWARE EXCEPT AS NOTED.

6 Electro-Magnetic Holder Rixson 998 TRI VOLT 689 6896 Electro-Magnetic Holder Rixson EXTENSIONS BASE 900 X EXT 900-300 & 600 689 689

DIV 16 TO INTERFACE WALL MTD EMHO WITH F/A PANEL

Page 13 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Heading #8 (Group: EXISTING , MECH HO CL)

Item #21 1 Pair of doors D7A, CORR 07 LHRA/RHRA

914, 914 x 2134 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR

RE USE EXITING DOOR AND FRAME .RE USE EXISTING HARDWARE EXCEPT AS NOTED BELOW.

2 Surface Closer LCN 4040XP H CUSH AL AL2 Miscellaneous Item LCN 4040XP-18PA AL AL

Heading #9 (Group: CL EMHO, WALL EMHO)

Item #22 1 Pair of doors D11, CORR 04A LHRA/RHRA

Item #23 1 Pair of doors D11A, CORR 04A LHRA/RHRA

Item #24 1 Pair of doors D13, CORR 04 LHRA/RHRA

Item #25 1 Pair of doors D13A, CORR 04 LHRA/RHRA

914, 914 x 2134 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 45 MIN

EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO REMAIN. RE USE EXISTING HARDWARE EXCEPT AS NOTED BELOW.

4 Electronic Closer LCN 4040SE STD AL 24V AL4 Electro-Magnetic Holder Rixson 998 TRI VOLT 689 6894 Electro-Magnetic Holder Rixson EXTENSIONS BASE 900 X EXT 900-300 & 600 689 6894 Miscellaneous Item LCN 4040SE-3210 AL AL

CLOSER MTD EMHO. DIV 16 TO INTERFACE WITH F/A PANEL.WALL MTD EMHO .DIV 16 TO INTERFACE WITH F/A PANEL. INSTALL AT DR LEAF ADJACENT TO DOOR.

Page 14 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Heading #10 (Group: WR , UNIVERSAL, OP)

Item #26 1 Single door D30, WR 030 LH

1000 x 2150 x 45 - HM DR x HM FR - 45 MIN

OPENING IS ULC LISTED FOR 45 MIN . INSTALL UNIVERSAL WR EQUIPMENT AS FAIL SECURE TO MEETCODE.

3 Standard Hinge McKinney T4A3786 5" x 4 1/2" US26D US26D1 Lockset Sargent 72-8204 LNL US32D LH US26D1 Cylinder Sargent MORT CYL. 72- 41 US26D x STRAIGHT CAM GMK TO EXISTING US26D1 Electric Strike HES 1006CLB-630- 2005M3 6301 Electronic Closer Gyro-Tech Operator GT8710 x SGL DR Width Header 628 (CONFIRM PUSH

OR PULL)628

1 Kick Plate Standard Metal K10A 200 X 950 C32D US32D1 Wall Door Stop Rockwood 405 US26D US26D2 Accessory Rutherford Controls Actuator 940LP36-HW 630 6301 Accessory Camden ANNUNCIATOR CM-AF500 OCCUPIED WHEN LIT1 Accessory Camden PUSH TO LOCK CM-400/8 RED/32D1 Miscellaneous Item WIRING DIAGRAM BY 087101 Miscellaneous HardwareCamden CX-EMF-21 Miscellaneous HardwareCamden CX-MDC1 Miscellaneous HardwareCamden CX-WEC10K2 (supplied and installed By Div 16)1 Miscellaneous HardwareCamden SS KEYSWITCH CM-170/23 MTD IN OP HEADER

HARDWARE SUPPLIER DIVISION 08710 TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL AUTO OPERATOR AS LSITED ABOVE

UNIVERSAL WASROOMDOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED.CORRIDOR SIDE OCCUPLIED WHEN LIT INDICATOR WHEN ROOM IS OCCUPIED.ETNRY BY USING ACCUATOR IN CORRIDOR .UPIN ENTRY AND DOOR CLOSING, PRESSING INTERIOR PUSH-TO-LOCK BUTTON LIGHTS CORRIDOR SIDEOCCUPIED WHEN LIT LIGHT AND LOCKS OUT CORRIDOR SIDE ACTUATORIF NEEDED, PRESSING INTERIOR ASSISTANCE REQUIRED SWITCH SOUND AND LIGHTS INTERIOR ANDCORRIDOR SIDE ASSISTANCE REQUIRED LIGHT/SOUNDERS.EGRESS BY LEVER OR BY PRESSING WALL MOUNT OPERATOR ACTUATOR.SYSTEM RESENT AUTOMATICALLY UPON EGRESS.

DIV 16 TO PROVIDE 120VAC TO HEADER OF FRAME AND ALL LVW IN CONDUITOR SURFACE WIRE MOLD TOALL ACTUATOR BUTTONS , ES, & ALL ELECTRIFIED COMPONENTS LISTED IN THE HARDWARESCHEDULE(PER WIRING DIAGRAM ) .DIV 16 IS TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL THE EMERGENCY WR KIT ANDINTERFACE WITH AUDIBLE/VISUAL INDICATOR IN THE MAIN OFFICE.

Page 15 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 16 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 17 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 18 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 19 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 20 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 21 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 22 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 23 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 24 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 25 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 26 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 27 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 28 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 29 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 30 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 31 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 32 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 33 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 34 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 35 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 36 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 37 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 38 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 39 of 40



Job No. 19-40


Page 40 of 40



Job No. 19-40


YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE Toronto District School Board

Project No. 19-40 Renovations

SFAI

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS



REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01060

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 JURISDICTIONAL AUTHORITIES 1.1.1 Where reference is made to jurisdictional authorities, it shall mean all authorities who have within their

constituted powers the right to enforce the laws of the Place of the Work. 1.1.2 Requirements of jurisdictional authorities shall apply to the Work in precedence to the requirements of

the Contract Documents, except that more stringent requirements of the Contract Documents shall take precedence over requirements of jurisdictional authorities.

1.2 FIRE PREVENTION AND SAFETY 1.2.1 Enforce fire protection methods, good housekeeping, and adherence to local and underwriter's fire

regulations. 1.2.2 Do not permit bonfires, open flame heating devices or accumulation of debris. Use flammable

materials only if proper safety precautions are taken, both in use and storage. 1.2.3 Provide and maintain in working order ULC labeled fire extinguishers of types suitable for fire hazard

in each case, and locate them in prominent locations and to approval of jurisdictional authorities. 1.2.4 Do not store flammable materials in the building. Take necessary measures to prevent spontaneous

combustion. Place cloths and other disposable materials that are a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove them from the building every night.

1.2.5 Where flammable materials are being applied, ensure that adequate ventilation is provided, spark

proof equipment is used, and smoking and open flames are prohibited. 1.2.6 Maintain clear emergency exit paths for personnel at all times. 1.2.7 Use only fire resistant tarpaulins and similar protective covering on site. 1.3 FIRE PROTECTION OF STRUCTURE 1.3.1 Ensure that nothing subverts the integrity of fire protection provided for the building structure. 1.3.2 Provide fire protection of structural members for their entire length and girth. 1.3.3 Coordinate work of all Sections so that they do not encroach on space required for fire protection and

its installation. Ensure that fire protection damaged during construction is totally replaced. 1.4 FIRE SEPARATIONS 1.4.1 Ensure that fire separations are installed to maintain total integrity and that they are not diminished or

breached by work following their installation. 1.4.2 Replace fire separations which have suffered a lessening of their required rating during construction. 1.4.3 Voids in Fire Separations: a) Ensure that voids between components of floor and wall fire separations, and that voids

surrounding penetrations of floor and wall fire separations are sealed to meet requirements of jurisdictional authorities.




SFAI 2

b) Sealing of fire separation penetrations shall not affect the appearance of finish material applications or installations in any manner, including staining or degradation of the finish materials.

1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.5.1 Work shall include protection measures consisting of materials, constructions and methods required

by The Occupational Health and Safety Act, of the Province of Ontario, and as otherwise imposed by jurisdictional authorities to save persons and property from harm.

1.5.2 Ensure that pollution and environmental control of construction activities are exercised as required

during the Work. 1.5.3 Work shall include requesting, attending and co-operating and coordinating all required inspections

and releases as required per the requirements of the Ontario Building Code, the municipality issuing the Building / Site Permits and by all Authorities Having Jurisdiction at the place of Work.

1.6 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.6.1 Where edition date is not specified, consider that references to manufacturer's and, published codes,

standards and specifications are made to the latest edition (revision) approved by the issuing organization, current at the date of the Specifications, and regardless of identification designation used for standard issuing body, e.g. CGSB vs CAN2 vs CAN/CGSB.

1.6.2 Reference standards and specifications are quoted in the Specifications to establish minimum

standards. Work of quality or of performance characteristics that exceeds these minimum standards will be considered to conform.

1.6.3 Should the Contract Documents conflict with specified reference standards of specifications, the more

stringent in each case shall govern. 1.6.4 Where reference is made to manufacturer's directions, instructions or specifications they shall include

full information on storing, handling, preparing, mixing, installing, erecting, applying, or other matters concerning the materials pertinent to their use and their relationship to materials with which they are incorporated.

1.6.5 Have a copy of each code, standard and specification, and manufacturer's directions, instructions and

specifications, to which reference is made in the specifications, always available at construction site. 1.6.6 Standards, specifications, associations, regulatory bodies are generally referred to throughout the

specifications by their abbreviated designations. These are, but not necessarily limited to:

AA The Aluminum Association AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association ACI American Concrete Institute AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ANSI American National Standards Institute ASTM American Society of Testing and Material AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada CEC Canadian Electrical Code (published by CSA) CEMA Canadian Electrical Manufacturer's Association CAN1 Standards Council of Canada designation for CGA CAN2 Standards Council of Canada designation for CGSB




SFAI 3

CAN3 Standards Council of Canada designation for CSA CAN4 Standards Council of Canada designation for ULC CGA Canadian Gas Association CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (designated CAN/CGSB or CAN2) CISC Canadian Institute of Steel Construction CLA Canadian Lumberman's Association CPCA Canadian Painting Contractor's Association CPCI Canadian Prestressed Concrete Institute CPMA Canadian Paint Manufacturer's Association CRCA Canadian Roofing Construction Association CSA Canadian Standards Association (designated CAN/CSA or CAN3) CSSBI Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association MTC Ministry of Transportation and Communications, Ontario NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBC National Building Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association OAA Ontario Association of Architects OBC Ontario Building Code OGCA Ontario General Contractors Association OHSA Ontario Health and Safety Act SAE Society of Automotive Engineers TTMAC Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada ULC Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada ULI Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated



ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS SECTION 01300

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF WORK 1.1.1 Obtain the documents listed under this heading and supply to Consultant before issue of the first

Certificate. 1.1.2 Insurance Policies required under General Conditions. 1.1.3 Certificates of good standing from the Workers’ Compensation Board for the Contractor and all

Subcontractors 1.1.4 Shop Drawing Schedule. 1.1.5 Permits required for work of Division 15-Mechanical Trades and Division 16-Electrical Trades. 1.1.6 Permits for temporary structures, hoists, etc. 1.1.7 Estimate of monthly progress claims (cash flow schedule) 1.1.8 Construction Schedule. 1.1.9 Contractor is responsible to document by record photographs of the existing condition of the each area

of the work and the areas immediately adjacent to it prior to starting demolition and construction. Copy of record photographs to be submitted to Architect and to Owner’s Project Manager PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF ANY WORK. Failure to submit existing condition photographs sufficiently identifying existing conditions / damages shall require the Contractor accept responsibility for any and all damaged materials in and around the place of the Work and for the provisions required to make good all such damage.

1.2 DOCUMENTS AND ACTION REQUIRED DURING PROGRESS OF CONTRACT 1.2.1 Perform the action and/or obtain the documents listed under this heading and supply to the Consultant,

within the time stipulated in the Specification or, if not stipulated, as soon as possible following Consultant’s request.

1.2.2 Documents specified within the various Sections including but not limited to: a) Shop Drawings, b) Product Sheets, c) Samples, d) Colour samples 1.2.3 Any permits required from authorities having jurisdiction enabling the Board to occupy the work (or part

thereof) prior to substantial performance of the Contract. 1.2.4 Site Log: Throughout the progress of the work the Contractor’s Site Supervisor shall keep a log of all

persons attending the place of Work for each site and the delivery of major materials and equipment. Site Log shall include the persons name, company name, contact info and any comments, instructions, actions, requirements specific to the attendance noted in the Log. The Site Supervisor shall initial each page of the Site Log and verify the accuracy and completeness of the events recorded. The Site Log shall be presented at each job meeting for review by the Consultants and copies of previous Site Log shall be distributed with the minutes of each Site Meeting.

1.2.4.1 The Site Log shall include:




SFAI 2

a) daily weather conditions b) major material and equipment deliveries, c) daily construction activities, percentage of completion of Work and work force attending, d) record all work stoppages and their cause, e) occurrence of inspection and testing reviews and their results, f) special visitors (including but not limited to: Owners representatives, consultants, authorities having

jurisdiction, labour & safety representatives, etc.) g) unusual conditions or significant developments on site h) receipt of all issued Site Instructions, authorized Change Orders, instructions from Consultants,

Authorities having Jurisdiction, etc. i) date, time and attendance of scheduled and non-scheduled Site Meetings and Site Reviews. 1.2.5 Record Drawings: 1.2.5.1. Consultant will provide two Master Sets of white prints for record drawing purposes. Obtain “as built”

drawings from Trades as Work progresses and consolidate in a manner to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Mark “as built” changes in red coloured ink on each MASTER SET of As-Built dwgs.

1.2.5.2 During the progress of the work, together with the Mechanical and Electrical Trades, keep on the site

at all times, one complete Master Set of black line prints and note thereon clearly, neatly, accurately and promptly, all Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical changes, revisions and additions to the work and deviations from the Contract Documents including reference to authorizing Change Order, Site Instruction, etc.. Accurate locations, depth, size and type of outside underground utilities are to be included in these record drawings. Drawings are to be presented at each job meeting for review by the Consultants.

1.2.5.3 Record following information: a) Depth of various elements of foundation in relation to first floor level. b) Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent

surface improvement. c) Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and

accessible features of structure. d) Field changes of dimension and detail. e) Changes made by Change Order or Supplementary Instructions. 1.2.5.4 Provide as-built drawings for architectural, mechanical and electrical. Upon request for Substantial

Completion and prior to on-site inspection, the contractor shall obtain and pay for a computer disk(s) from the Consultant, containing all contract drawings, and shall alter such documents to reflect as-built conditions including all changes and deviations made during the work, as recorded on the record drawings. Disk(s) shall be in AutoCAD 2007.

1.2.5.5 Final completion of Project Record Drawings shall be a condition precedent to the issuance of

Consultants' final payment certificate. 1.2.5.6 Progress Photographs: a) Provide three sets of colour photographs showing progress of the work monthly. Set to consist of

four different locations selected in consultation with Consultant. Photographs to be fully labeled and dated, and submitted monthly at time of submission of minutes of previous site meeting. Distribution: one copy each to the Owner, Architect and to Contractor.

1.2.6 SITE MEETINGS




SFAI 3

1.2.6.1 General Contractor to chair site meetings, record and distribute meeting minutes within 36 hours after the conclusion of each meeting together with a copy of the Site Log activity and the Progress Photos for the corresponding period. Meetings to be scheduled bi-weekly.

1.2.6.2 General Contractor shall coordinate agenda for each site meeting and shall provide written notice of

the agenda a minimum of 36 hrs. prior to scheduled meetings. Topics shall include: a) exchange and transmission of technical information required for progress of the Work; ie. Shop

dwgs, schedules, etc. b) communication of all directives, Site Instructions, Change Orders etc. to all affected parties, c) review progress of the Work, construction, submission and draw schedules, progress claims, etc. d) discuss / resolve site conditions, contractor’s proposals, unaccounted requirements from

Authorities Having Jurisdiction, etc. e) facilitate communication of project status and conditions between all parties including Client,

School Representative, Contractor (and applicable sub-trades), Consultants, Authorities and all others parties / stake-holders with interests in the Work.

1.3 DOCUMENTS AND ACTION REQUIRED AT SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE 1.3.1 Perform the action and/or obtain the documents listed under this heading during the 45 day waiting

period following the issue of the Certificate of Substantial Performance. Delivery of these documents is a condition precedent to the issue of a Certificate for Payment of the Holdback Monies.

1.3.2 Certificates of Good Standing from the Workers' Compensation Board for the Contractor and all

Subcontractors. 1.3.3 Data Books as called for within the specifications. 1.3.4 Hard copy of one complete Master Set of Record Drawings as specified in this Section shall be

submitted for review at time of request for Substantial Completion. After review, Consultant will return to the Contractor with any required revisions and/or corrections indicated in RED ink with a Submittal Review Form indicating: a) Reviewed = no action remedial required - proceed with the CAD Record Documents, b) Reviewed As Noted = minor remedial action required. Coordinate review comments per drawing

mark-ups and proceed with the CAD Record Documents (including Work continuing to Final Completion).

c) Revise and Resubmit = major remedial action required. Revise submission to suit and resubmit corrected originals - DO NOT PROCEED WITH THE CAD Record Documents. Copies which state reviewed for correction or revise and resubmit, must be resubmitted to Consultant fully coordinated with all as-built conditions noted. On completion of the revisions, one complete set of new white prints shall be supplied to the Architect for additional review, unless otherwise specified.

1.3.5 Valve Tags and Directory. 1.3.6 Pressure Vessels Inspection Certificates. 1.3.7 Operating and Maintenance Instructions and Brochures. 1. Mechanical 2. Electrical 1.3.8 Balancing of Ventilation System - Report. 1.3.9 Inspection Certificate(s) provided / required by provincial, municipal and other authorities having

jurisdiction. Note: Substantial Completion will not be reviewed without the following declarations:




SFAI 4

a) The Contractor shall provide (and pay any fees required to produce) the Municipalities “Certificate of Clearance” (or similar wording) that states the municipality has performed their required building inspections per their requirements in conformance with the issued Building Permit and that no outstanding deficiencies are known to exist per the Municipalities requirements TO PERMIT OCCUPANCY, and,

b) The Contractor shall submit a signed (and sealed where applicable) affidavit fully notarized, “Declaration of Required Inspections by Authorities Having Jurisdiction” per an executed form attached following this Section.

1.3.10 Certificate of Substantial Review from Consultant, Mechanical and Electrical Engineers. 1.4 DOCUMENTS AND ACTION REQUIRED PRIOR TO FINAL PERFORMANCE 1.4.1 Final adjustments of allowances, specified in Section 01020. 1.4.2 Final adjustments of Contract account including all authorized Change Orders, Allowance

Reconciliation and other authorized adjustments. 1.4.3 Extended warranties - refer to Section 01700. 1.4.4 Provide Board with extra materials, for future maintenance use, as specified in Trade Sections of the

Specification. 1.4.5 At conclusion of project for each site provide a minimum of 36 photographs, 4" x 6" colour prints

mounted in plastic sleeves and labeled, showing: 1. all revised exterior elevations 2. all new or renovated interior rooms including all walls, furniture and finishes 3. all new or renovated corridors to illustrate all walls, furniture and finishes 1.4.6 Final submission of four copies of CAD and white copy As-Built Record Documents and all Operating

and Maintenance Manuals, Warranties and other Record Documents submitted per above for hand-over to Owner. Final completion and acceptance by Owner of ALL Project Record Documents shall be a condition precedent to the issuance of Consultants' final payment certificate.

1.4.7 Inspection Certificate(s) provided / required by provincial, municipal and other authorities having

jurisdiction. Note: Final Performance Completion will not be reviewed without the following declarations:

a) The Contractor shall provide (and pay any fees required to produce) the Municipalities “Certificate of Clearance” (or similar wording) that states the municipality has performed their required building inspections per their requirements in conformance with the issued Building Permit and that no outstanding deficiencies are known to exist per the Municipalities requirements, AND,

b) The Contractor shall submit a signed (and sealed where applicable) affidavit fully notarized, “Declaration of Required Inspections by Authorities Having Jurisdiction” per an executed form attached following this Section.



DECLARATION OF REQUIRED INSPECTIONS BY AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION

Susan Friedrich Architect Inc. 1

To be made by the Contractor with Application for Review as a condition for: Application for Certificate of Substantial Completion (for permission of Occupancy by the municipality) Application for Final Completion (for release of Final Payment). Identification of Contract: Name of Contract: Date of Contract: Name of Owner: Municipal Building Permit #: Identification of the Contractor: Name of Contractor: Name of Declarant: Position or Title: Declaration I solemnly declare that, as of the date of this declaration, I am an authorized signing officer, partner or sole proprietor of the Contractor named in the Contract identified above, and as such have authority to bind the Contractor, and have personal knowledge of the fact that all inspections required by the Ontario Building Code and Authorities Having Jurisdiction as a requirement of the issued Building Permit in the performance of the work as required by the Contract, and for which the Owner might in any way be held responsible, have been requested and attend to by the Contractor prior to the Application indicated above, except for: 1). Release by Authorities Having Jurisdiction required for securities etc. designated for delayed release 2). Release by Authorities Having Jurisdiction of requirements incumbent on the Owner outside the responsibilities of the Contractor as defined within the Contract. I make this solemn declaration conscientiously believing it to be true, and knowing that it is the same force and effect as if made under oath. Declared before me in on this day of in the year . City / town and Province Signature of Declarant (A Commissioner for Oaths, Notary Public, etc.)



CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS SECTION 01340

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

1.1.1 Prepare and submit to Consultant for comment and review, a schedule fixing the dates for the

submission and return of Shop Drawings, Samples, Colour and Finish Schedules, etc.. Allow a minimum of 10 working days for each Consultant required to review each submission (ie. 10 days for Architect plus 10 days for each engineer required to review), exclusive of Consultant and Contractor inter-office(s) transmission period and mail periods. Contractor shall be fully responsible for establishing any and all required lead time for ordering materials and equipment to suit approved Completion Schedule and the review process.

1.1.2 Submission: Submit initial schedule within 5 days of AWARD of TENDER. Submit 2 copies to be

retained by the Architect. Architect will review schedule and return reviewed copy within 5 days after submission for revision if necessary. Resubmit finalized schedule within 3 days after return of reviewed copy.

1.2 GENERAL SUBMISSIONS 1.2.1 Submit to Consultant, for review, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples specified. 1.2.2 Until submittal is reviewed, Work involving relevant product may not proceed. 1.2.3 Do not use for Construction, Shop or setting out Drawings or diagrams which do not bear Architects'

review form bearing an indication as REVIEWED or REVIEWED AS NOTED and signature. 1.2.4 Submission and subsequent review of Shop Drawings constitute a service and does not entitle the

supplier or subcontractor to the right to remuneration until the materials are supplied and installed on the Site in accordance with the Contract.

1.2.5 Architect and Consultants WILL NOT REVIEW materials which have not been fully coordinated and

verified by the issuing Sub-Trade AND the General Contractor with respect to conformance with the Contract Documents and the specified standards, site measurements and as-built conditions surrounding the work and all other coordination to ensure the proposed work indicated on the shop drawings can be incorporated into the Work as detailed. Issuing Sub-Trade and General Contractor shall review, stamp, date and sign each submission as to it's coordination, accuracy and conformance with the surrounding Work and Contract requirements. Submission of said documents will constitute acceptance and agreement by the issuing Sub-Trade AND General Contractor of ALL requirements of the applicable Specifications and associated Contract Documents unless identified for review by Consultants on submission. Revisions proposed by Sub-Trades and/or General Contractor on Construction Submissions may not necessarily be accepted and DO NOT relieve the General Contractor from FULLY meeting the requirements of the Contract.

1.2.6 DO NOT SUBMIT marked-up originals. General Contractor to verify submissions and have all

deficiencies remedied prior to submitting for Consultant review. 1.2.7 Review by the Architect and Sub-Consultants is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance

with the general design concept as described by the Contract Documents. This review shall not mean that the Architect and/or Sub-Consultants approve detail design inherent in the submission, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor submitting same, and such review shall not relieve the contractor of their responsibility for errors or omissions in the submitted materials or for meeting all the requirements of the Contract Documents. Any deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents submitted for review within any submission shall be OBVIOUSLY




SFAI 2

IDENTIFIED as such by the Contractor and must be explicitly accepted by the Architect and applicable Sub-Consultant at each occurrence within the submission – any occurrence that is not explicitly accepted within the submission by the Architect and the applicable sub-consultant shall be deemed as not accepted and shall meet the exact requirements of the Contract Documents. Acceptance by the Consultant / Architect of a substitution on the Shop Drawings does not relieve the Contractor of fulfilling the requirements of the Contract Documents in full and any and all adjustments required in the Contract Amount to incorporate such substitution which must be established prior to submission of the substitution. The Contractor is solely responsible to ensure any / all deviations / changes from the Contract Documents are fully coordinated within the Work and are fully acceptable to all authorities having jurisdiction prior to inclusion within the Work. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation including the coordination of the work of all sub-trades.

1.2.8 To expedite the review process, items required to be reviewed by one or more sub-consultants (ie.:

mech., elect., struct., landscape) may be sent directly to the sub-consultant from the General Contractor providing they have been properly verified and coordinated by same. Sub-contractor will review and pass on comments with submission to the Architect for final review and return to the General Contractor. If submission is required to be reviewed by more than one sub-consultant verify with the Architect prior to issue which Consultant should review the submission first.

1.2.8.1 At submission of materials for review directly to a sub-consultant, fax a copy of the transmittal

indicating the materials submitted, date and method of transmission to the Architect for record purposes.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS 1.3.1 Drawings shall be copies of original drawings prepared by Contractor, subcontractor, supplier or

distributor, for the Work of this Contract which illustrate appropriate portions of the Work; showing fabrication layout, setting or erection details as specified in appropriate Sections. Provide drawings on same size sheets as Contract Drawings generally unless otherwise approved by the Architect.

1.3.2 Submit Shop Drawings with transmittal forms listing the name of the manufacturer, the job, the

drawing number, the number of copies and reference in the Specification to which the Shop Drawings refer.

1.3.3 Submit Shop Drawings to authorities having jurisdiction and obtain approval. 1.3.4 On Shop Drawings for fire rated assemblies show required fire rating and U LC design numbers. 1.3.5 Submit Shop Drawings to the Consultant in the form of a minimum of four white prints. Provide two

additional prints for structural, mechanical and electrical items. After review, each Consultant will retain one white print and return the other white prints to the Contractor with revisions and/or corrections indicated in RED ink with a Submittal Review Form indicating: a) Reviewed = no action remedial required - proceed with the Work, b) Reviewed As Noted = minor remedial action required. Coordinate review comments per

drawing mark-ups and proceed with the Work, c) Revise and Resubmit = major remedial action required. Revise submission to suit and resubmit

corrected originals - DO NOT PROCEED WITH THE WORK. Copies which state reviewed for correction or revise and resubmit, shall not be delivered to site but must be resubmitted to Consultant. On completion of the revisions, one complete set of new white prints shall be supplied to the Architect for additional review, unless otherwise specified.




SFAI 3

1.4 PRODUCT DATA 1.4.1 Certain Specification Sections specify that manufacturers' standard schematic drawings, catalogue

sheets, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data will be accepted in lieu of Shop Drawings. DO NOT USE RECYCLED DRAWINGS FROM PREVIOUS PROJECTS – THEY WILL BE REJECTED.

.1 Delete information which is not applicable to project. .2 Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable to project. .3 Show ALL dimensions and clearances required. .4 Show performance characteristics and capabilities. .5 Show wiring diagram and controls. .6 Add to standard sheet the Project identification data. 1.5 SAMPLES 1.5.1 Submit samples in duplicate as called for by the Consultant. 1.5.2 Where colour is criteria, submit full range of colours. 1.5.3 Construct field samples and mock-ups at locations acceptable to Consultant. 1.5.4 Construct each sample or mock-up complete, including Work of all trades required to finish work.

Ensure all materials used in samples or mock-up conform to materials specified. Use of materials not specified does not mean acceptance of those materials for the work as a whole.

1.5.5 Reviewed samples or mock-ups will become minimum standards of workmanship and material

against which installed work will be checked on project. 1.6 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY 1.6.1 Check and certify as correct Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples PRIOR to submission to

Architect and / or Consultants. 1.6.2 Verify Field measurements, field construction criteria, and Catalogue numbers and similar data

PRIOR to submission to Architect and / or Consultants. 1.6.3 Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. 1.6.4 Notify Consultant, in writing at time of submission, of any deviation in submittal from requirements of

Contract Documents. Any deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents submitted for review within any submission shall be OBVIOUSLY IDENTIFIED as such by the Contractor and must be explicitly accepted by the Architect and applicable Sub-Consultant at each occurrence within the submission – any occurrence that is not explicitly accepted within the submission by the Architect and the applicable sub-consultant shall be deemed as not accepted and shall meet the exact requirements of the Contract Documents. Acceptance by the Consultant / Architect of a substitution on the Shop Drawings does not relieve the Contractor of fulfilling the requirements of the Contract Documents in full and any and all adjustments required in the Contract Amount to incorporate such substitution which must be established prior to submission of the substitution. The Contractor is solely responsible to ensure any / all deviations / changes from the Contract Documents are fully coordinated within the Work and are fully acceptable to all authorities having jurisdiction prior to inclusion within the Work.




SFAI 4

1.6.5 Stamp, initial or sign each Drawing, certifying approval of submission, verification of field dimensions and measurement and compliance with Contract Documents. Failure to provide the Certification will be just cause for Consultant to reject drawings and return un-reviewed and as if not reviewed.

1.6.6 After Consultants' review and acceptance, distribute copies as follows: Job Site file (2 copies). Record documents file. Other prime contractors. Subcontractors. Supplier. Fabricator. Authorities having jurisdiction, where required by codes and/or by-laws, i.e. structural steel and

sprinklers. Owners' Data Book where applicable. 1.6.7 Distribute and deliver samples as directed by Consultant. 1.6.8 Ensure that all samples are approved by authorities having jurisdiction, supplier for correct application

in Project, and other parties identified by the Architect, in time to permit approval prior to ordering of quantity delivery to Site.

1.6.9 The Contractor shall advise all Trades, Subcontractors and suppliers of the limits of the Consultants'

responsibility with respect to Shop Drawings and other submittals as detailed under paragraph 1.7 below.

1.7 CONSULTANT’S REVIEW 1.7.1 The Consultant shall return to the Contractor samples and shop drawing indicating that the items

have been Reviewed (No re-submit required); Reviewed as indicated (no re-submit required); Revise & Resubmit (re-submit required).

1.7.2 Review by the Consultant is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general design

concept. This review shall not mean that the Consultant approves the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor, and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains solely to the processes or techniques of construction and installation and for coordination of the work of all sub trades. Any deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents submitted for review within any submission shall be OBVIOUSLY IDENTIFIED as such by the Contractor and must be explicitly accepted by the Architect and applicable Sub-Consultant at each occurrence within the submission – any occurrence that is not explicitly accepted within the submission by the Architect and the applicable sub-consultant shall be deemed as not accepted and shall meet the exact requirements of the Contract Documents. Acceptance by the Consultant / Architect of a substitution on the Shop Drawings does not relieve the Contractor of fulfilling the requirements of the Contract Documents in full and any and all adjustments required in the Contract Amount to incorporate such substitution which must be established prior to submission of the substitution. The Contractor is solely responsible to ensure any / all deviations / changes from the Contract Documents are fully coordinated within the Work and are fully acceptable to all authorities having jurisdiction prior to inclusion within the Work.

2. PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)




SFAI 5

3. EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 01400

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED Inspection and testing, administrative and enforcement requirements. Testing and mix designs. Mock-ups. Equipment/system adjust and balance. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of samples to confirm product quality. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Material and workmanship quality, reference standards. 1.3 INSPECTION 1.3.1 Refer to General Conditions. 1.4 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES 1.4.1 Independent Inspection / Testing Agencies will be appointed by the Owner for the purpose of

inspecting and / or testing portions of Work. 1.4.2 Cost shall be allocated as set out in Section 01020 - Allowances. 1.4.3 Provide equipment required for executing inspection and testing by the appointed agencies. 1.4.4 Employment of inspection / testing agencies do not relax the responsibility to perform Work in

accordance with the Contract Documents, nor the responsibility of the Contractor to meet warranty requirements for all specified products and applications.

1.4.5 If defects are revealed during inspection and / or testing, the appointed agency will request additional

inspection and/or testing to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct defect and irregularities as advised by Consultant at no cost to the Owner. Pay costs for retesting and re-inspection.

1.5 ACCESS TO WORK 1.5.1 Allow Consultant and / or inspection / testing agencies access to the Work, offsite manufacturing and

fabrication plants. 1.5.2 Cooperate to provide reasonable facilities for such access. 1.6 PROCEDURES 1.6.1 Notify the appropriate agency and Consultant in advance of the requirement for tests, in order that

attendance arrangements can be made. 1.6.2 Submit samples and/or materials required for testing, as specifically requested in specifications.

Submit promptly and in an orderly sequence so as not to cause delay in the Work. 1.6.3 Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide sufficient

space to store and cure test samples. 1.7 REJECTED WORK



QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 01400

SFAI 2

1.7.1 Refer to General Conditions. 1.8 REPORTS 1.8.1 Submit 1 original copy of inspection and test reports to the Architect, 1 copy to the Owners’ designate

and 1 copy to each sub-consultant relevant to the inspection. 1.8.2 Provide copies to Subcontractor of work being inspected / tested and manufacturer / fabricator of

material being inspected / tested. 1.9 TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS 1.9.1 Furnish tests results and mix design as may be requested. 1.9.2 The costs of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in the Contract Documents or beyond

those required by the law of the Place of Work shall be appraised by the Consultant and may be authorized as recoverable.

1.10 MOCKUPS 1.10.1 Prepare mock-ups for Work specifically requested in the specifications. Include for Work of all

Sections required to provide mock-ups. 1.10.2 Construct in all locations acceptable to the Consultant and/or as specified in the specific Section. 1.10.3 Prepare mock-ups for Consultant review with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence, so

as not to cause any delay in the Work. 1.10.4 Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of

Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. 1.10.5 If requested, the Consultant will assist in preparing a schedule fixing the dates for preparation. 1.10.6 Remove mock-ups at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to Consultant. Protect mock-ups from

damage until removed. 1.11 EQUIPMENT / SYSTEMS 1.11.1 Submit adjustment and balancing reports for mechanical and electrical systems. 1.11.2 See Section 01700 Contract Close Out for testing and training requirements. 2. PRODUCTS - Not used. 3. EXECUTION - Not used.



TEMPORARY FACILITIES SECTION 01500

SFAI 1

1.1. GENERAL 1.1.1 Student and public safety is of ultimate importance. Contractor to ensure all required barriers and

protection devices are in place throughout the Work and required safe exiting from all areas of the existing school is maintained at all times.

1.1.2 Construction fence must be installed around the construction area secured PRIOR to any Work

undertaken at the Site. Enclosure must conform to the TDSB, Ministry of Labour and Municipal requirements in addition to provisions specified hereunder.

Construction gates to be manned and supervised by general contractor designated flag man for

pedestrian access at walkways and play areas during school operation and as directed by school staff.

1.1.3 Take all necessary precautions to protect the existing building, remaining fitments, furniture and

grounds, etc. and services from damage during demolition work. Accept responsibility for any damage which may occur and make good without cost to the Board. Determine location of services situated within, or adjacent to, the site before demolition work commences. Accept responsibility for damage to existing services and make good without cost to the Board. Services identified on the Contract Documents locations for which are shown are proximal from information available at the time of documentation and must be verified by the Contractor prior to disruption of adjacent surfaces in the approximate area as well as all due caution undertaken when breaking into unknown surfaces that unidentified services may be present and must be protected.

1.1.4 Maintain fire protection and enforce proper fire prevention practices in accordance with the Board's

requirements and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1.1.5 Be responsible for maintaining the existing building in a weather and watertight condition at all times

until the completion and acceptance of the Work. All damage caused to the building interior and/or furnishings of the existing building by neglect of the Contractor or any of his forces shall be made good at his expense including all costs and charges which may be claimed by the Board for damages or inconvenience suffered. Protection shall be adequate to provide security.

1.1.6 Building is to be occupied during construction. Provide for heated enclosures at exterior as required.

Open salamanders are not permitted. 1.1.7 Floors walls and other objects to be retained shall be repaired and made good from all damage /

alteration by this Contract. Where existing openings are closed up and new openings are constructed make good all adjacent surfaces to new condition. Where existing classroom doors and frames are removed, provide new frames and doors and make good all surfaces.

1.1.8 Contractor is responsible to document by record photographs of the existing condition of the areas of

the work and the areas adjacent to it prior to starting demolition and construction. Copy of record photographs to be submitted to Architect and Owner PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF NEW WORK. Failure to submit existing condition photographs shall require the Contractor accept responsibility for any and all damaged materials in and around the place of the Work and for the provisions required to make good all such damage.

1.1.9 Ensure that adjacent areas within the school boundaries and adjacent private and public properties,

both within and without the premises, are protected from damage resulting from the Work. Install protection consisting of fences, hoarding, braces, railings, warning signs, visual and audible signals, barricades, and substantial constructions providing physical protection. Property shall include but not be limited by, structures, and their finishes and appurtenances; site improvements; trees, planting and landscaping; furnishings, fixtures, hardware and equipment.




SFAI 2

1.1.10 Prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of adjacent services, sidewalks, driveways, trees, building

or building parts. 1.1.11 Protect existing services from damages. If necessary, relocate active services to ensure that they

function continuously in safety and without risk of damage. Cap off and remove unused services encountered during demolition after approval is given by the utilities or Jurisdictional Authorities, whichever may apply, and the Consultant.

a) Protect existing items designated to remain and items designated for salvage. In the event of damage to such items, immediately replace or make repairs to approval of the Consultant and at no cost to the Owner.

1.1.12 Maintain security of areas in which demolition is proceeding by control of access through hoarding,

enclosing fences, and barricades during times work is in progress, and by locking hardware otherwise.

1.1.13 Prevent spread of dust beyond the demolition area by wetting, or by other approved means, as it

accumulates. 1.1.14 Keep sidewalks, streets, and highways free of dust and debris from demolition work. Clean up

accumulations as they occur. 1.1.15 Remove protections and barricades only if and when directed. 1.1.16 Supply and installation of protection around existing trees and planting to remain in conformance with

Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Immediately repair damage to trees, bench marks, structures, buried and above-ground services, and survey monuments should it occur as a result of this Section.

1.1.17 Be responsible for damages of any kind and making good to the Consultant's approval. 1.1.18 All interior hoarding to be constructed as “Dust-proof Partitions”. 1.2 CONTRACTOR'S SITE OFFICES & STORAGE AREA 1.2.1 Office and sheds: Locate on site only at locations approved by the Board and as directed by the

Consultant, provisions for a site office and required tool and material storage facilities in conformance with requirements of jurisdictional authorities.

1.2.2 Provide site office heated to 21 deg. C, lighted to 750 Lx and ventilated, of sufficient size to

accommodate site meetings and furnished with a drawing laydown table and both telephone and fax services for Contractor's own use and the use of the Consultant and Owner’s representatives in relation to the Work. The Contractor is to provide a table, chairs, shelves, etc. and other references necessary for construction. The office and its surrounds is to be kept clean and tidy.

1.2.3 Provide and pay for temporary telephones necessary for own use and use of Consultant and

designated Board representative. The Contractor shall provide at the Site Office a facsimile machine compatible with the Consultant's and on a completely separate line and phone number from the telephone to be operational at all times during the construction. The contractor(s) personnel will not be permitted to use the School telephone system or on-site payphones for personal or project business.

1.2.4 Store all material and equipment within the work area in a neat and orderly manner.




SFAI 3

1.2.5 Materials stored outside are to be kept in an area totally surrounded by an approved wooden barricade.

1.3 WASHROOM FACILITIES 1.3.1 Only designated staff washrooms are to be used. Student washrooms are out of bounds except

when closed for alterations. 1.4 PARKING 1.4.1 An area on the site will be designated as construction parking. Do not use the staff parking area.

Do not encumber adjacent property or public roadways with vehicles and / or equipment. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION SITE ACCESS 1.5.1 Co-ordinate with authorities having jurisdiction for temporary construction access – construction of

temporary facilities to conform to all municipal and regional requirements. After completion, Contractor to make good and reinstate all areas including roads, sidewalks, playing fields, parking areas, fencing, gates, landscaping etc. as indicated on drawings and required by authorities having jurisdiction and Board. Construction gates to be manned and supervised by general contractor designated flag man for pedestrian access at walkways and play areas during school operation and as directed by school staff.

1.5 POWER 1.5.1 Electrical services present in the building can be used by the contractor to complete the interior work.

Connect to the existing power supply in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code. 1.6 WATER SUPPLY 1.6.1 Water supply is available in the existing building and will be provided for construction usage at no

cost. 1.6.2 Drinking fountains and taps are not to be left running by the Contractor or his sub-trades. The

Contractor will be held responsible for excessive use of water during this construction project. 1.7 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 1.7.1 The Public Address System will be checked and verified by the Board to ensure it is functional in the

presence of the Contractor before the Contractor starts the work. Any problems or repairs that arise after the work is completed will be the responsibility of the Contractor. All expenses incurred to correct deficiencies will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.8 SCAFFOLDING 1.8.1 Erect scaffolding independent of walls. Remove promptly when no longer required. 1.9 LOSS OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.9.1 The contractor is wholly responsible for the security of his equipment and materials on the

construction site. The Board will not assume any responsibilities for the loss due to theft, etc. 1.10 HOARDING 1.10.1 Erect hoarding around the entire perimeter of the work area to protect the school occupants, workers

and adjacent surfaces from injury or damage to the requirement of Authorities Having Jurisdiction and the Board.

1.10.2 For interior work hoarding shall be continuous from floor to ceiling, wall to wall and constructed of 5/8"

Type X drywall on metal studs with all joints taped and sealed with paint finish to non-work area side. 1.10.3 Access to the work area shall be through a lockable 3' x 7' wood or metal door.




SFAI 4

1.10.4 For exterior work hoarding shall be continuous around the perimeter of the work area and shall be

temporary chain link fence 7 feet height by Kwick Fence 3 Upton Road Scarborough, Ontario. Canada M1L 2C1 Phone: 416 759 8222

1.10.5 The Solid hoarding shall be erected in such a manner to prevent the weather elements from entering

the building while the work is in progress. 1.10.6 All interior and exterior hoarding shall be erected to contain all dust or debris from entering the

occupied areas of the school. Should dust control measures fail, the Contractor will remove all construction dust from the occupied areas of the school when requested by the contract inspector.

1.11 DUST CONTROL 1.11.1 Use all means necessary to prevent spread of dust during performance of the Work of this Section by

dust control and temporary dust partitions. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust from being a nuisance to the public, neighbours and performance of other work on the site. Take precautions to avoid water damage during wetting down operations.

1.11.2 Dustproof partitions shall consist of construction grade wood 38 mm x 92 mm framing from floor to

the underside of deck with voids filled with sound attenuation batts, with one layer of 13 mm plywood sheathing covered with sealed and taped 10 mil polyethylene, caulked and sealed around the perimeter of the partition and covered by one layer of 16 mm type X gypsum wall board each side with offset joints taped and filled with two coats of good quality paint - colour to Architects selection.

1.11.3 Dustproof partitions shall be erected outside of school operating hours and shall remain in place until

the new addition is Substantially Complete and accepted by the Owner in writing. 1.12 PROTECTION OF BUILDING FINISHES AND EQUIPMENT 1.12.1 Provide protection for finished and partially finished areas during the performance of the work. 1.12.2 Contractor will be responsible for damage incurred due to the lack of or improper protection. 1.12.3 Include dust control measure so dust is not released outside of the work area into any occupied

portion of the school. 1.12.4 Contractor to ensure that there is no disruption or damage to the integrity of fire protection systems

for the building. 1.13 PROJECT CLEANLINESS 1.13.1 The Contractor must maintain the area of the work in a tidy condition, free from the accumulation of

waste products and debris, other than that caused by the Owner or other Contractors. 1.13.2 Remove waste material and debris from the site, and deposit in waste container at the end of each

day. 1.13.3 Vacuum, wipe and clean all interior work areas prior to starting the finish work. Maintain areas free of

dust and other contaminants during finishing operations. 1.13.4 The waste container must be located only as approved by the Board Project Manager, the container

and materials must not interfere with normal pedestrian traffic; all sidewalks, play areas, adjacent properties, driveways and roadways must be kept clear at all times.

END OF SECTON



MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT SECTION 01600

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 Use new material and equipment unless otherwise specified. 1.2 Within (7) days of written request by the Board or Consultant, submit following information for any or all

materials and products proposed for supply: a) Name and address of manufacturer. b) Trade name, model and catalogue number. c) Performance, descriptive and test data. d) Manufacturer's installation or application instructions. e) Evidence of arrangements to procure. 1.3 Provide material and equipment of specified design and quality, performing to published ratings and for

which replacement parts are readily available. 1.4 Use products of one manufacturer for equipment or material of same type or classification unless

otherwise specified. 1.2 INSTRUCTIONS 1.2.1 Unless otherwise specified, comply with manufacturer's latest printed instructions for materials and

installation methods. 1.2.2 Notify the Consultant in writing of any conflict between these specifications and manufacturer's

instructions. The Consultant will designate which document is to be followed. 1.3. FASTENINGS - GENERAL 1.3.1 Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as base metal in which

they occur. Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals. Use non-corrosive fasteners, anchors and spacers for securing exterior work.

1.3.2 Space anchors within limits of load bearing or shear capacity and ensure that they provide positive

permanent anchorage. Wood plugs not acceptable. 1.3.3 Keep exposed fastenings to minimum, space evenly and lay out neatly. 1.3.4 Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are not

acceptable. 1.3.5 Obtain Board's approval before using explosive actuated fastening devices. If approval is obtained

comply with CSA Z166-1975. 1.3.6 Each trade is responsible for their own fastenings - to be co-ordinated by General Contractor. 1.4. FASTENINGS - EQUIPMENT 1.4.1 Use fastenings of standard commercial sizes and patterns with material and finish suitable for service. 1.4.2 Use heavy hexagon heads, semi-finished unless otherwise specified. Use No. 304 stainless steel for

exterior areas. 1.4.3 Bolts may not project more than one diameter beyond nuts.




SFAI 2

1.4.4 Use plain type washers on equipment, sheet metal and soft gasket lock type washers where vibrations occur and resilient washers with stainless steel.




SFAI 3

1.5. DELIVERY AND STORAGE 1.5.1 Deliver, store and maintain packaged material and equipment with manufacturer's seals and labels

intact. 1.5.2 Prevent damage, and soiling of material and equipment during delivery, handling and storage.

Immediately remove rejected material and equipment from site. 1.5.3 Store material and equipment in accordance with suppliers instructions. 1.5.4 Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Consultant's satisfaction. Use primer or enamel to

match original. Do not paint over name plates. 1.5.5 Instruct suppliers to deliver only to the Contractor or Subcontractor placing the order. No extras will be

entertained for lost equipment or material received or signed by school staff. 1.5.6 Unless otherwise noted, salvaged material which is not specified to be re-used or handed over the

Owner, surplus materials and construction debris shall be the property of the Contractor who must remove and dispose of such material away from the site.

1.6. CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.6.1 Contractor to x-ray slab prior to cutting to determine if live feeds in conduit are present. 1.6.2 Wet cut only will be permitted - dry cutting is prohibited. 1.6.3 Responsibility: Cutting and patching shall be located and paid for by the Subcontractor who requires

the Work performed. 1.6.4 Approvals: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:

a) Structural integrity of any element of the Project. b) Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. c) Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. d) Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. e) Work of Owner or separate Contractor. f) Integrity of required existing fire and life safety systems.

1.6.5 Inspection:

a) Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

b) After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work. c) Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

1.6.6 Execution:

a) Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill to complete the Work. b) Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work. c) Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical

Work. d) Execute Work to avoid damage to other Work. e) Prepare proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. f) Employ experienced workers, experienced in the Work to be cut or patched to perform cutting

and patching. g) Cut rigid materials using power saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed.




SFAI 4

h) Restore Work with new products in accordance with Contract Documents, such Work shall include for wood curbs, where cuts have been made.

i) Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. j) At penetration of fire-rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire-rated

material, full thickness of the construction element. k) Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes; for continuous surfaces refinish to nearest

intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL AND PRODUCT REFERENCE STANDARDS 2.1.1 Within the text of specifications, reference may be made to the following standards: AA The Aluminum Association AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association ACI American Concrete Institute AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ANSI American National Standards Institute ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada CEC Canadian Electrical Code (published by CSA) CEMA Canadian Electrical Manufacturer's Association CAN1 Standards Council of Canada designation for CGA CAN2 Standards Council of Canada designation for CGSB CAN3 Standards Council of Canada designation for CSA CAN4 Standards Council of Canada designation for ULC CGA Canadian Gas Association CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (designated CAN/CGSB or CAN2) CISC Canadian Institute of Steel Construction CLA Canadian Lumberman's Association CPCA Canadian Painting Contractors' Association CPCI Canadian Pre-stressed Concrete Institute CPMA Canadian Paint Manufacturers Association CRCA Canadian Roofing Construction Association CSA Canadian Standards Association (designated CAN/CSA or CAN3) CSSBI Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association MTC Ministry of Transportation and Communications, Ontario NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBC National Building Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association OAA Ontario Association of Architects OBC Ontario Building Code OGCA Ontario General Contractors Association SAE Society of Automotive Engineers TTMAC Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada




SFAI 5

ULC Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada ULI Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated 2.1.2 Conform to these standards, in whole or part, as specifically required in the specifications. 2.1.3 Conform to latest date of issue of referenced standards or codes in effect on date of submission of

bids, except where a specific date or issue is specifically noted, and regardless of identification designation used for standard issuing body, eg CGSB vs CAN2 vs CAN/CGSB.

2.1.4 Workplace Hazardous Material Information System (WHMIS). a) Ensure that the following WHIMIS regulations are adhered to at the Place of the Work. b) Provide Material Safety Data Sheets for controlled products and have available at all times. c) Products of liquid, powder or gaseous form shall comply to WHMIS. d) Products to be used shall be properly labeled according to WHIMIS requirements. e) Personnel shall have received WHIMIS training. 2.2 QUALITY 2.2.1 Refer to GC 3.9. 2.2.2 If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided. 2.2.3 Defective Products, whenever identified prior to the completion of Work, will be rejected, regardless of

previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is a precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.

2.2.4 Should any dispute arise as to the quality or fitness of Products, the decision rests strictly with the

Consultant based upon the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2.2.5 Unless otherwise indicated in the specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any particular

or like item throughout the building. 2.2.6 Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on Products not acceptable in prominent locations,

except where required for operating instructions, or when located in mechanical or electrical rooms. 2.3 AVAILABILITY 2.3.1 Immediately upon signing Contract, review Product delivery requirements and anticipate foreseeable

supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of Products are foreseeable, notify the Consultant of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of Work.

2.3.2 In the event of failure to notify the Consultant at commencement of Work and should it subsequently

appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, the Consultant reserves the right to substitute more readily available products of similar character, at no increase in Contract Price.

2.4 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION 2.4.1 Handle and store Products in a manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and soiling and

in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations when applicable.




SFAI 6

2.4.2 Store packaged or bundle Product in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until required in the Work.

2.4.3 Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures. 2.4.4 Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls. 2.4.5 Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on wooden platforms

and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather. 2.4.6 Store sheet materials, lumber on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground. Slope to shed moisture. 2.4.7 Store and mix paints in a heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other combustible debris

from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion. 2.4.8 Remove and replace damaged Products at own expense and to the satisfaction of the Consultant. 2.5 TRANSPORTATION 2.5.1 Pay costs of transportation of Products required in the performance of Work. 2.5.2 Transportation cost of Products supplied by the Owner will be paid for by the Owner. Unload, handle

and store such Products. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS 3.1.1 Unless otherwise indicated in the specifications, install or erect Products in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with Products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.

3.1.2 Notify the Consultant in writing, of conflicts between the specifications and manufacturer's instructions,

so that the Consultant may establish the course of action. 3.1.3 Improper installation or erection of Products, due to failure in complying with these requirements,

authorize the Consultant to require removal and re-installation at no increase in Contract Price. 3.2 WORKMANSHIP 3.2.1 Workmanship shall be the best quality, executed by trades-people experienced, licensed and skilled in

the respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify the Consultant if required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results.

3.2.2 Do not employ any unfit person or anyone unskilled in their required duties. The Consultant reserves

the right to require the dismissal from sites, workers deemed incompetent, careless, insubordinate or otherwise objectionable.

3.2.3 Decisions as to the quality or fitness of workmanship in cases of dispute rest solely with the

Consultant, whose decision is final. 3.3 COORDINATION




SFAI 7

3.3.1 Ensure cooperation of workers in laying out Work. Maintain efficient and continuous supervision. 3.3.2 Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and accessories. 3.3.3 Fully cooperate with, coordinate and schedule Other Contractors as required for satisfactory and

expeditious completion of Work. Receive and store such items, provide required mechanical or electrical services to such items, and cooperate in every way to assist the incorporation of such items into the Work.

3.3.4 Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate and site conditions. Inspect site and project

conditions prior to commencement of work. Commencement of work will constitute acceptance of previous work and conditions as satisfactory and in accordance with the Contract Documents. No claims for deficiencies will be considered after work is commenced.

3.3.5 Coordinate installation of access and inspection panels supplied by mechanical and electrical

subcontractors. 3.4 CONCEALMENT 3.4.1 In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except where indicated

otherwise. 3.4.2 Before installation, inform the Consultant if there is a contradictory situation. Install as directed by

Consultant. 3.5 CUTTING AND REMEDIAL WORK 3.5.1 Should work performed outside this Contract require cutting and/or remedial work to be performed, the

cost of such work will be valued by the Consultant as provided in the Contract. 3.6 LOCATION OF FIXTURES 3.6.1 Consider the location of fixtures, accessories, outlets, mechanical and electrical items as approximate,

unless specifically dimensioned. Confirm all locations with Consultant. 3.6.2 Inform the Consultant of a conflicting installation and install as directed. 3.7 FASTENINGS 3.7.1 Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as adjacent materials,

unless indicated otherwise. 3.7.2 Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials. 3.7.3 Use non-corrosive hot dip galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing exterior work, unless

stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in the affected specification Section. 3.7.4 Space anchors within their load or shear capacity and ensure they provide positive permanent

anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not acceptable. 3.7.5 Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly. Where exposed fastenings

are necessary, type shall be approved by Consultant.




SFAI 8

3.7.6 Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are not acceptable.

3.8 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS 3.8.1 Adequately protect Work completed or in progress. Work damaged due to failure in providing such

protection is to be removed and replaced, or repaired, as directed by the Consultant, at no increase in Contract Price.

3.8.2 Prevent overloading of any part of the building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve any load bearing structural

member, unless specifically indicated without written approval of Consultant. 3.9 EXISTING UTILITIES 3.9.1 When breaking into or connecting to existing services and utilities, execute Work at times directed by

local governing authorities, with a minimum of disturbance to Work, and building occupants. Cooperate to meet Owner's requirements.

3.9.2 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are encountered, cap off in a

manner approved by authority having jurisdiction and stake or otherwise record location of capped service.



CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT SECTION 01700

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED Final cleaning. Systems testing and demonstration. Document submission. Project commissioning. Inspection and takeover procedures. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS General Conditions of the Contract: Fiscal provisions, legal submittals, and other administrative

requirements. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progressive site cleaning. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents: Submission of record drawings. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents: Submittals: Operating/maintenance manuals. 1.3 FINAL CLEANING 1.3.1 Refer to requirements of General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions. 1.3.2 Remove waste materials and the site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by the

Consultant. Do not burn waste materials on site, unless approved by the Consultant, and performed in conformance with requirements of the local Fire Marshal's office.

1.3.3 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste

and debris. 1.3.4 Leave the work broom clean before the inspection process commences. 1.3.5 Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked

enamel, plastic laminate, mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace broken, scratched or disfigured glass.

1.3.6 Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative work, electrical and mechanical fixtures,

furniture fitments, walls and floors. 1.3.7 Vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvers and screens. 1.3.8 Wax, seal, shampoo or prepare floor finishes, as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.3.9 Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and operation. 1.3.10 Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces. 1.3.11 Remove dirt and other disfiguration from exterior surfaces. 1.3.12 Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean or replace filters of mechanical

equipment. 1.4 PROJECT COMMISSIONING




SFAI 2

1.4.1 Expedite and complete deficiencies and defects identified by the Consultant. 1.4.2 Review maintenance manual contents, operating and maintenance instructions, record "as-built"

drawings, spare parts, materials for completeness. 1.4.3 Review cash allowance in relation to Contract Price, change orders, hold-backs and other Contract

Price adjustments. 1.4.4 Submit required documentation such as statutory declarations, Workers' Compensation Certificates,

warranties, certificates of approval or acceptance from regulating bodies. 1.4.5 Attend 'end-of-work' testing and break-in or start-up demonstrations. 1.4.6 Review inspection and testing reports to verify conformance to the intent of the documents and that

changes, repairs or replacements have been completed. 1.4.7 Provide ongoing review, inspection and attendance to building callback, maintenance and repair

problems during the Warranty periods. 1.5 INSPECTION / TAKEOVER PROCEDURES 1.5.1 Prior to inspection, verify the following work is performed.

a) Finish Hardware – free from stains of any nature and cleaned. b) All glass cleaned, and all painted and finished work shall have all marks removed. c) Electrical and other panels – fully labeled. d) Roof, site and exterior – cleaned and free of all construction debris. e) Work under Electrical and Mechanical Divisions – in full operating condition, tested and balanced

for proper function as specified in this Contract. 1.5.2 Prior to Final Inspection adjust all equipment to Owners satisfaction. This includes but not limited to:

(System performance and testing is further specified throughout the Sections of this specification.) a) All HVAC and heating and exhaust systems. b) All plumbing systems. c) All electrical and communications systems. d) All security systems. e) All life safety systems.

1.5.3 Prior to requesting a deficiency inspection submit the following:

a) Two copies of operating and maintenance manuals. b) Two copies of inspection and acceptance certificates required from regulatory agencies.

1.5.4 Advise the Consultant in writing, when work has been substantially completed. If Consultant agrees

that this stage has been reached, prepare a complete list of deficiencies and submit six copies of this list to Consultant. Break deficiency list down into different sections as directed by Consultant, to facilitate review.

1.5.5 On receipt of the above deficiency list in a satisfactory form, the Consultant, accompanied by his sub

consultants, the Contractor, and his project superintendent, the mechanical and electrical Subcontractors and their project superintendents, and the Owner if deemed desirable, will carry out an inspection of the project.




SFAI 3

1.5.6 Add to the deficiency list, in accordance with Consultant's directions, any additional deficiencies which are identified during inspection and reissue updated deficiency list to all concerned.

1.5.7 Upon Substantial Performance submit to Owner all required keys. 1.6 FINAL INSPECTION 1.6.1 Prior to requesting a final inspection do the following:

a) Submit air and water balancing reports. b) Submit complete set of mylar record drawings. c) Submit one complete set of reviewed shop drawings of mechanical and electrical items, folded to

8 1/2" x 11" size, contained in heavy duty manila envelopes, numbered and labeled. Follow specification format with no more than one Section per envelope.

d) Submit maintenance materials. e) Submit a final request for payment in accordance with the General Conditions and incorporating

all approved changes to the Contract Price, including adjustments to the cash allowances listed in Section 01020.

f) Submit extended warranties. g) Upon completion of all items noted on the deficiency list, clean all areas, surfaces, and

components affected by corrections and completion of deficient items, as directed by the Consultant.

h) Ensure that all services, equipment, apparatus are properly tested and adjusted. 1.6.2 After all deficiencies have been corrected, submit to Consultant a written request for a final inspection

containing a statement that all deficiencies have been corrected and the project is ready for final inspection. This inspection shall be carried out by the same parties involved in the Substantial Performance deficiency inspection.

1.6.3 If all deficiencies have not been corrected, in the opinion of the Consultant, a final deficiency list shall

be prepared by the Contractor in the same manner as specified herein for the Substantial Performance Deficiency Inspection and the inspection procedure repeated until all items have been completed the satisfaction of the Consultant.

1.6.4 Consultant will conduct one final inspection and maximum one follow-up inspection. Subsequent

inspections due to the Contractor's failure to complete work as required, shall be paid for by the Contractor at current OAA per diem rates.

2. PRODUCTS - Not used. 3. EXECUTION - Not used.



SITE SAFETY PROTOCOL FOR OCCUPIED BUILDINGS SECTION 01710

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 Description

.1 This Section outlines the mandatory minimum Health and Safety protocols for all renovation, addition and new school construction Projects where all or a portion of the existing school building remains occupied and in use.

.2 These Health and Safety protocols are mandatory minimum requirements, procedures and standards that the Toronto District School Board insists are fully complied with by all parties involved with Toronto District School Board Projects.

1.2 Related Sections

.1 These specifications apply to all Divisions of this Project specification. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to apply these provisions wherever practical within specification limits to all products and services used on this Project.

.2 The requirements of this Section supersede those of all other specification Sections and Drawings. Where conflicts exist in procedures, methods or materials, they shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Consultant and Board Project Manager. Where clarification is not immediately available, the Contractor shall assume the specifications contained in this Section are a minimum standard and the more stringent specification shall apply.

.3 The Contractor must receive approval from Board Project Manager for any deviations from this specification Section.

.4 The General Contractor shall recognize that it is he who is the Constructor of the Project. The General Contractor shall also recognize that he is solely responsible for site safety at the Place of the Work and compliance with the requirements of this Section does not limit or remove his total responsibility for site safety as Constructor of the Project.

1.3 References

.1 Applicable related regulations, standards and laws related to safety include but are not limited to: .1 Canada Labour Code, Part 2, Canada Occupational Safety and Health Regulations. .2 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).

.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). .3 Province of Ontario

1. Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects, R.S.O. [1990 June 2002].

1.4 Compliance Specification

.1 Notwithstanding the requirements of this Section, the Contractor must comply with all applicable health, safety and environmental regulations and statutes.

1.5 Beyond Compliance Specification

.1 These specifications apply in addition to all applicable health, safety and environmental compliance regulations. They are incorporated here to reflect the Board’s intention to develop a specification which provides the safest practical procedures and policies for construction project sites that are occupied and in use by staff, students and visitors during the execution of the Construction Contract.

.2 Beyond compliance specifications recognize that performance well beyond the minimum regulatory standard is often desirable, possible and affordable, often with no cost or low cost options. It also recognizes that application methods or protocols may be as important as the material specified. Therefore, these specifications cover both material and methods.

.3 These provisions apply to both indoor and outdoor applications equally.




SFAI 2

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Used. 3. EXECUTION AND COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Application of Compliance Requirements

.1 The articles setout herein are to be applied together as a set of related policies and procedures to achieve a comprehensive Health and Safety working protocol.

.2 The Contractor shall execute all of the procedures and meet all of the requirements set out herein and apply these protocols from the outset of the Construction Phase.

.3 These procedures or requirements are to be maintained for the duration of the Construction Phase. The Contractor shall not discontinue any of the individual procedures or requirements without the prior approval of the Board Project Manager.

3.2 Site Supervisor (Site Superintendent)

.1 A full-time Site Supervisor (Site Superintendent) is required for each site at any site, regardless of the number of active workers on site.

.2 Site Superintendent shall have as a minimum:

.1 Recent, previous experience with renovation or addition projects involving occupied buildings including (but not limited to) school construction, sites with students, tenants, employees, retail customers, pedestrian and vehicular traffic.

.2 Successful completion of a multi-session Supervisor’s training course conducted by a recognised Construction Association in Ontario.

.3 Site Superintendent must carry a cell phone at all times during construction with the ability to be reached directly during all work hours and the ability to have voicemail recorded during all non-work hours including weekends and holidays.

.4 Site Superintendent must have means of live phone or walkie-talkie communication with the site Flagman during all work hours.

.5 Site Superintendent shall not be changed throughout project unless confirmed and approved by the Board Project Manager.

3.3 Ontario Occupational Health & Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects

.1 General Contractor to comply with the Ontario Occupational Health & Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects, latest edition– including all amendments.

.2 Beyond compliance in item .1 above, regardless of the number of labourers active on the Project, the General Contractor shall form a contractors’ Health & Safety Committee at the outset of construction. This Committee shall then follow the standard requirements for such a Committee as set out in the Occupational Health & Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects.

3.4 On-Site Communications

.1 At the outset of the project the General Contractor shall provide to the Board Project Manager all relevant contact information for the Site Superintendent, GC Project Manager and key sub-contractors including names and cell phone numbers.

.2 The General Contractor shall provide at least one “emergency contact” telephone number at which the Contractor’s representative can be reached directly during all work hours and have the ability




SFAI 3

to have voicemail recorded during all non-work hours including weekends and holidays. As outlined below, this may be designated to the Site Superintendent’s cell phone number.

.3 Regardless of compliance method for the emergency contact telephone number stated above, the Site Superintendent must carry a cell phone at all times during construction with the ability to be reached directly during all work hours and the ability to have voicemail recorded during all non-work hours including weekends and holidays.

.4 Site Superintendent must have means of live phone or walkie-talkie communication with the site Flagman during all work hours.

.5 The Contractor is to ensure that the Board Project Manager is immediately apprised of any safety issues as each arises and the related request and/or resolution. The Board Project Manager is responsible for any decisions that have an effect on the contract execution.

.6 Notwithstanding the reporting to the Project Manager noted above the Site Superintendent shall liaise with school principal or designate on all safety related matters as required on a daily basis.

.7 In the event of a safety issue requiring contractual clarification or action (i.e. Change Notice, etc.), the contractor shall ensure that, where applicable, the action is followed up with appropriate documentation.

3.5 Full-Time On-Site Flagmen

.1 A full-time, designated Flagman is required at all vehicular construction entrances.

.2 In the event there is more than one entrance to the hoarded/fenced construction area, there must be a separate Flagman for each entrance.

.3 Flagman may not be same person as Site Superintendent or other construction worker.

.4 Flagman shall not be changed throughout the Project unless confirmed and approved by the Board Project Manager.

.5 Flagman must have means of phone communication with Site Superintendent (phone or walkie-talkie).

.6 The Flagman shall not be designated for any other duties than to act as a Flagman for safety purposes as described herein.

.7 The Flagman shall meet and escort any construction traffic from the site entrance into and out of the hoarded/fenced construction area (including through open site areas until entrances to hoarding.

.8 The Flagman shall only open hoarded areas when construction traffic moves through and immediately re-close gates.

.9 The Flagman shall control construction parking at the school site (including vehicles parking or traveling in unauthorized areas).

.10 The location of the Flagman shall be set to ensure the safe guarding of staff, student, and pedestrian traffic.

.11 If not designated on the Contract Documents, the location of the Flagman shall be confirmed with the Board Project Manager and Consultant at the outset of the project and before the placement of hoarding and fencing.

.12 Where the Contractor deems it necessary, in order for the Flagman to carry out the required full-time duties, the cost of a temporary shelter shall be included in the Tender Price.

.13 The Flagman shall be properly attired to carry out his duties, including the use of safety equipment (e.g. wear reflective vest, have appropriate traffic hand-held “Stop” sign and have a visible identification tag).

3.6 Site Safety Signage

.1 Standardised Safety Signage is required at all construction entrances. Refer to detail drawings for types and requirements.




SFAI 4

.2 If not designated on the Contract Documents, the location of the Safety Signage shall be confirmed with the Board Project Manager and Consultant at the outset of the Project and before the placement of hoarding and fencing.

.3 Safety Signage is to be posted at all street entrances to school site and at each entrance to hoarded/fenced construction area.

.4 Total surface area of signage is to avoid exceeding municipal standards that would require a separate signage permit.

.5 Access signage text shall include cell phone contact number for Site Superintendent.

.6 Signage posted at gates shall state restrictions on hours of entry and egress as described in the Contract Documents and under no circumstances shall construction traffic be allowed within 30 minutes prior to school start, during recess, lunch break, and 30 minutes after dismissal periods.

3.7 Access/Egress Controls

.1 At the outset of the Contract, the General Contractor shall advise all suppliers and subcontractors of the protocols listed herein and of the requirement to contact the Site Superintendent by Cell phone prior to entering the site.

.2 The drivers of all construction vehicles entering the site, including delivery vehicle drivers, are to contact site Superintendent by cell phone prior to entering site; the Site Superintendent shall, in turn, give notice to the Flagman to be aware of the traffic and authorize the Flagman to allow entry of that vehicle.

.3 Vehicular Gates are only for entry and exit of for construction purposes such as construction personnel, Authorities performing inspections, Board representative, delivery personnel, and disposal pickup and ONLY under escort by the Flagman. As such vehicular gates must remain closed and locked at all times and only opened for access/egress under escort by the Flagman, then closed and locked again.

.4 Gates are to be lockable swing gates for vehicles and man gates at all access points to the hoarded/fenced construction area.

3.8 Contractor Parking

.1 Contractor parking shall be restricted to hoarded areas or designated parking areas only where pre-approved by Board Project Manager and Principal.

.2 Contractor parking is restricted from all off-site street areas that interfere with site specific parent drop-off and parking areas.

3.9 Required Preconstruction Meetings

.1 Meeting 1: Contractor shall receive approval from the Architect and the Board Project Manager for parking, vehicular movement, access/egress strategies at a Pre-construction meeting taking place in advance of mobilising on site.

.2 Meeting 2: Once hoarding and fencing is erected BEFORE site construction is fully active and vehicles or equipment is mobilised on site, an initial site meeting shall take place at which time the layout of trailers and staging, deliveries, storage of materials, parking areas and vehicular movement to be reviewed and approved by the Board Project Manager.

.3 See article 3.12- ‘Site Meetings’ following. 3.10 Construction Fencing and Hoarding




SFAI 5

.1 Construction hoarding requirements shall be a site based decision to be determined by the Architect and the Board Project Manager at the design stage and shown on Contract Documents.

.2 No fencing or hoarding shall be less than a continuous 1800 mm high.

.3 In portions of the site where chain link is approved, it shall be continuous 1800 mm high chain link fencing, wire-tied to staked iron ‘tees’ at 1800 mm on centre - OR - leased, modular ‘quick fencing’ if staked down and wire tied together.

.4 All fenced and hoarded areas to be gated with lockable vehicular and man gates-minimum construction to be steel rail and chain link construction.

.5 Plastic snow fencing is NOT permitted.

.6 All hoarding and fencing shall be maintained in a stable condition, for duration of construction period as part of the base contract price and to include Superintendent’s inspection at the beginning and end of each work day.

.7 All Fire Routes to be outside all fenced and hoarded areas and maintained clear at all times.

.8 ‘Covered way’ protection shall be provided when accesses or pathways are in proximity to construction, in accordance with Ministry of Labour Occupational Health & Safety Act Regulations.

3.11 Toronto District School Board Health, Wellness & Safety Department Representative

.1 A representative of the Board’s Health, Wellness & Safety Dept. (‘Environment, Health and Safety Officer’) may visit site at any anytime throughout the duration of the Contract to review the site, as it relates to the safety of the occupied areas of the site. Such site review shall neither constitute an inspection or approval for the Contractor.

.2 Concerns or issues identified by the representative from the Board’s Health, Wellness & Safety Dept. shall be communicated through the Board Project Manager and the school Principal for corrective action.

.3 Contractor shall ensure full access to all site areas, at all times, for the Board’s Health, Wellness & Safety Department Representative.

3.12 Site Meetings

.1 Initial site meeting to take place after erecting fencing and hoarding but prior to the mobilisation of any vehicles, equipment or start of Work.

.2 Contractor shall ensure that the Board Project Manager, School Principal and a representative of the Board’s Health, Wellness & Safety Department and the School Principal attend the initial site meeting.

.3 The initial meeting shall review and approve a standardised agenda for all site meetings and a thorough review of the Site Safety Protocol.

.4 The standardised agenda shall include a Checklist and Report of Health and Safety items at the beginning of the agenda. This Checklist shall be included and each item reviewed at all site meetings for the duration of the project.

.5 The Checklist of Site Safety items shall include but not be limited to: .1 Contractor’s report of site safety record and report of recent site activities, precautions or

actions. .2 Review any visits to the site and actions required by Ministry of Labour or Board Health,

Wellness & Safety representatives or other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. .3 Contractor’s Health & Safety policy manual posted in site trailer. .4 Copy of Ministry of Labour Occupational Health & Safety Act and Regulations for

Construction Projects in site trailer. .5 Name of General Contractor H&S representative. .6 Continuing compliance with Safety Signage.




SFAI 6

.7 Hoarding & fencing layout and condition.

.8 Access and egress measures and any breaches of requirements.

.9 Confirmation of communications link between Site Superintendent & Flagman.

.10 Work that may produce any noxious odours and the containment measures, (i.e.: schedule, type, approvals required therefore).

.11 Copies of Material Safety Data sheets in site trailer.

.12 Complete meeting minutes including details of Safety Checklist shall be copied to Architect, Board Project Manager and Principal.

.6 Contractor to produce record of written Memorandum to all subtrades and suppliers detailing but not limited to: hours of delivery; site access procedures and restrictions; use of existing facilities.

.7 Contractor to prepare detailed and accurate written record of all meetings to be kept and issued to all parties.

3.13 Contractor’s Health and Safety Committee Meetings

.1 As required in item 3.1.2, the Contractor shall form a Health and Safety Committee, hold meetings and record minutes of meetings for the duration of the Contract.

.2 Contractor to maintain a copy of Health & Safety Committee minutes on site for review by Ministry of Labour or Board representative(s).

END OF SECTION



Renovations

SFAI

SPECIFICATIONS



Renovations DEMOLITION SECTION 02110

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 Comply with Section 01005 "General Requirements". 1.1.2 Work includes demolition and removal to the full extent required by the drawings and as required to

install new materials and equipment in preparation for the proposed work in the areas to be altered. Including but not limited to; all site clearing, stripping and removal of existing surfaces and structures, as shown on drawings and as required permitting installation of new work by other trades, and the removal of rubble and debris from the site for disposal.

1.1.3 The Contractor shall ensure that a thorough check of possible hazards, (asbestos contamination,

excessive dust, electrical cables, etc.) is done prior to removal of existing constructions. If hazards are encountered, the Contractor must notify the Board in writing, prior to proceeding with Work. The Board will direct the process for remedial action.

Asbestos and other hazardous materials encountered during demolition shall be removed using

procedures as detailed in Ontario Regulation 654/85, under the Occupational Health and Safety Act, regulating Asbestos on Construction Projects.

1.1.4 Cutting of new and existing work to accommodate Mechanical and Electrical work, unless otherwise

noted, will be executed by the Mechanical and Electrical trades. Patching will be carried out by General Contractor.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 1.2.1 The work of this Section is for the demolition, removal and repair of all items required by the work,

including:

a) Demolition and complete removal of existing areas to be renovated to the extent indicated, including all obsolete foundations as indicated on structural drawings, all obsolete finishes and fittings, tack-boards, chalkboards including obsolete miscellaneous equipment and services. All exit corridors to remain functional throughout the demolition.

b) Demolition, renovation and restoration of surrounding site. Access to the site and to all areas of the school property must be maintained per Board requirements and / or Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

c) Demolition shall be carried out in an orderly and careful manner. The debris and refuse of demolition shall be removed from the building and from the site promptly and at frequent intervals and shall not be allowed to accumulate.

d) Unless noted otherwise, building materials resulting from demolition shall become the property of the Contractor, to be removed from the site promptly by the Contractor.

e) Demolition and removal work shall include all exterior walkways, paving, landscaping, fencing and curbs which require removal and / or relocation to suit the new Work.

f) Remove existing windows, doors, frames and walls in existing building where indicated. g) Remove, replace and / or relocate all HVAC equipment, lighting fixtures, plumbing and all other

items required for the new Work and as indicated throughout the specifications and on the Contract Drawings.

h) Removal of existing ACT and existing ceiling as required for mechanical, electrical and structural work within the existing building including hazardous material removal and all misc. connections: the Contractor will carefully remove existing ceilings within the existing school areas for installation / connection of the new services. The Contractor shall protect the existing grid in place (or remove and reinstate as required) and repair any damaged areas to new condition




SFAI 2

throughout within the Base Contract. Non-damaged tiles will be stockpiled in a clean, dry, safe manner for reinstatement within the existing areas of the school. Tiles of different pattern nor new tiles will be mixed in with existing tiles in any one room. Damaged tiles (scored, marked, uneven edges, etc.) will not be reinstated and shall be replaced. The Contractor shall be entitled to a maximum extra of 15% of the total reinstated area for replacement tiles from the specified cash allowance. Replacement of damaged tiles above and beyond the 15% will be the responsibility of the Contractor unless they can document that such damage occurred prior to the Contractors handling of the ACT. All work to modify existing or new replacement ACT tiles and grid to suit new conditions / services shall be included in the Base Contract.

1.2.2 Owners Preparations:

a) Board will savage items at their discretion for use on other areas of the school. The Board will remove all furniture and contents of cupboards to be retained, prior to start of

demolition. Furniture will be moved out once at start of Contract and moved in once at the conclusion of the Contract. Any other moving required by the Contractors failure to meet schedule or other deficiencies – the full cost will be charged to the Contractor.

1.2.3 Contractors Preparations:

a) Demolition work shall not proceed until precautions have been taken to keep the structure weather tight and/or dustproof screens have been erected to protect adjoining areas. Provide suitable barricades and warning signs. Provide sealed dust-proof barriers for all air-handling ductwork entering the place of Work and other openings that could communicate dust from the work place to the adjoining school areas.

b) Support all loads while demolishing and until new load bearing material is in situ. c) Demolition of existing floors, ceilings, partitions, or other construction shall include the relocation

of existing mechanical and electrical services wherever shown on drawings and/or identifiable at the site.

d) Removal of all existing floor finishes, including underlay to original sub-floor at locations where new floor finish is called for, ready for application of new finishes.

e) Remove abandoned services such as conduits, pipes, wiring, ducts, fixtures, equipment, etc., where required for the work or indicated on the drawings.

f) Removal of existing electrical items including fixtures, etc., where required for the work or indicated on the drawings and not required to be relocated within the School premises.

g) Removal of all mechanical items including plumbing fixtures, services, etc., where required for the work or indicated on drawings and/or where not required to be relocated within the School premises.

h) Removal of existing millwork and making good, where necessary. i) Removal shall mean removal from site and safe disposal in a legal manner. j) Making good of existing materials to provide smooth, dust and grease-free surfaces, ready for the

installation of required finishes. k) Existing construction, equipment, and finishes which are to remain shall be protected. Otherwise

make good. l) Contractor shall review with Consultant which materials removed during the demolition shall be

handed over to the Owner. They shall be removed from the site to a storage location within the school, if directed by the Owner.

m) Carefully clean and store all materials and equipment to be reused. n) Maintain the existing building secure at all times and provide temporary secure closures as

required. o) The work of demolition or service shutdowns which could affect the operation of the school

program, shall be undertaken outside school hours and with prior approval of Board and school officials only.

1.2.4 Demolition as follows:

i) Cut new openings in existing concrete and masonry walls.




SFAI 3

ii) Remove existing concrete floors. iii) 1. For the work of items i), ii), and iii), use wet concrete or masonry saws and carry work to a

neat clean junction with constructions which area to remain. 2. Concrete slabs on grades shall be cut to half depth only and broken out with pneumatic

hammers to avoid cutting under floor services and provide a key for the replacement slab. Failure to comply with this requirement makes the Contractor responsible for under floor services.

iv) Remove portions of existing roof construction including cants, flashing, and structure for joining new roof. Patch and seal as required ensuring water tightness. Maintain warranty on existing roof .

v) Remove ceiling acoustic boards, arrange for safe storage and reinstall in the finished work only where called for on the drawings, otherwise provide new tiles to all renovated areas.

vi) Remove and / or modify existing windows, doors and screens, complete in preparation for alterations..

vii) Remove existing floor finishes in preparation for new flooring. ix) Remove existing partitions, doors and frames, as indicated on drawings. x) Remove existing millwork, fixtures and fittings as required for new work. xi) Removal, recapping, and diverting of mechanical and electrical services as required. xii) All cutting or grinding shall be done by safe "wet" means. No dust shall be made airborne by

grinding or cutting. xii) Co-ordinate with mechanical and electrical trades for cutting and patching. xiii) Removal of all existing cabinets, chalkboards, tack-boards where required for new work. xiv) Removal of all metal shelving, cabinets, where required for new work - hand over to Owner.

1.2.5 Repair work to include:

i) Included in the General Work are miscellaneous items and work required to complete the alterations as detailed; i.e. rough and finished carpentry, structural steel, miscellaneous metal, concrete work and mechanical-electrical work.

ii) Provide miscellaneous lintels for installation under Division 4. iii) Provide caulking required to close between various finishes as required. Caulking to be acrylic

grey coloured sealant "Mono" or equal. iv) Provide rough and finished carpentry required by the drawings. v) Provide and install access doors required by the drawings. vi) Provide and install new finishes as required by the drawings and schedule. vii) Provide and install pre-finished metal angles to close between lockers and masonry. viii) Disconnect and reinstall mechanical and electrical items as required.

1.2.6 Exterior Work: The Contractor shall include in the tender all miscellaneous work exterior to the

building indicated on the drawings and/or identifiable at the site required to complete the full scope of the Contract Work.

1.2.7 Mechanical and Electrical Equipment: Further specified in Division 15 Mechanical and Division 16

Electrical. a) Mechanical and Electrical Contractors shall make safe all services, identify equipment to be

retained, re-used or handed over to the Owner. Contractor to do demolition and disposal unless otherwise specified.

b) Contractor shall maintain all services required for continuing use of the school and property. c) Patching and repair of any openings in exposed or finished surfaces shall be by the trade

responsible for the finish surface under the coordination of the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate all cutting, openings and patch and repair to minimize interference between trades and existing services. Note required fire stopping to maintain existing required fire separations and fire separations indicated within the new Work.

d) Removal of partitions and doors and installation of new partitions and making of new openings for doors, etc., will require the relocation of mechanical and electrical equipment and outlets. The




SFAI 4

Contractor shall be responsible to obtain complete information on such alterations and services and equipment required for relocation prior to tendering and all such Work shall be included in the Contract.

e) Contractor shall be responsible for removing redundant equipment, electrical and otherwise unless specifically noted elsewhere.

1.2.8 Making Good Finishes and Joining of Existing and New Work.

a) Floors of altered areas must be finished flush and ready for final finish applications with adjacent existing finishes to remain.

b) Where floor slab is required to be cored / drilled for new services, care must be taken to install new openings clear of structural members and existing services to remain. After installation of new services, all openings must be made watertight.

c) Where existing floor to be cut for new services, remove existing vinyl floor tile and supply and install new vinyl tile as per finish schedule / existing condition. Patching shall not be evident.

d) At existing openings in concrete block walls shown to be blocked up, masonry shall be keyed in with units identical to existing adjacent units, so that coursing and bond are continuous. Blocks to match adjacent in size, shape and pattern. Salvaged blocks free of defects and or mortar may be used to infill existing openings only at the approval of the Architect. Similarly for existing brick walls requiring patching. Do not use any salvaged materials in the construction of the new openings.

e) Where new openings are shown to be cut into existing walls, Contractor shall break open the wall to size required, provide new steel angle or lintel block over the opening (as specified) and patch all adjacent materials.

f) Where openings are blocked up in existing painted walls, where new openings are made, or where millwork or equipment are removed from walls; surface shall be completely repainted to the next “inside” perpendicular corner per Section 09900. All other walls of the same colour in the same room as patched wall shall be painted with one finish coat of paint. No patch painting will be permitted.

g) All new horizontal runs of ducts, pipes and conduits shall be concealed in ceiling spaces, unless specifically noted otherwise.

h) All new duct drops and risers shall be concealed in ceiling spaces, bulkheads or furrout duct shafts. All new pipe and conduit drops and risers shall be furred out or buried in walls as indicated. New devices on walls shall be recessed and new devices on existing walls shall be surface mounted. Exposed conduit and wiremould shall be painted in with existing wall colour.

i) All existing ceiling components and ceiling mounted equipment shall be carefully removed where required.

j) Existing extra ceiling tiles which are removed shall be turned over to Board staff for re-use depending on condition.

k) Existing concrete and painted concrete floors shall be prepared according to manufacturers' instructions for new adhesive applied finishes or new paint finish per Room Finish Schedule.

l) Special care must be taken not to damage existing roof. Any damage must be repaired as recommended and approved by the Consultant.

m) Cutting, patching and flashing of the roof must be done in conformity with existing construction and adjacent surfaces. Integrity of the existing and new roofs must not be compromised.

n) Cuts through the existing steel deck must be reinforced. Provide stamped engineered shop drawings, showing locations and sizes of cuts and all reinforcement.

o) Provide roof curbs at roof mounted mechanical equipment and install roofing, flashing and counter-flashing to ensure weather tight seal.

1.3 SITE EXAMINATION 1.3.1 Verify all site conditions, which affect the work of this Section, and immediately report, in writing, all

discrepancies and conditions which are at variance with drawings and specifications and could




SFAI 5

adversely affect the performance of this Section. Failure to do the above will imply acceptance of all conditions by the Contractor.

1.3.2 Contractor is responsible to document by record photographs of the existing condition of the areas of

the work and the areas adjacent to it prior to starting demolition and construction. Copy of record photographs to be submitted to Architect and Owner PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK. Failure to submit existing condition photographs shall require the Contractor accept responsibility for any and all damaged materials in and around the place of the Work and for the provisions required to make good all such damage.

1.3.3 Claims thereafter, on account of damages or extra costs resulting from such discrepancies will be

rejected, unless they are the direct result from such conditions which could not be definitely ascertained before commencement of work.

1.3.4 Existing utility and service locations shown on drawings for information only. Verify on site all

underground and above ground services, whether or not shown on drawings and be fully responsible for locating and staking of said services on the site by public utilities companies. Verify also with Owner's maintenance and operations department with respect to the Owner's service.

1.3.5 The Consultant does not assume any responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the

documentation of such services and where shown on drawings. 1.3.6 Various parts of the remaining mechanical and electrical equipment will require alterations, removal

and / or replacement to suit the requirements of the new Work. It is the responsibility of each contractor to determine the full extent of such alterations before tendering.

1.4 STANDARDS AND CODES 1.4.1 In addition to complying with all applicable provincial and municipal codes and regulations, comply

with the requirements of all insurance carriers providing coverage for this work. 1.4.2 The use of explosives will not be permitted. 1.4.3 To Ontario Fire Code, Part 8, Demolition, including not limited to : a) Shutting off and capping services, b) Management of combustible salvage, waste and rubbish, c) Protection of persons and property, d) Maintenance of fire firefighters access, e) Provision of fire extinguishing equipment, f) Maintenance of existing and/or temporary exits. 1.4.4 To CSA S350-M80 'Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures, the Ontario Occupational

Health and Safety Act, and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Work of this section shall include protection measures, consisting of

materials, constructions and methods, required by jurisdictional authorities to save persons and property from harm.

1.5 PROTECTION 1.5.1 Student and public safety and required exiting from the existing school must be maintained at all

times.




SFAI 6

1.5.2 Construction fence must be installed and construction area secured PRIOR to any Work undertaken at the Site. Enclosure must conform to Ministry of Labour and Municipal requirements in addition to provisions specified hereunder.

Construction gates to be manned and supervised for pedestrian access at walkways and play areas

during school operation and as directed by school staff. 1.5.2 Take all necessary precautions to protect the existing building, remaining fitments and furniture, etc.

and services from damage during demolition work. Accept responsibility for any damage which may occur and make good without cost to the Board. Determine location of services situated within, or adjacent to, the site before demolition work commences. Accept responsibility for damage to existing services and make good without cost to the Board.

1.5.3 Maintain fire protection and enforce proper fire prevention practices in accordance with the Board's

requirements and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1.5.4 Be responsible for maintaining the existing building in a weather and watertight condition at all times

until the completion and acceptance of the Work. All damage caused to the building interior and/or furnishings of the existing building by neglect of the Contractor or any of his forces shall be made good at his expense including all costs and charges which may be claimed by the Board for damages or inconvenience suffered. Protection shall be adequate to provide security.

1.5.5 Building is to be occupied during construction. Provide for heated enclosures at exterior as required.

Open salamanders are not permitted. 1.5.6 Floors walls and other objects to be retained shall be repaired and made good from all damage /

alteration by this Contract. Where existing openings are closed up and new openings are constructed make good all adjacent surfaces to new condition. Where existing classroom doors and frames are removed, provide new frames and doors and make good all surfaces.

1.5.7 Contractor is responsible to document by record photographs the existing condition of the area of the

work and the areas adjacent to it prior to starting demolition and construction. Copy of record photographs to be submitted to Architect PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK.

1.5.8 Ensure that adjacent private and public properties, both within and without the premises, are protected

from damage resulting from Work of this Section. Install protection consisting of fences, hoarding, braces, railings, warning signs, visual and audible signals, barricades, and substantial constructions providing physical protection. Property shall include but not be limited by, structures, and their finishes and appurtenances; site improvements; trees, planting and landscaping; furnishings, fixtures, hardware and equipment.

1.5.9 Prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of adjacent services, sidewalks, driveways, trees, building

or building parts. 1.5.10 Protect existing services from damages. If necessary, relocate active services to ensure that they

function continuously in safety and without risk of damage. Cap off and remove unused services encountered during demolition after approval is given by the utilities or Jurisdictional Authorities, whichever may apply, and the Consultant.

1.5.11 Protect existing items designated to remain and items designated for salvage. In the event of damage

to such items, immediately replace or make repairs to approval of the Consultant and at no cost to the Owner.




SFAI 7

1.5.12 Maintain security of areas in which demolition is proceeding by control of access through hoarding, enclosing fences, and barricades during times work is in progress, and by locking hardware otherwise.

1.5.13 Prevent spread of dust beyond the demolition area by wetting, or by other approved means, as it

accumulates. 1.5.14 Keep sidewalks, streets, and highways free of dust and debris from demolition work. Clean up

accumulations as they occur. 1.5.15 Remove protections and barricades only if and when directed. 1.5.16 Supply and installation of protection around existing trees and planting to remain in conformance with

Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Immediately repair damage to trees, bench marks, structures, buried and above-ground services, and survey monuments should it occur as a result of this Section.

1.5.17 Be responsible for damages of any kind and making good to the Consultant's approval. 1.6 DUST CONTROL 1.6.1 Use all means necessary to prevent spread of dust during performance of the Work of this Section by

dust control and temporary dust partitions. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust from being a nuisance to the public, neighbours and performance of other work on the site. Take precautions to avoid water damage during wetting down operations.

1.6.2 Dustproof partitions shall consist of construction grade wood 38 mm x 92 mm framing from floor to the

underside of deck with one layer of 13 mm plywood sheathing covered with sealed and taped 10 mil polyethylene, caulked and sealed around the perimeter of the partition covered by two layers of 16 mm type X gypsum wall board with offset joints taped and filled with two coats of good quality paint - colour to Architects selection.

1.6.3 Dustproof partitions shall be erected outside of school operating hours and shall remain in place until

the new addition is Substantially Complete and accepted by the Owner in writing. 1.6.4 Provide sealed dust-proof barriers for all air-handling ductwork entering the place of Work and other

openings that could communicate dust from the work place to the adjoining school areas. Remove at the completion of all dust / odour producing Work, thoroughly clean adjacent duct-work etc. from all debris from construction and make good all finishes disturbed by the sealing procedures.

1.7 TRAFFIC FLOW 1.7.1 Conduct operations in such a manner as not to impede vehicular or pedestrian traffic normal to area

adjacent to building or on streets, sidewalks or alleys given access to area or buildings in neighbourhood. Do not impede or create unsafe conditions for the surrounding public / play areas.

1.7.2 Do not place or store materials or equipment in such a way as to obstruct flow of traffic on

thoroughfares, streets, sidewalks or space surrounding buildings. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS FROM DEMOLITION 2.1.1 All materials from the demolition and preparatory work shall become the property of the Contractor

and be removed from the site unless otherwise mentioned.




SFAI 8

2.1.2 On–site burning will not be permitted. 2.1.3 Take over items for demolition and repairs in their condition on date that tender is accepted,

irrespective of their condition prior to tendering. 2.1.4 Removal of hazardous substances, where required, shall be carried out in strict accordance with

regulations of the authorities governing such substances. 2.1.5 Each trade, upon completion of work shall remove plant, equipment, surplus materials and debris

resulting from the work. Any hazardous waste must be removed from the site and are not to be placed in the Owner's trash receptacle.

3. EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP 3.1.1 Do not start demolition without the approval of the Board. 3.1.2 Before commencing demolition, have existing mechanical, electrical and other services in the areas

being altered, cut off, capped at source, diverted, or removed as required. Protect and maintain services in the existing building without interruption during the periods when they are required for use. The capping or diverting of lines encountered within the area of alteration shall only be carried out within the time periods as directed by the Board's local representative.

3.1.3 Provide protection as required to enable existing building and equipment to remain in continuous and

normal operation and maintain construction schedule. 3.1.4 Furnish all labour, materials, tools, plant and services necessary for or incidental to the work of this

Section. 3.1.5 Retain and hand over to the Board's representative any items designated as the Board's property. 3.1.6 All repairs shall match existing quality. 3.1.7 Repairs to sidewalks, curbs, roads, etc. shall be to municipal standards. 3.1.8 All existing openings in concrete slabs which become unnecessary due to abandoned services shall

be filled with concrete. Concrete repairs shall be neat and flush with exposed surfaces. Roughen sides of openings to provide keying for new concrete.

3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 Inspect the site with the Consultant and Board representative and verify the extent and location of

items designated for removal, disposal, salvage and items to remain. 3.2.2 Locate and protect utilities. Preserve active utilities traversing site in operating condition. 3.2.3 Notify and obtain approval of utility companies before starting demolition. 3.3 DEMOLITION 3.3.1 Be responsible to obtain permission to enter, before starting work.




SFAI 9

3.3.2 Do not use explosives or smashing type of mechanical wrecking devices without Consultants written approval.

3.3.3 The limits of demolition, and areas and phases of work, where shown on drawings, are approximate

only, and shall be confirmed to the Consultant's approval. 3.3.4 Carry out demolition in a systematic manner as necessary to accommodate remedial, reconstruction

or new work. 3.3.5 Remove items as indicated. Do not disturb items designated to remain in place. Repair and make

good items damaged / disrupted by this Work scheduled to remain in place. 3.3.6 Remove existing concrete sidewalk and lines, curbs, asphalt, patios, walls, structures, etc. where

shown on drawings and where existing work conflicts with new work. 3.3.7 In removal of pavements, curbs and gutters: a) Square up adjacent surfaces to remain in place by saw cutting or other method approved by

Consultant. b) Protect adjacent joints and load transfer devices. c) Protect underlying and adjacent granular materials. 3.3.8 Use equipment and methods of removal and hauling which do not tear, gouge, break, or otherwise

damage or disturb pavement to remain. 3.3.9 When removing pipes under existing or future pavement area, excavate at least 300 mm. below pipe

invert. 3.3.10 Provide for suppression of dust generated by the removal process. 3.3.11 Remove surfaces to full depth, including granular base courses. 3.3.12 Remove surfaces only to extent of private property lines and structures and where shown to facilitate

new work. 3.3.13 Pavement, structures, curbs, etc. slated for removal which are adjacent to existing pavement to

remain, shall be neatly and accurately saw-cut prior to removal. 3.3.14 Small pieces of concrete and masonry may be used to back fill with the written permission of the

Consultant. Do not use organic or metallic materials for back fill. 3.3.15 At the end of each days work, leave site in a safe condition so that no part is in danger of collapse.

Do not stack salvaged materials or debris liable to overload any part of the structure. 3.3.16 Minimize dust during demolition. Keep dust dampened at all times. 3.3.17 Remove organic, metallic, contaminated or dangerous materials from the site and ensure safe

disposal. 3.3.18 Salvage: items to be salvaged as indicated on drawings. 3.3.19 Carefully dismantle items containing materials for salvage and stockpile salvaged materials at

locations designated.




SFAI 10

3.3.20 Sealing: Seal pipe ends and walls of manholes or catch basins as indicated. Securely plug to form watertight seal.

3.3.21 Decommission septic, fuel or storage tanks under the most stringent requirements set out by the

Ministry of Environment and/or other authority. 3.3.22 Service Connections for Removal: Disconnect, cap and seal electrical, telephone, cable TV, sewage,

drainage, water and gas lines in accordance with the rules and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction; employ tradesmen licensed to carry out this work.

3.3.23 Service Connections for Retention: Clearly paint, mark and post warning signs on lines to remain in

service and promptly repair any damage to maintain active service. 3.4 CLEARING 3.4.1 Clear and remove all debris, asphalt, concrete, rocks, boulders and other useless materials within the

project boundaries where necessary for the installation of new work. 3.4.2 Burying of useless materials on the site is not permitted. 3.4.3 Burning of useless materials will not be permitted. 3.4.4 Disposal of useless materials shall be off site and at the Contractor's expense. The Owner shall not

be responsible to provide a disposal site. 3.5 RESTORATION 3.5.1 Restore areas and existing works outside areas of demolition to match condition of adjacent,

undisturbed areas. 3.6 DISPOSAL 3.6.1 Remove completely from the site all debris resulting from demolition, except for specified salvage and

debris used as specified to fill voids below grade. 3.6.2 Remove debris daily, immediately as it accumulates. 3.6.3 Do not overload trucks and otherwise take means to prevent spillage during travel. 3.6.4 Legally dispose of waste materials at certified Waste Management sites and assume all cost of

disposal. 3.6.5 Do not sell at site, materials from demolition. 3.6.6 Notify the Owner immediately of any contaminated or dangerous materials. 3.6.7 Dispose of contaminated or dangerous materials immediately, and under the most stringent guidelines

set out by the Ministry of Environment and to minimize all dangers. 3.7 COMPLETION AND CLEANING 3.7.1 Keep sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, streets, and highways free of dust and debris from demolition

work. Clean up accumulations as they occur.




SFAI 11

3.7.2 Clean exposed surfaces and adjacent areas ready for reconstruction operations. 3.7.3 Remove tools, equipment, trash, dust and dirt from the site of operations and leave in a broom clean

condition. 3.7.4 Remove protections, barricades and other temporary construction on completion of demolition, except

those to be maintained in place protecting access to open areas below grade and new construction work.

3.7.5 Upon completion of work, remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean. 3.7.6 Sweep remaining surfaces clean of debris resulting from removal operations using rotary power

brooms and hand brooming as required. 3.7.7 On completion of the work of this Section, remove all protection. Make good all damage to this work

and to adjoining work due to lack of or failure of such protection. Remove from the site all debris, surplus materials, tools, plant and equipment and leave clean and tidy, in a good and workmanlike manner.

3.7.8 When work of this Section is completed in any given area, assume responsibility for protection. Make

good any damaged work or broken glass until acceptance of the completed contract by the Owner. 3.7.9 Remove all debris from the site as work progresses on a daily basis. 3.8 REPAIRS 3.8.1 Repair and make good all property damaged by the Contractor during demolition which was due to

negligence on the part of the Contractor at no extra cost to the Contract and to the approval of the Consultant or other Jurisdictional Authority.

END OF SECTION



EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING SECTION 02200

1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for earthwork Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM D698, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort.

.2 ASTM D4253, Test Method for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soil Using a Vibratory Table.

.3 OPSS, Ontario Provincial Standard Specification.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Shop drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract

indicating: .1 Adjacent construction, elevations, sections and details, dimensions,

and relationship to adjacent construction. .2 Include design calculations, design concept, construction method,

sequence and means by which existing structures, utilities and equipment will be protected; Location of in-use, maintained, re-routed and abandoned underground lines.

.2 Reports:

.1 Submit written laboratory test reports.

.2 Submit written field inspection and test report results after each inspection.

.3 Submit dewatering methods 30 days in advance for review by Consultant.

.4 Submit to Consultant details of locations where surplus soils and other materials are to be disposed of or reused. Include each disposal/reuse Site and type of surplus soil or other material, location of the disposal/reuse Site, operator's name and business address, type of license under which Site operates, and criteria used by Site to access suitability of surplus material for disposal.

.5 Submit to Consultant, within 48 hours of a load of surplus soil or other material

leaving the Site, a daily register recording the time and place of disposal/reuse of each load signed by a representative of the disposal site. Such documentation must be submitted before payment for excavation will be made.




1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Have shop drawings signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in Province of Ontario and having experience in design and inspection of shoring, bracing and underpinning required to complete Work.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Geotechnical conditions: For information on subsurface conditions refer to

document appended to the specifications.

.2 Cultural heritage resources: If Cultural Heritage Resources (such as archaeological sites, artifacts, building and structural remains, and/or human burials) are encountered during performance of Work, contact Consultant immediately and suspend Work in immediate area until assessment has been completed by Ministry of Culture, Tourism and Recreation. Perform required measures to mitigate negative impacts on found resources to acceptance of Consultant.

1.6 PROTECTION

.1 Existing buried utilities and structures:

.1 Size, depth and location of known existing utilities and structures are indicated for guidance only. Completeness and accuracy is not guaranteed.

.2 Prior to commencing any excavation Work, have authorities stake out utility locations to prevent disturbance during Work.

.3 Confirm locations of buried utilities by careful test excavations. Hand dig test excavations as necessary.

.4 Maintain and protect from damage, water, sewer, gas, electric, telephone and other utilities and structures encountered. Obtain permission of Consultant before moving or otherwise disturbing utilities or structures.

.2 Existing buildings and surface features:

.1 Conduct and record a condition survey of existing buildings, trees and other plants, lawns, fencing, service poles, wires, rail tracks and paving, survey bench marks and monuments which may be affected by Work.

.2 Protect existing buildings and surface features which may be affected by Work from damage while Work is in progress and repair damage resulting from Work.

.3 Where excavation necessitates root or branch cutting, perform Work in accordance with Authorities having Jurisdiction.

.4 Confirm and record a condition survey of buildings and structures undertaken by Consultant.

.3 Temporarily cover local existing catch basins and maintenance holes to prevent

entry of earth or debris. Ensure adequate surface drainage in affected area is maintained.




.4 Protect Work or work of other Contracts in progress or completed and protect existing properties, stored Products, services, utilities, trees, landscaping and natural features from damage.

.5 Protect excavations against flooding and damage and install and maintain

appropriate warning devices during construction and during time when Work is closed down for any cause.

.6 Protect bottom of excavations that will support foundations, slabs, pavements etc.

from frost or freezing.

.7 Keep access roads clear of debris and dirt resulting from Work of this Section to acceptance of Authorities having jurisdiction.

.8 Shoring, bracing and underpinning: Comply with local regulations, authorities having

jurisdictions and requirements specified.

2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Select fill: Subject to approval of Consultant consisting of reusable fill excavated

from Site or imported fill that is free of organic matter, rubble and material other than soil. Maximum particle size of half thickness of lift specified, moisture content at time of placing 2% maximum over its optimum moisture content and is either non plastic or has a plasticity index of 25% maximum.

.2 Granular A fill: Imported Granular A fill, free of organic matter and, in accordance

with OPSS 1010.

.3 Granular B Fill: Imported Granular B fill free of organic matter and in accordance with OPSS 1010.

.4 19 mm crusher-run limestone: In accordance with OPSS-1004, containing 100%

crushed aggregates, free of organic matter.

.5 19 mm clear crushed limestone: In accordance with OPSS 1004, free of organic material.

.6 Unshrinkable fill: 0.7 MPa cement stabilized backfill conforming to requirements of

CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M.




3 Execution

3.1 LINES AND ELEVATIONS

.1 Establish lines and elevations from Control Points shown on Contract Drawings.

.2 Have lines and elevations established by Registered Ontario Land Surveyor or qualified Civil Engineer registered in Province of Ontario.

.3 Protect and maintain Control Points and Bench Marks as long as they are required.

3.2 STRIPPING

.1 Do not handle topsoil while in wet or frozen condition or in manner in which soil composition is adversely affected.

.2 Strip topsoil from working area in locations shown.

.3 Strip topsoil to depths indicated. Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil.

.4 Stockpile topsoil in locations directed by Consultant. Stockpile to height not exceeding 2 m. Remove excess topsoil from Site.

3.3 REMOVAL OF WATER

.1 Obtain letter of conditional approval from Authorities having Jurisdiction to dispose of ground water into sewer drainage system. Apply for and pay for water disposal permit.

.2 Keep excavations and trenches free of water throughout construction period.

.3 Groundwater removal: .1 Lower groundwater level and maintain at depth below lowest point of

excavation to ensure a dry stable surface. .2 Dewater to prevent loss of soil and maintain stability of sides and bottom of

excavation and of adjacent structures. .3 Dispose of water in conformance with applicable by-laws and in a manner not

detrimental to public and private property, or portion of Work completed or under construction.

.4 Supply and install settling basins, or other treatment facilities to remove suspended solids or other materials before discharging to sewers, water courses or drainage areas in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. Perform testing on settlement tank discharge to confirm that effluent meets sewer bylaw requirements. Locate tanks to acceptable area determined by Consultant.

.5 Should method of dewatering fail to achieve conditions specified above, Consultant reserves right to revise methods and procedures at no cost to Owner.




.4 Surface water removal: .1 Remove surface run-off in a manner that will prevent loss of soil and maintain

stability of sides and bottom of excavation. Obtain Consultant's approval of dewatering method to be used.

.2 Discharge surface water into existing storm drainage system to acceptance of Consultant and local authorities.

3.4

.5 Do not obstruct flow of surface drainage or natural water courses.

EXCAVATION

.1 Remove concrete, masonry, paving, demolished foundations and rubble and other obstructions encountered during excavation Work.

.2 Do not disturb soil within drip line of trees or shrubs that are to remain. If excavating through roots, excavate by hand and cut roots with sharp axe or saw in a manner acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Excavate to required lines and grades shown on Contract Drawings with allowance for subsequent Work including shoring, bracing and formwork. Make excavation clean and clear of loose material and true to size.

.4 Protect stockpiles of fill against contamination and moisture absorption.

.5 Do not undermine adjacent structures. Where it is necessary to have footings at different levels, found upper footing below imaginary 10-horizontal-to-7 vertical line, or as otherwise indicated, drawn up from base of lower footing. Protect adjacent foundations from frost.

.6 Have excavations in excess of 1200 mm in depth conform to requirements of Occupational Health and Safety Act, and Regulations for Construction Projects.

.7 Do not expose shale at subgrade elevation to drying cycles and in any case, following inspection, cover with minimum 50 mm of lean concrete within 4 hours after exposure.

.8 Fill excavations for foundations which are, through error, carried below elevation shown or approved depth, with 15 MPa concrete, or as directed by Consultant.

.9 Trim, and remove loose material, debris and organic material from excavations. Where material at bottom of excavation is disturbed, remove disturbed material and re-compact to density equal to or better than undisturbed soil or backfill with lean concrete as directed by Consultant.

.10 When excavations are complete, prior to commencement of subsequent Work, request Consultant for inspection of excavation Work.




3.5 TRENCHING

.1 Excavate trenches to lines and grades indicated and to a depth of 75 mm minimum below invert elevation and slope established for pipe, and backfill to invert elevation of pipe with specified granular material.

.2 Unless otherwise authorized by Consultant, do not excavate more than 30 m of

trench in advance of installation operations and do not leave open more than 15 m at end of day's operation. Remove unsuitable material from trench bottom to extent and depth as directed by Consultant.

.3 Backfill Over-excavation with granular material and compact.

.4 If unstable soil conditions are encountered, excavate trenches to depth directed by

Consultant and backfill to correct elevation with backfill material.

.5 Remove loose material from bottom of trenches to ensure granular material is placed against undisturbed soil.

.6 Compact bedding and grade as required for even and uniform support on each

length of pipe.

.7 Where excavating is required adjacent to and parallel with and below any footing, submit excavation and backfill procedures to Consultant for review prior to start of excavating.

.8 Keep width of trenches to a minimum to ensure minimum span for pipe to be

supported.

3.6 EXCAVATED MATERIAL DISPOSAL

.1 Except for material to be used as select fill, immediately remove and dispose of excavated material from Site.

.2 Remove and dispose of construction rubble, abandoned gas, water and sewer

pipes, valves, valve boxes and fittings, maintenance holes, frames and covers and other material which may be encountered during excavation but not indicated on Contract Drawings.

3.7 BACKFILLING

.1 Do not proceed with backfilling operations until walls, slabs, waterproofing and below

grade Work has been inspected and accepted by Consultant.

.2 Backfill areas which are free from debris, snow, ice, water and frozen ground.

.3 Do not use backfill material which is frozen or contains ice, snow or debris.




.4 Do not backfill on or against any membrane or protection board covered waterproofing with jagged rock or other sharp objects which might damage waterproofing.

.5 Limit vertical drop of backfill material to 2000 mm.

.6 To avoid pockets and voids, remove sheathing and shoring materials that require

removal, as backfilling progresses.

.7 Prior to backfilling or placing concrete on exposed soil subgrade, proof roll subgrade to identify soft or loose areas. Proceed with placing backfill or concrete only after inconsistencies identified by above procedure have been reworked and compacted or excavated, backfilled and compacted as required to eliminate such conditions to acceptance of Consultant.

.8 Place backfill material, grade and compact to levels shown on Contract Drawings.

.9 Place backfill materials in uniform layers 200 mm maximum loose thickness unless

specified otherwise.

.10 Ensure each layer is compacted, and accepted by Consultant, before placing succeeding layers.

.11 Unless otherwise indicated, use specified granular material from bottom of trench to

300 mm above top of pipe or 150 mm above top of electrical conduits. Hand place in 150 mm layers and compact carefully to ensure proper backfilling and compaction around bottom quadrants and sides of pipe.

.12 For backfill from 300 mm above top of pipe or 150 mm above electrical conduits to

sub-grade level, use select fill unless otherwise noted. Compact either by hand or by machine.

.13 Do not backfill trenches until piping, conduits and cables therein have been

inspected, tested, and approved by inspection authorities having jurisdiction and Consultant.

.14 Prior to backfilling of trenches, remove wood block or wedges used to prevent

movement of piping during tests.

.15 Where there is a common boundary between select fill and granular fill or unshrinkable fill, place select fill after granular fill has been compacted. Place and compact fill around free standing structures evenly on all sides of structure simultaneously in layers sloping away from structure.

.16 During backfilling, take care to avoid displacing or damaging Utilities Work and

Services.

.17 Notify Consultant prior to commencement of backfilling and compacting operations.




3.8 COMPACTION

.1 Compaction densities for select fill, granular fill, sand fill and 19 mm crusher-run limestone materials will be determined by ASTM D698. Compaction densities for 19 mm clear crushed limestone will be determined by ASTM D4253.

.2 Add water if necessary to obtain required densities. Correct irregularities or

depressions that may develop during compaction by removing or adding material to form a smooth and uniform surface.

.3 Shape and roll alternately to obtain smooth, even and uniformly compacted base.

.4 If material is excessively moist, aerate by scarifying with suitable equipment until

moisture content is corrected.

.5 In areas not accessible to rolling equipment, compact to specified density with mechanical tampers acceptable to Consultant.

.6 Compact backfill materials in accordance with Geotechnical Report providing the

following as a minimum: .1 Imported fill: 98% standard Proctor maximum dry density (SPMDD). .2 Under slabs, walks and pavements: 100% (SPMDD). .3 All other areas: 95% (SPMDD).

3.9 GRADING

.1 Prior to placing fill over existing ground, scarify surface to depth of 150 mm.

Maintain fill and existing surface at approximately same moisture content to facilitate bonding.

.2 Place material only on clean unfrozen surface, properly shaped and compacted and

free from snow and ice. Ensure no frozen material is used in placing.

.3 Grade as necessary to bring Work areas to required elevations. Supply additional material required to obtain new grade levels. Place and compact as specified.

.4 Grade drainage ditches to elevations indicated on Contract Drawings.

.5 Maintain positive drainage.

.6 Grade materials using methods which do not lead to segregation or degradation of

aggregate.

.7 Shape each layer to smooth contour and compact to specified density before succeeding layer is placed.

.8 Remove and replace that portion of layer in which material becomes segregated

during spreading.




.9 Slope grade away from buildings 1:50 minimum.

.10 Make graded areas smooth to profile, free of debris, with local excavations and depressions filled and compacted.

.11 Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees and shrubs remaining.

.12 Cultivate entire area which is to receive topsoil to a depth of 100 mm. Repeat cultivation in those areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading has compacted soil.

.13 Remove surface debris, roots, vegetation, branches and stones in excess of 50 mm in diameter.

3.10 FINISH GRADING

.1 Fine grade and loosen topsoil. Eliminate rough spots and low areas to ensure positive drainage. Prepare loose friable bed by means of cultivation and subsequent raking.

.2 Roll to consolidate topsoil for areas to be seeded or sodded leaving surface smooth, uniform, firm against deep foot printing, and with fine loose texture to approval of Consultant.

3.11 UNSHRINKABLE FILL

.1 Place unshrinkable fill in locations indicated on Contract Drawings or where Work area is too limited to permit proper placing and compaction. Obtain Consultants approval prior to placing unshrinkable fill. Place in accordance with supplier's written instructions.

.2 If embedded items occur in area being backfilled, coordinate with appropriate trades to ensure that disturbance of embedded items during backfilling is prevented.

3.12 RESTORATION

.1 Upon completion of Work, remove surplus materials and debris, trim slopes, and correct defects as directed by Consultant.

.2 Replace topsoil and reinstate existing pavement, sidewalk, lawns and walks to elevation and condition which existed before excavation.

.3 Clean and reinstate areas affected to acceptance of Consultant.

END OF SECTION



Renovations ASPHALT PAVING SECTION 02510

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 Comply with Section 01005 "General Requirements". 1.1.2 The work described in this Section consists of the supply and installation of asphalt paving as shown on

the drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1.2.1 Excavation and Fill under Section 02200. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Gradation sieves shall conform to CAN/CGSB–8.2–M88. 1.3.2 Bituminous concrete paving shall conform to G.P.S.S. Specifications as specified herein. 1.3.3 Prepare and test the job mix formula in accordance with the procedures set forth for Marshall Method of

mix design, in the Asphalt Institute Manual Series No. 2 (MS–2). Send copy of test report to the Board's Representative. Do not use material until the test report is received and approved.

1.3.4 At any time prior or during laying of asphalt, the Board may demand a site or laboratory test be

performed on the asphalt to assure its quality is equal to that specified. The cost of obtaining the sample and testing is to be borne by the contractor. If it is found that the material installed does not meet the requirements of this specification, the contractor to is to replace the asphalt with conforming asphalt and re-test as required by the Board at no additional cost to the contract.

1.4 WARRANTY 1.4.1 The warranty the work of this Section for a period of 2 years from the date of Substantial Completion. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Asphalt cement: Conform to the Local Municipal Authority requirements for asphalt cement for asphalt

paving. 2.1.1.2 Pavement and Base Subgrade compacted to 98% Standard Proctor Density. Refer to Geotechnical Investigation prepared for this project. Typical Recommended Pavement Structure Thickness

Pavement Layer Compaction Requirements

Medium Duty Parking

(playgrounds)

Heavy Duty Parking (fireroute)

Asphaltic Concrete 92 to 96.5 % Maximum Relative Density

40mm OPSS HL 3 40 mm OPSS HL8

40 mm OPSS HL 3 60 mm OPSS HL 8

OPSS Granular A Base (or 20mm Crushed Limestone)

100% SPMDD* 150 mm 150mm

OPSS Granular B 100% SPMDD 200 mm 300mm

*Denotes standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density, ASTM-D698




SFAI 2

2.1.2 50 mm. Clear Crushed Stone Shall consist of angular particles of stone made from sound durable limestone ranging in size from 35 to 50 mm.. 2.1.3 19 mm. Clear Crushed Stone Angular particles of stone made from sound durable limestone ranging in

size from 10 to 20 mm.. 2.1.4 19 mm. and 50 mm. Crushed Run Shall consist of clean, well graded angular shaped particles of

crushed limestone meeting the following gradation requirements. O.P.S.S. PERCENTAGE PASSING Sieve Size 50 mm. Crusher Run 19 mm. Crusher Run 63.00 mm. 100 -- 50.00 mm. 85-100 -- 33.00 mm. 70-90 -- 26.50 mm. 55-75 100 16.00 mm. 40-60 75-85 04.75 mm. 20-35 35-55 01.18 mm. 10-23 15-35 00.30 mm. 5-12 7-20 00.075 mm. 2-6 3-10 2.1.5 Asphalt 2.1.5.1 Asphalt cement shall be penetration grade 85-100 and conform to O.P.S.S. Specification 1101 and

aggregates shall conform to O.P.S.S. 1003. 2.1.5.2 Asphalt base and surface course, as shown on the drawings shall conform to O.P.S.S. Specification 310. 2.1.5.3 Asphalt emulsions shall conform with O.P.S.S. Specifications 1102. 2.1.5.4 Tack coat between base and wearing course shall be an SS-1 asphalt emulsion. 2.1.6 Paint To CGSB 1-GP-74M, alkalyd traffic paint, colour to match existing. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 3.1.1 Subgrade shall be earth compacted in accordance with density specified in Section 02200. 3.1.2 The full road allowance width, as shown on the drawings, shall be fine graded. All appurtenances such

as manhole covers, service boxes, catch basin frames shall be located and their top elevations adjusted. Surplus material shall be removed and where necessary fill material brought from stockpile on site.

3.1.3 In preparing the subgrade for road base, the contractor shall remove all rocks, large stones and foreign

material, fine grade, roll and compact finished subgrade in accordance with 3.1.1 above. 3.1.4 Material for spot subgrade reinforcement shall be 50 mm. clear crushed limestone. 3.1.5 Subgrade and Embankment Protection




SFAI 3

3.1.5.1 During construction, embankments and excavations in the area of the paving shall be kept shaped and

drained. 3.1.5.2 Ditches and drains along the subgrade shall be maintained to drain effectively at all times. 3.1.5.3 Repair ruts or depressions of 25 mm. or more in subgrade. 3.1.6 In the event subgrade cannot be made stable or be compacted with a roller the consultant will decide if

local soft spots are to be excavated and backfilled with 50 mm. crusher limestone. 3.2 GRANULAR BASE 3.2.1 The materials shall be graded and compacted in all respects in accordance with O.P.S.S. 314 in 100 mm.

layers and to a tolerance of 6 mm.. Water may be supplied and applied by the contractor both to aid in compaction and to provide dust control.

3.2.2 Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted to 100% Standard Proctor Density. 3.2.3 Ensure that the fine–graded gravel base is properly compacted adjacent to curbs and edges and that the

level is within the depth tolerance. 3.3 PAVING 3.3.1 No asphalt paving shall be started until the granular base has been approved by the Board inspector.

The contractor is required to lay asphalt as soon as base is approved. 3.3.2 Lay the mixture on a dry base, under suitable weather conditions, cleaned of all loose or foreign material. 3.3.3 No asphalt paving shall be laid on a surface which is wet, or covered by snow or ice, or if the temperature

of the air is below 70C, or if the ground is frozen. 3.3.4 In all cases where the HL-6 layer has been in place for a period of two or more months, tack coat shall be

placed prior to the placing of HL-3 layer or at the discretion of the consultant. It shall be an asphaltic emulsion SS-1 diluted with an equal volume of water.

3.3.5 Place layers compacted asphaltic concrete surface courses as noted on drawings. 3.3.6 Minimum 70c air temperature when placing mixture.

3.3.7 Minimum 1180c mixture temperature when spread.

3.3.8 Maximum 1490c temperature at any time. 3.3.9 Compact each course with roller when it can support roller mass without undue cracking or displacement. 3.3.10 Roller, power driven, minimum mass 9 tonnes, minimum wheel width 6000 mm. 3.3.11 Roll until roller marks are eliminated. Compact to 96% Marshall density to ASTM D1559-76. 3.3.12 Keep roller speed slow enough to avoid mixture displacement. Moisten roller wheels to prevent mixture

adhesion. 3.3.13 Compact mixture with hot tampers in areas inaccessible to roller and all exposed edges. 3.3.14 Finish surface true to grade and free from deviations exceeding 1:1000 when measured with a 3m

straight edge.




SFAI 4

3.3.15 Clean and uniformly paint contact faces of curbs, gutters, manholes, sidewalks with hot asphalt cement before placing any asphalt cement mixture to ensure a tight bond between pavement and contact surface.

3.3.16 The contractor shall inform the Board inspector at least 48 hours prior to commencing asphalt operations

or resuming same after a delay of more than one week, in order that the Board inspector may inspect the road base before asphalt is applied.

3.4 JOINTS 3.4.1 Transverse and longitudinal in successive courses shall be offset at least 300 mm. from each other. 3.4.2 All joints shall be coated with tack coat before the adjacent asphalt is laid if the previous section has been

in place for more than two hours. 3.4.3 Transverse joints shall be cut back at least 300 mm. and painted with tack coat before paving proceeds. 3.4.4 Where tack coat has been applied, it shall be allowed to dry to a tacky texture before the asphalt is laid

against it. 3.5 FINISH 3.5.1 After final rolling, no traffic shall be permitted on paving until it has cooled and hardened and in no case

less than 6 hours. 3.5.2 The paved areas shall drain away from the building. No bumps or "bird baths" will be accepted. 3.5.3 The asphalt surface shall be clean and free of dirt or debris ready for traffic painting after a minimum of

30 day curing period. 3.5.4 Make good existing paving where indicated on the drawings and / or damaged in the performance of the

work. 3.6 PAVEMENT MARKING 3.6.1 Premark lines in an approved manner and as indicated on drawings. 3.6.2 Apply paint with an approved pressure type distributor that will ensure uniform application and a positive

means to shut-off.

3.6.3 Evenly apply paint in two coats at the rate of 4.5L/10m2. 3.6.4 Handicapped symbol shall be painted in stalls as indicated. 3.7 MAKE GOOD 3.7.1 Cut all existing joints with a saw. Burn all joints at entrances. At entrances, allow level platform to open

door. END OF SECTION



Renovations CONCRETE CURBS AND PAVEMENTS SECTION 02770

SFAI 1

1 General


.1 Design, labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for concrete curbs and pavements Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM A185/A185-M, Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.

.2 ASTM C260, Specification For Air-Entraining Admixtures For Concrete.

.3 ASTM C309, Specification For Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.

.4 ASTM C494/C494-M, Specification For Chemical Admixtures For Concrete.

.5 ASTM D994, Specification For Preformed Expansion Joint Filler For Concrete (Bituminous Type).

.6 CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Tests For Concrete.

.7 CAN/CSA A3000, Cementitious Materials Compendium.

.8 CAN/CSA G30.18-M, Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

.9 CSA O121, Douglas Fir Plywood.

.10 CAN/CSA S269.3-M, Concrete Formwork.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 Concrete: 30 Mpa unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Exterior concrete to have 5-7% entrained air.

.2 Design concrete so that material will not segregate and excessive bleeding will not occur.

.3 Comply to the MTC Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for signs and flagging when working within existing road ways. Any requirements to restrict local traffic due to the contractors works, must be reviewed and approved by the Consultant.




SFAI 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product data: .1 Submit duplicate copies of manufacturer's Product data in accordance with

the Conditions of the Contract for each material indicating: .1 Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference

standard(s), and characteristics. .2 Product transportation, storage, handling and installation

requirements.

.2 Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract indicating elevations, sections, details, materials, joint assemblies, finishes and relationships to adjacent construction.

1.5

.1

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Inspection and testing: .1 Materials: CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M; Inspect and test for conformance to

requirements of this Standard and to Specifications. .2 Tests will be made in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.2-M. .3 Remove defective materials and completed Work which do not conform to

the Contract Documents.

1.6

.1

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Deliver and store materials on Site in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Conform to CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M.

.2 Do not deposit concrete on frozen ground. When deposited in forms concrete shall have a temperature between 10°C and 30°C and these limits shall be maintained for 72 hours.

2

Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Forms: Plywood to CSA O121, G1S; Douglas Fir plywood, seven ply, exterior grade, waterproof glue, edges sealed with oil based sealer.

.2 Form ties: Adjustable snap ties, formed to break 25 mm or more from surface of concrete after form removal, with a minimum working strength of 1360 kg.




SFAI 3

.3 Form release agent: Chemically active, non-staining, VOC compliant, release agents containing compounds that react with free lime present in concrete forming water insoluble soaps, preventing concrete from sticking to forms.

.4 Reinforcing steel: CAN/CSA G30.18-M; Billet-steel bars, deformed unless indicated otherwise, Grade 400R.

.5 Welded steel wire fabric: ASTM A185/A185-M; Resistance welded in size and spacing shown for smooth wire fabric, in flat sheets only.

.6 Chairs, bolsters, supports, spacers: CAN/CSA A23.1-M with sufficient strength to rigidly support weight of reinforcement and construction loads. Manufactured by NCA/Acrow - Richmond or Dayton Superior.

.7 Cement: CAN/CSA A3000; Portland, Type 10.

.8 Coarse and fine aggregate: CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M.

.9 Water: CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M.

.10 Water reducing admixture: ASTM C494/C494-M, Type A.

.11 Set retarding admixture: ASTM C494/C494-M, Type D.

.12 Air entraining admixture: CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M and ASTM C260.

.13 Pigmented curing compound: ASTM C309, Type 2, Class B; White pigmented resin based.

.14 Joint filler: ASTM D994, Asphalt impregnated; ‘Asphalt Joint Expansion Joint Filler’ by W. R. Meadows Ltd., in thickness shown on Contract Drawings. Furnish kraft paper or polyethylene sheet as bond breaker between sealant and joint filler

.15 Joint Sealant: Two component, non-tracking, chemically reative urethane/coal tar modified sealant; ‘Sealtight Gardox’ by W. R. Meadows Ltd. or ‘Vulkem 202' by Tremco.

.16 Bonding Agent: Furnish ‘Sika-Dur’ by Sika, or ‘Intralock’ by W. R. Meadows.

2.2 MIXES

.1 Acceptance of any concrete mix proportion or material, does not preclude its future rejection if it is subsequently found to lack uniformity, or if it fails to conform to requirements specified, or if its field performance is found to be unacceptable.

.2 Mix concrete and concrete proportions in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M.




SFAI 4

2.3 ADMIXTURES

.1 Use admixtures for concrete from single manufacturer, unless otherwise acceptable to Consultant.

.2 Have manufacturer certify that admixtures are compatible.

.3 Add admixtures to concrete mix in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.

.4 Except as specified otherwise, comply with requirements of CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2- M.

.5 Use of calcium chloride or additional admixtures, other than those specified, is not

acceptable.

3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Give Consultant at least 2 working days notice prior to placement of concrete to

permit a review of compaction, placement of formwork, reinforcing steel, and associated items embedded in concrete for conformance to reviewed shop drawings and Contract Documents.

.2 Do not place concrete on surfaces which contain frost, water or debris.

.3 Provide concrete curb cuts and sidewalk handicap access ramps as indicated, in

accordance with the authorities having jurisdiction.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Verify grades of items set in paving area for conformity with elevations and sections before placing granular base and subbase material.

.2 Obtain approval of subgrade by Consultant before placing granular subbase and

base.

.3 Set out work from lines and levels shown on drawings.

.4 Prevent damage to adjacent and/or existing buildings and/or properties, and existing curbs, sidewalks and asphalt paving.

.5 Accurately saw-cut and modify existing sidewalks to nearest adjacent

dummy/expansion joint as directed on site by Consultant.

.6 Remove and dispose of debris from the work of this section in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.




SFAI 5

.7 Fine grade, shape and compact subgrade to minimum of 95% Standard Proctor Density.

.8 Wet base immediately in advance of concreting to ensure a firm moist surface

without ponding.

.9 Repair damage to base resulting from hauling or equipment operations.

3.3 FORMWORK

.1 Construct formwork in accordance with CAN/CSA S269.3-M to produce finished concrete conforming to shape, dimensions, locations and elevations indicated. Ensure no lumber remains in concrete.

.2 Set forms true to line and grade, join neatly and tightly, and stake securely to resist

concrete pressure and impact from tampers without springing.

.3 Apply release agent by spray in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure form surfaces receive a uniform coating.

3.4 REINFORCING

.1 Place reinforcing steel as shown on reviewed shop drawings and in accordance with

CAN/CSA A23.1-M. Make bars as long as possible.

.2 Make splices in locations shown on Drawings. Lap lengths in accordance with CSA A23.3 unless otherwise shown.

.3 Lap ends and sides of wire fabric not less than 150 mm.

3.5 PLACING OF CONCRETE

.1 Before placing fresh concrete against set or partially set concrete, clean surfaces to

remove dirt, scum, shavings, debris, laitance, etc. on set surfaces, brush generously with bonding agent.

.2 Place concrete in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M.

.3 Slope concrete to levels shown on Contract Drawings.

.4 Do not place concrete at such a rate as to endanger formwork or to prevent proper

compaction.

.5 Place concrete to prevent cold joints and segregation and vibrate sufficiently to ensure thorough compaction, maximum density in accordance to CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M

.6 Check Work frequently with accurate instruments during placing of concrete.




SFAI 6

.7 When completing concrete placement for day, carry placement through to a scheduled joint location.

.8 Where concrete placement is stopped for more than 30 minutes due to breakdowns, weather or any other reasons, construct extra bulkhead and construction joint as directed.

3.6 CONCRETE CURBS

.1 Align concrete curbs with curves and tangents indicated on drawings. Concrete curb to be in accordance to details indicated on drawings.

.2 Where existing curb is met, the contractor must make the required transition to style and grade of existing curb to the satisfaction of the Architect.

.3 Curbs shall have expansion joints at minimum 4500 mm o.c. and in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. Place reinforcing bars at top and base of curb, with minimum 50 mm concrete cover.

.4 All restoration of the existing road structure for the transition to existing curb is the responsibility of the contractor.

.5 Finish edges of dummy joints and expansion joints with 3 mm radius edging tool.

3.7 CONCRETE PAVEMENTS

.1 Concrete sidewalk to be in accordance with details indicated on drawings.

.2 Concrete for standard sidewalk to be 150 mm thick, except through entrances where the concrete shall be 200 mm thick with wire mesh. The compacted granular ‘A’ is to be 150 mm thick at all locations.

.3 Where existing sidewalk is met, make the required transition to grade, to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Furthermore, co-ordinate with the City and Consultant, to insure compatibility of existing and or future adjacent works by City forces.

.4 All structural concrete, such as but not limited to, concrete walkway adjacent to building, concrete pads for loading docks, and concrete slabs for loading areas to be constructed in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.

.5 Dummy joints: 6 mm deep at 1500 mm o.c. Tool joints with 6 mm wide steel trowel, radiusing edges 6 mm.

.6 Expansion joints: 6000 mm o.c. maximum.

.7 Tool edges of sidewalk with 50 mm wide steel trowel, radiusing edges 6 mm.

.8 Install sealant in expansion/isolation joints as shown and specified.




SFAI 7

3.8

.1

CONSOLIDATING

Consolidate concrete in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M.

.2 Work concrete into complete contact with forms and embedded items. Consolidate concrete adjacent to side forms and along entire length of forms to ensure a smooth surface finish after stripping of formwork.

3.9 CURING AND PROTECTION

.1 Cure and protect concrete in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2-M.

.2 Apply curing compound after finishing operations have been completed, at rate recommended by compound manufacturer. Ensure compound application is uniform and continuous over entire area being cured.

3.10 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

.1 Obtain Consultant's acceptance to install construction joints in locations other than those shown.

.2 Construct construction joints to CAN/CSA A23.1-M and as shown. Supply and install dowels in construction joints unless otherwise detailed.

.3 Joints at building face or other abutments: place 12 mm joint filler keeping top 12 mm below concrete surface; apply kraft paper or polyethylene bond over filler and fill with self-levelling sealant applied in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

.4 For sawn joints: .1 Do sawn joints in accordance with drawing details. Prepare sample sawn

joint for approval by Consultant. .2 Ensure joints are straight. Mark alignment with chalk line or other suitable

guide. Layout to be approved by Consultant. .3 Saw joints using approved equipment and methods to produce joint

dimensions indicated. .4 Supply sufficient men and equipment including standby equipment, to

maintain a satisfactory sawing schedule. .5 Schedule sawing operations on 24 hour basis and consistent with concrete

placing. .6 Make initial saw cuts in a progressive manner and as soon as possible

without excessive ravelling. .7 If a crack occurs ahead of saw cut, stop immediately. Move ahead several

joints and cut one or more joints before returning to saw intermediate joints. Where cracking persists, make 1060 mm saw cut from one edge and complete sawing from opposite edge. Adjust sawing schedule accordingly.

.8 If uncontrolled cracking or other surface damage results from inadequate or improper sawing techniques suspend further concrete operations until situation is corrected and immediately remove and replace damaged slabs.




SFAI 8

.9 Immediately on completion of sawing, flush joints with water to remove laitance.

3.11 FINISHING

.1 When striking off concrete surface, maintain a uniform roll of concrete ahead of first

screed for it’s full length when finishing machine is on first pass.

.2 Where joints are formed rather than sawn, form longitudinal and transverse joints after final pass of finishing machine.

.3 Hand finish areas inaccessible to finishing machine to same quality and surface

characteristics as machine finished surfaces.

.4 Finish concrete surface with an approved float at proper time. Operate from edge to edge with a wiping motion while advancing, with each succeeding pass overlapping previous one.

.5 Check surface with approved straightedge 4500 mm long. Correct irregularities

exceeding 5 mm before concrete takes initial set.

.6 Finish edges of slabs with edging tool to form a smooth squared surface. Do not patch with cement paste.

3.12 IDENTIFICATION STAMP

.1 For sidewalks in the public right-of-way, mark concrete at each end of the work and

at least every 18000 mm or such other places as the Consultant may select.

.2 The stamp shall be located on the centre of the bay of walk, next to and parallel to a transverse joint.

.3 The size and shape of the stamp shall be as shown on City of Toronto Drawings.

.4 The imprint shall be clear and legible and satisfactory to the Consultant.

3.13 BROOM FINISH

.1 Commence texturing immediately after float finishing.

.2 Use soft bristled broom to produce an approved light, non-slip concrete surface

finish with fine granular or sandy texture free from disfigurations. Finishes to be approved by Consultant.

.3 Apply broom finish at right angles to curb and parallel to joints. All trowel and tool

marks to be removed with broom. Do not contaminate joints by over-brooming.

.4 Finish to match existing striped concrete sidewalk to remain, and to Consultant’s approval.




SFAI 9

3.14

.1

REMOVAL OF FORMS

Do not disturb forms until concrete has hardened and developed sufficient strength to safely support its own weight and load on it.

.2 Strip formwork in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.1-M.

3.15 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

.1 Concrete is defective when: .1 Containing excessive honeycombing or embedded debris. .2 Concrete damaged by freezing or which is unsatisfactory due to placement at

too high a temperature. .3 Average 28 day strength of any three consecutive strength tests is less than

specified minimum 28 day strength. .4 Any 28 day strength test result is less than 80% of specified minimum 28 day

strength. .5 Surface texturing, joint type and placement and tolerances are unacceptable

in the opinion of the Consultant.

.2 Repair of defective concrete work: .1 Repair defective areas while concrete is still plastic, otherwise wait until

curing is completed. Use repair methods approved by Consultant. .2 Grind off high surface variations where directed.

.3 Remove and replace defective concrete where directed.

.1 Remove minimum 3000 mm of pavement by sawing through concrete across full lane width.

.2 Replace with new concrete to this specification.

.3 Construct dummy contraction joint between sawn face of existing concrete and face of new concrete.

3.16 PROTECTION

.1 Do not open concrete pavement to traffic or construction equipment until concrete

reaches 70% of specified strength or until approved by Consultant.

END OF SECTION



Renovations MASONRY SECTION 04220

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 The work described in this section consists of the supply and installation of unit masonry, mortar fill

where noted on drawings, and building in items supplied by other trades. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Supply of loose steel lintels Section 05500. Insulation under Section 07200. Cladding under Section 07420. Fire stopping Section 07250. Caulking Section 07900. Doors and Frames under Section 08100. Supply of access door for mechanical/electrical Division 15 and 16. 1.3 WORK INSTALLED BUT SUPPLIED BY OTHERS 1.3.1 Build into masonry elements, inserts, anchors, bolts, sleeves and other items supplied by other Sections

and which are required for installation and performance of work of other sections. 1.3.2 Install reinforcing steel and concrete fill into block lintels and masonry walls. 1.3.3 Install loose steel lintels and bearing plates required for support of masonry elements supplied by others

under Division 5. 1.3.4 Build in wall plugs, blocking and bucks provided by others under Division 6. 1.3.5 Build in furring and anchors to receive cladding material under Division 7. 1.3.6 Build in metal flashing and reglets to receive flashing provided by others under Division 7. 1.3.7 Install steel door frames provided by others under Division 8. Grout frames full with mortar. 1.3.8 Set and build in access doors indicated, provided by others under Division 10. 1.3.9 Build in recessed mechanical and electrical items and work provided by others under Division 15 and 16. 1.3.10 Included in the above are all sleeves, brackets, anchors, bolts, inserts for structure and equipment.

Provide chases and openings as required. The bond shall not be broken at buried pipes, boxes or conduits. No patching will be permitted.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Meet requirements of CAN3-A370-M84, CAN3-A371-M84 and CAN3-S304-M84. 1.4.2 Ensure that work is executed under the continuous supervision and direction of a competent foreman. 1.4.3 Comply with details and construction notes when constructing fire rated walls and partitions. Solidly fill

around beams and joists penetrating fire rated walls/partitions in accord with requirements of Ontario Building Code.




SFAI 2

1.4.4 Masonry units used in partitions/walls designated to provide a fire separation shall be of thickness and material required to achieve required rating. Hollow masonry units used in fire separations shall have required percentage of solid material to meet required rating. Concrete block used in fire rated elements shall be suitably identified to permit verification of fire rating.

1.4.5 Provide standard tests as carried out by a recognized testing company, acceptable to consultant, on the

actual production run of brick including compression, absorption, and saturation coefficient. Provide 50 cycle freeze-thaw resistant test. Brick must meet specified requirements.

1.5 EXISTING CONSTRUCTION 1.5.1 Make up sample brick and sample mortar for comparison on mortar to match existing. 1.5.2 New brick unit is to match existing brick colour as closely as possible. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.6.1 Deliver cement, lime and mortar ingredients with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. Store under dry

conditions. Protect aggregates from weather and inclusion of foreign matter. Store aggregates and masonry units on approved cleared platforms or pallets and cover with tarpaulins. Store masonry units above and off ground on level platforms which permit air circulation under stacks.

1.6.2 Deliver and handle masonry units by methods which will guard against soiling and chipping. Dumping

from vehicles will not be permitted. 1.6.3 During storage, protect masonry units against moisture absorption, damage and staining. 1.7 PROTECTION 1.7.1 When work is not in progress, cover tops of masonry elements exposed to weather with non staining

weatherproof covers. Covers shall be at least 24" wider than masonry elements and shall be well secured against displacement.

1.7.2 Protect finished work at corners, sills, projections and other areas likely to be damaged, with suitable

coverings until completion of building. 1.7.3 Adequately brace masonry walls and partitions to resist effects of wind and other lateral forces. 1.7.4 Protect the work of other trades from damage resulting from the work of this section. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1.8.1 HOT AND COLD WEATHER WORK

1.8.1.1 When outside temperature is below or likely to go below 50c, provide heat to maintain temperature of materials and surrounding air at 50c or higher during laying and for 72 hours thereafter. Submit for approval the proposed method of protecting masonry against low temperatures. Salamanders will not be permitted.

1.8.1.2 Keep units completely free from ice and frost. Preheat mortar materials and mortar boards.

Temperature of mortar shall be between 210c and 480c. Protect mortar from frost. Do not use admixtures or antifreezes in mortar.

1.8.1.3 Maintain dry beds for masonry and use dry masonry units only. Do not wet masonry units in




SFAI 3

winter. 1.8.1.4 Protect freshly laid masonry from drying too rapidly, by means of waterproof, non staining coverings. 1.8.1.5 Salt or other chemicals for lowering the temperature of the mortar shall not be used, nor any other

admixtures be used unless specified.

1.8.1.6 No materials shall be heated above 490C (1200F). 2. PRODUCTS 2.2 CONCRETE BLOCK 2.2.1 Blocks for non–load–bearing units shall conform to CAN/CSA–A165.1–M85; H/7.5/C/M for hollow units,

and S/12.5/C/M for solid units. Blocks used in construction of walls designed to support floor or roof, shall be load–bearing units, conforming to CAN/CSA–A165.1–M85; H/15/A/M for hollow units, and S/15/A/M for solid units.

2.2.2 Architectural Block; 2.2.3 Concrete Block - autoclaved 190 mm x 390 mm face dimension - Standard, solid, semi-solid, lintel and

header as required. 2.2.4 Bull-nosed and double bull-nosed for exposed external corners with 1" radius. 2.2.5 Lightweight Block (CB) To CAN3-A165 Series M85 H/15/C/M and S/15/C/M. Acceptable manufactures

include Primeau Argo, TCC Peel, CBM or other source approved by consultant. 2.2.6 Normal Weight Block To CAN3-A165 Series M85 H/15/A/M/ and S/15/A/M. 2.2.7 Units must be cured for at least 28 days before delivery and shall have a moisture content of not more

than 30% of total absorption. 2.2.8 Size Unless indicated, metric modular x thickness as shown on drawings. 2.2.9 Exposed concrete block units shall be uniform in size, free of perceptible warp or twist, without chipped,

ragged or broken edges; have a uniform surface texture, free of cracks, blemishes or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. All concrete block units shall be autoclaved and free of damage, surface indentations, surface cracks or other blemishes.

2.2.10 Where indicated on drawings construction notes and/or specifications, provide solid or semi-solid units. 2.2.11 Provide manufacturer's catalogued special units such as bullnose, corner, lintel block and others as

indicated on drawings and in construction notes. 2.2.12 Conform to National Building Code for requirements of masonry units for fire rated walls, of ratings

required and not less than 75% solid, 3 core, for hollow units. 2.3 METAL REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORS 2.3.1 Material High tensile strength steel wire meeting ASTM A82, by Blok-Lok or Dur-O-Wal. 2.3.2 Finish Hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A153, Class B.




SFAI 4

2.3.3 Horizontal Reinforcement 2.3.3.1 Horizontal mesh reinforcement shall be heavy–duty 4.8 mm steel rod, hot dip galvanized with 1.5 oz. per

sq. foot, truss or ladder design, manufactured by Blok–Lok Limited, Dur–O– Wal Ltd., or approved equal. Provide all factory fabricated pieces required. Reinforcing width shall be 50 mm less than the total wall thickness.

2.3.3.2 Single Wythe and Solid Walls Truss type with minimum 9 ga thick side and cross rods unless otherwise

indicated; width 2" less than wall thickness BLOK-TRUS BL30. 2.3.3.3 Cavity Walls (coursing not aligned) 2 wire truss type, back-up wythe reinforcement 3/16" rods and 3/16"

box ties, with restraining rod welded on, at each intersection point; and 3/16" hook box ties BLOK-LOK BL37.

2.3.3.3 Provide prefabricated assemblies for corners and intersections. 2.3.3.4 Masonry Connectors and Reinforcing, Cavity Wall Alternate: Masonry Connectors and Reinforcing: Shall be to CSA-A370-04 for connectors and CSA-A371-04 for

reinforcing. For tying brick and concrete block veneers to brick, architectural block and concrete block use Fero Block Shear tie (or approved equal) in combination with 2-wire ladder horizontal reinforcing 3.66 mm dia. Wire side and cross rods. Tie connector length shall suit concrete block width plus thickness of specified insulation with sufficient length to provide placement of V-Tie legs at center-line of veneer (outer width). All components to hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.

2.3.4 Anchors & Ties 2.3.4.1 Wall Ties for masonry veneer shall be corrugated hot dip galvanized steel, 32 mm wide x 0.76 mm thick

and length to permit minimum 75 mm embedment into each bearing. At wood framing bend minimum 40 mm for fastening to framing. Space ties at maximum 400 mm vertical, and 600 mm horizontal. Fasteners shall be corrosion–resistant.

2.3.4.2 Nonbearing Walls and Partitions to Bearing Walls Corrugated wall ties minimum 22 ga thick, 7/8" x 7"

BLOK-LOK BLT7A. 2.3.4.3 Masonry Walls, Partitions & Veneer to Concrete Elements Flexible wire tie, 3/16" thick, length to suit

wall condition, and dovetail anchor slot BLOK-LOK BLT8 or POS-I-TIE NWTC-TAPCON screw anchors by National Wire Products Industries Inc. Reinforcing for concrete block lintels shall be deformed steel bars conforming to CAN/CSA–G30.18–M92.

2.3.4.4 Masonry to Structural Steel Flexible triangular 3/16" thick ties and weld on anchor straps BLOK-LOK

FLEX-O-LOK BLT9 or POS-I-TIE NWDI-DRIL-IT screw anchors by National Wire Products Industries Inc.

2.3.4.5 Strap Anchors Galvanized, 14 ga thick, crimped, 2" x 6". 2.4 LATERAL SUPPORT ANCHORS 2.4.1 Masonry Wall -Top Stabilizing Anchor, DUR-O-WAL - mechanical anchoring system- steel dowel,

vertically welded to galvanized steel plate 2.4.2 Prime coated steel angles 3" x 3" x 8" long x 1/4" thick. 2.4.2.1 Steel CAN3-G40.21-M81, minimum 260W.




SFAI 5

2.4.2.2 Primer CGSB 1-GP-40M. 2.4.2.3 Fasteners Expansion type concrete anchors, two per angle. 2.5 PREMOULDED JOINT FILLER, NON-FIRE RATED LOCATIONS 2.5.1 Closed cell vinyl foam, compressed 25% when in joint, one of the following: 2.5.2 Unifoam R 1009 - Flexible by Goodco Ltd. 2.5.3 Rodofoam PR by Sternson Ltd. 2.6 FLASHING AND DAMPCOURSE

2.6.1 Dampproof Course and Membrane Flashing Blueskin TWF manufactured by Bakor, a SBS modified bitumen, self-adhering sheet membrane complete with a cross-laminated polyethylene film.

2.6.2 Primer for Dampproof Course and Membrane Flashing Blueskin Primer manufactured by Bakor, a quick setting synthetic rubber based adhesive.

2.6.3 Mastics & Termination Sealants Liquid air seal mastic be 230-21 Insulation Adhesive manufactured by

Bakor, a synthetic, trowel applied, rubber based adhesive, conforming to CGSB 71-GP-24M, resistance to alkalis and salt.

2.6.4 Flashing Back-Up Minimum 20 ga thick aluminized sheet steel. Galvalume by Dofasco. 2.6.5 Weep Holes DA 1069 Cell Vent by Dur-O-Wal. 2.6.6 Bonding Agent for Parging Surfacrete Concentrate by Sternson. 2.7 MORTAR MIXES 2.7.1 Mortar shall conform to CSA–A179–M1976. Use type `S' for block below grade and reinforced brick.

Use type Ò' for non–bearing walls and use type `N' or Type 'S' for all bearing walls including brick veneer. (See Structural Drawings).

2.7.2 Water conforming to CSA–A–179–M1976 and shall be potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of

salt, oil, acid, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substance. 2.7.3 Sand - clean sharp - CSA Specification A82-56 M 1976. 2.7.4 Lime - hydrated lime - CSA Specification C-82-43. 2.7.5 Cement - Portland Cement - CSA Specification CAN3-A5. 2.7.6 Masonry cement used in mortar shall conform to CAN/CSA–A8–M88. 2.7.7 Aggregate used in mortar shall conform to CSA–A 82.56–M76. 2.7.8 Hydrated lime shall conform to CSA–A179–M1976. 2.7.9 Quick lime shall conform to CSA–A179–M1976. 2.7.10 Colour and texture of mortar to match existing. Cement mortar.




SFAI 6

3. EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP 3.1.1 Execute work by skilled persons in accordance with the N.B.C. and CAN3–5304–M84. 3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 Establish all lines, levels and coursing and protect from disturbance. 3.2.2 Coordinate all work with other trades and prepare all items to be built in. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION 3.3.1 Place masonry in accordance with lines and levels indicated on drawings. 3.3.2 Lay masonry work in uniform manner. No one portion of work shall rise more than 2'-6" above general

level. Do not lay more than 5'-0" in height of any wall in any working day. 3.3.3 No masonry wall less than 8" thick is to touch underside of structure above. A 1" gap will be left for

placement of fire rated expanding foam. Some of these walls require mechanical lateral support (see structural). Exterior walls and internal 8" brick walls such as around elevators are to be built tight to underside of slabs on beam above.

3.3.4 Cut exposed masonry units with power driven masonry saw only. Provide straight and true edges,

ragged or chipped edges will not be permitted. 3.3.5 Consult with other Sections to avoid cutting and patching. Cooperate in setting and aligning built-in

items. Build in conduit and piping so that they are not exposed. Do not break masonry bond to accommodate concealed built-in items.

3.3.6 Grout solid with mortar all spaces around built-in items. 3.3.7 Build in metal nailing plugs, grounds, inserts, anchor bolts, bearing plates, loose and miscellaneous

items of steel and iron, isolated beams, lintels and shelf angles, sleeves, blocking and items furnished by other Sections.

3.3.8 Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken its initial set. Where adjustments must be made,

remove mortar and replace. 3.3.9 Fully bond external and internal corners and intersections. 3.3.10 Buttering corners of joints, deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. 3.3.11 Where non–bearing masonry partitions extend to underside of floor, roof deck or structural system, stop

masonry short 10 mm to 13 mm to allow for live load deflection. Fill gap with joint filler. Provide structural anchorage in accordance with CAN 3–S304–M84.

3.3.12 Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height. All vertical and horizontal joints are to be equal and of

uniform thickness. Lay in full bed of mortar, properly joined with other work. 3.3.13 Remove excess mortar and projections. Take care to prevent breaking masonry corners.




SFAI 7

3.3.14 Apply through-wall flashing and damp proof coursing membrane in accordance with CSA A371-94 Masonry Construction for Buildings; along the base of masonry veneer walls, over windows, doors and other wall openings required to be protected.

3.3.15 Where non-load bearing partitions extend to 1" from underside of structure, tightly pack space between top of partition and underside of structure with 1 hour fire rated expanding foam.

3.3.16 Provide paper-backed galvanized steel lath as required for support of grout and mortar fill within masonry

elements. 3.3.17 Install access doors occurring in masonry elements, required by Divisions 15 and 16. Install access

doors plumb, level, properly aligned and securely anchored, in locations directed by Divisions 15 and 16. 3.4 CHASES, OPENINGS & HOLES 3.4.1 Chases and openings shall be built in during erection of masonry work, and purpose-made chased units

shall be built into proper position. 3.4.2 Openings in masonry work exceeding 8" opening width shall be provided with lintels in accord with lintel

schedule. 3.4.3 Chasing of completed walls or formation of holes shall only be carried out with inspector's prior approval

and then only with a tool designed to cleanly cut masonry units. 3.4.4 Chases shall be plumb and shall be a minimum of one unit length from jambs of openings. 3.4.5 Horizontal or diagonal chases are not permitted. 3.5 MASONRY BEARING 3.5.1 Masonry bearing shall extend full thickness of wall. 3.5.2 Unless otherwise indicated provide at least 8" of bearing for lintels and beams. 3.5.3 Bearings of Block Masonry Walls Use minimum 2 courses of solid or grouted block units except where

concrete bearing pads are required. 3.5.4 Build masonry neatly around beam and lintel bearings. 3.6 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 3.6.1 Where fresh masonry joins partially or totally set masonry, clean exposed surfaces of set masonry and

remove loose mortar and foreign material prior to laying fresh masonry. 3.6.2 If necessary to stop off a horizontal run of masonry, rack back one-half masonry unit length in each

course. Toothing will not be permitted unless approved by the consultant. 3.7 BLOCKWORK 3.7.1 Blockwork shall be laid up in running bond except where otherwise indicated on drawings. Unless

indicated, blocks shall be of thickness required to produce totally wythe thickness. Course to match height of existing walls. Form concave mortar joints except for exposed locations and flush struck joints where concealed.




SFAI 8

3.7.2 Unless indicated, provide lightweight concrete block in exposed locations except at bearing walls, where normal weight block is required.

3.7.3 Do not wet blocks before laying. 3.7.4 Units shall be laid with webs aligning one over the other in full bed of mortar over entire laying surface

including webs. 3.7.5 Exposed faces shall be full units laid out to minimize cutting with not less than 4" at any vertical edge or

corner. 3.7.6 Top course of block walls shall be laid with semisolid blocks at door and window sills, at wall changes to

brick and where shown on drawings. 3.7.7 Use solid block for at least two courses under all point bearing loads. 3.7.8 Form exposed external block foundation corners with end units. 3.7.9 Provide bull-nose block at all exposed block corners. Grind smooth projections and ridges at bull-nose

created by block fabrication process. 3.7.10 Provide minimum 16" solid or grouted block for jambs of openings and at ends of walls. 3.7.11 Cope or cut with power saw exposed units to accommodate flush mounted electrical outlets, grilles and

other components. Leave maximum 3/16" clearance. Cover plates and flanges must cover cut edges. 3.7.12 Lay sound absorbing block with the open side of the cavity facing down. Keep slots free of mortar and

debris. 3.7.13 Take special care to prevent mortar or other substances from staining exposed block faces. Replace

stained blocks as directed by the consultant at no extra cost to contract. 3.7.14 Ensure there is always a mortar line at the freshed floor line. 3.8 BLOCK LINTELS 3.8.1 Provide reinforced concrete block lintels over openings where steel lintels are not scheduled. 3.8.2 Unless otherwise specified, reinforcement in concrete block lintels shall be as follows: Up to 1200 mm span – 200 mm deep lintel – 2–15 M bars Up to 2400 mm span – 400 mm deep lintel – 2–20 M bars 3.8.3 Use reinforcing bars of full length only. 3.8.4 Place and consolidate concrete without disturbing reinforcing. 3.8.5 Build block lintels; install reinforcement and concrete fill. Unless otherwise detailed make lintels 8" high. 3.8.6 Lintels shall have minimum 8" bearing on each side of opening, unless otherwise indicated on drawings,

with care taken in layout of wall to ensure that lintel jointing coincides with regular bond of wall. 3.8.7 Allow lintels to reach maximum strength before removing temporary supports. 3.9 BOND BEAMS




SFAI 9

3.9.1 Provide bond beams where and as indicated on drawings. 3.9.2 Reinforce with 2–15 M bars 24 mm from bottom and lap splices in accordance with CAN3– A23–M84. 3.9.3 Concrete shall be 20 MPa. Reinforcing shall be deformed bars with a minimum yield strength of 400

MPa. 3.9.3 Provide building paper in joint at bearings and at vehicle joint at ends of block lintels to break bond. 3.10 BRICKWORK Not used. 3.11 CAVITY WALLS Not used 3.12 REGLETS & RECESSES 3.12.1 Form continuous reglets and recesses in masonry elements as shown on drawings and as required to

accommodate work of other sections. 3.12.2 Rake out mortar joints and/or make saw cuts in masonry units as required. 3.12.3 Make reglets 1" deep, unless otherwise shown. 3.13 JOINT WORK 3.13.1 Make joints uniform and 3/8" thick unless otherwise shown on drawings. 3.13.2 Joints in exposed and painted surfaces and in masonry behind wall mounted and built-in fixtures, shall

be tooled when thumbprint hard with a 1" o/d. plastic tool to produce a concave joint. 3.13.3 Joints in unparged masonry below grade shall be pointed tight with a trowel. 3.13.4 Joints directly behind resilient base, rigid insulation, ceramic tile and gypsum board shall be struck flush. 3.13.5 Weather Precautions: Provide adequate shelter to ensure that mortar is not permitted to harden prematurely from exposure to

sun and wind. Mix mortar only as required for immediate use. 3.13.6 Repointing Mortar Joints: Rake out mortar joints which are weathered, contain loose mortar or do not provide a full weather tight

mortar joint, in locations noted on drawings. Remove existing mortar with a wire brush, chisel or masonry saw blade. Care must be taken to ensure that masonry units are not damaged. Remove and replace broken or damaged masonry units with new units to match existing. Before filling joints , remove all loose particles and dust. Fill joints in layers allowing each layer time to harden before the next layer is applied. Ensure that joints are entirely filled. All mortar joints shall be tooled. Profile of joint shall match existing.

3.14 ANCHORING, BONDING AND REINFORCEMENT 3.14.1 Anchor or bond walls and partitions at points where they intersect. 3.14.2 Except where stack bond is required bond each wythe or masonry walls and partitions at corners by

alternately bonding 50% of unit so each wall and partition at corner intersection.




SFAI 10

3.14.3 Bond non-load bearing walls and partitions to load bearing walls with ties spaced at 16" o/c. vertically.

Provide one tie for each 4" thickness, or part thereof, of wall or partition. 3.14.4 Anchor masonry walls and partitions to concrete elements with anchors spaces at 16" vertically. 3.14.5 Unless otherwise indicated reinforce all walls and partitions with continuous horizontal metal

reinforcement, installed at 16" o/c. vertically. 3.14.6 At all wall openings place continuous reinforcement in first and second mortar joints above and below

openings. Additional reinforcement at openings shall extend 24" beyond both sides of openings. 3.14.7 Install prefabricated corner assemblies at corners. 3.14.8 Lap continuous reinforcement 6" at splices. Cut reinforcement at control joints. 3.14.9 Tie masonry veneer to concrete back-up with veneer anchors at maximum 16" vertically and 2'- 8"

horizontally. 3.14.10 Provide lateral support at top of nonbearing masonry partitions. Fasten masonry wall-top stabilizing

anchors to structural deck or beam at maximum spacing as indicated on drawings. Clearance for deflection as indicated on drawings.

3.14.11 Provide galvanized crimp ties 36 mm x 200 mm long 24 gauge steel for bonding where toothing is not

possible. "Herringbone" or "Chevron" pattern. Connectors and anchors in accordance with CAN3-A370-M84.

3.15 GROUTED MASONRY 3.15.1 Provide grouted masonry at load bearing walls in accordance with requirements shown on structural

drawings. 3.15.2 Meet requirement of CAN3-S304-M84 Part 5 and CAN3-A371-M84 5.9 "Grouted Masonry" except where

indicated otherwise. 3.16 CONTROL JOINTS 3.16.1 Provide control joints in masonry walls at maximum 12'-0" at interior partitions supported by framed

slabs, at maximum 25'-0" o/c. at walls supported by foundation walls or footings, and where shown on drawings. Confirm actual locations of control joints with inspector before starting work.

3.16.2 Provide control joints at intersection of bearing and nonbearing walls. 3.16.3 Provide horizontal control joints below shelf angles. 3.16.4 Construct control joints as shown on drawings. Unless otherwise shown make control joints 1/2" wide.

Cut masonry reinforcement at vertical control joints. 3.17 DAMPPROOF COURSING & MEMBRANE FLASHING 3.17.1 Install damp proof course at top of foundation walls and where shown on drawings.




SFAI 11

3.17.2 Install through-wall flashing membrane in accordance with CSA A371-94 Masonry Construction for Buildings and at the following locations

i) Door heads. ii) Window heads. iii) Immediately above horizontal interruptions within exterior walls. iv) Where indicated on drawings. 3.17.3 Prime surfaces to receive dampproof course by roller or spray and allow minimum 30 minute open time.

Primed surfaces not covered by self-adhering membrane during the same working day must be re-primed.

3.17.4 Applications shall form a continuous flashing membrane and shall extend up a minimum of 200 mm up

the back-up wall. 3.17.5 At the end of each days work seal the top edge of the membrane where it meets the substrate using

liquid air seal mastic. Trowel apply a feathered edge to seal termination and shed water. 3.17.6 Ensure through-wall flashing membrane extends fully to the exterior face of the exterior masonry veneer.

At locations where flashing terminates or intersects wall openings including door frames, “end dam” flashing to protect openings and redirect water out. Trim off excess as directed by the consultant.

3.17.7 Apply dampproof coursing membrane over slabs on grade, prepare and prime surfaces, align and position membrane between slab and masonry block work.

3.17.8 Align and position the leading edge of self-adhering through-wall flashing membrane with the front

horizontal edge of the foundation walls, self angles and other substrates to be protected, partially remove protective film and roll membrane over surface and up vertically.

3.17.9 Press firmly into place. Ensure minimum 50 mm overlap at all end and side laps. Promptly roll all laps

and membrane to affect the seal. 3.17.10 Ensure all preparatory work is complete prior to applying self-adhering through-wall flashing membrane. 3.17.11 Ensure through-wall flashing membrane extends fully to the exterior face of the exterior masonry veneer.

Trim off excess as directed by the consultant.

3.17.12 Unless otherwise indicated carry membrane flashing up behind brick masonry units minimum 8" and turn into concrete block back-up. Mechanically secure top edge at concrete back-up.

3.17.13 Where indicated provide formed metal flashing back-up for support of membrane flashing. Form metal

back-up to profile indicated; secure back-up to supporting work.

3.18 WEEPING HOLES Not used 3.19 STEEL DOOR FRAMES 3.19.1 Install steel frames in masonry walls. Build in frames rigid, true and plumb. Fill voids between frames

and masonry with mortar grout. 3.19.2 Brace frames solidly in position while being built in. Provide temporary horizontal wood spreader at mid-

height of frames to ensure maintenance of required frame width until masonry work is completed. For frames over 4'-0" width provide temporary vertical support at centre of head.




SFAI 12

3.19.3 Comply with installation requirements specified under Section 08100. 3.19.4 At no time is a frame to be installed flush with a block surface. See frame details. 3.20 BUILT–IN WORK 3.20.1 As work progresses, build in hollow metal frames, steel angle lintels, nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates

and all other items supplied by other sections of work. 3.20.2 Build in items plumb and true to lines and levels indicated on drawings. 3.20.3 Bed anchors of hollow metal frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar. Fill masonry

cores with grout minimum 200 mm from framed openings. 3.20.4 Do not build in organic materials which will be subjected to rot or deterioration. 3.21 CUTTING AND FITTING 3.21.1 Cut and fit concrete block for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves and grounds. Cooperate fully with other

sections of work to ensure correct size, shape and location. 3.21.2 Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on drawings, or which

may impair appearance or strength of masonry work. 3.21.3 Fill hollow masonry solid with mortar for 300 mm minimum around openings. 3.22 PARGING 3.22.1 Provide parging at masonry foundation walls scheduled to be damp proofed and at other locations where

indicated. Do not parge walls scheduled to be waterproofed. 3.22.2 Parging Mix 1 part Portland Cement and 3 parts Sand by volume mixed with sufficient water to produce

workable mix. 3.22.3 Bond Coat Mix 60 lb.. Portland Cement and 1 gal. Surfacrete Concentrate and 1 gal. water. 3.22.4 Prepare substrates and apply bond coat in accordance with bonding agent manufacturer's

recommendations. Apply parging minimum 1/4" thick, trowelled to smooth surface. 3.23 PATCHING & CLEANING 3.23.1 At completion of work, holes and other defects in masonry joints shall be repaired and masonry surfaces

shall be thoroughly cleaned. 3.23.2 Holes in masonry joints shall be filled with mortar and suitably tooled. Cut out repoint defective joints. 3.23.3 Dry brush masonry surfaces at end of each day's work and after all final pointing. 3.23.4 Remove mortar smears and droppings from concrete block masonry surfaces after such smears and

droppings have dried. When mortar joints are dry and hard, clean block masonry surfaces by rubbing down with abrasive blocks and stiff fibre brushes.




SFAI 13

3.23.5 Remove mortar particles from clay masonry surfaces with wood paddles. Rub masonry surface with a dry brush to remove loosened particles and dust. Remove remaining stains from clay masonry surfaces by wet cleaning in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.23.6 Remove efflorescence from masonry surfaces by wet cleaning in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. 3.23.7 Upon completion of work, clean blockwork by brushing and washing. In extreme cases a 5% solution of

muriatic acid may used, preceded and followed by a copious bath of clean water. Clean block work to be painted to suit requirements of Section 09900.

3.23.8 Point or replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. 3.23.9 Clean soiled surfaces using a non–acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials.

Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Use non–metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.24 MASONRY REPAIR 3.24.1 Make good existing masonry disturbed by the alterations. Provide masonry infill as indicated on

drawings. Match existing materials and construction. Reinstated work shall be to the Architect's approval. All masonry repair work to match existing and comply with requirements for matching historical materials and details.

3.24.2 Where existing masonry has been removed, ensure that remaining previously attached masonry is solid

and forms a flat surface, re-mortar or rebuild as required. 3.24.3 For masonry repair, use texture, profile, thickness and size to suit existing wall conditions. Match

existing joint profile. 3.24.4 For repair work at existing, reuse existing brick wherever possible. 3.24.5 Tooth in new masonry to match existing bond where infilling existing openings or repairing saw cut

edges of new opening. END OF SECTION



Renovations METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 Comply with Section 01005 "General Requirements". 1.1.2 The work described in this Section consists of the supply and installation for miscellaneous metals,

fabrication, assembling erection prime, finish and touch–up painting including the following items: Counter brackets. Steel angle lintels. Steel angle or channel framing supports as indicated Miscellaneous bulkhead support details. and as indicated on drawings 1.1.3 Unless otherwise specified, extent of work shall also include all items listed in Article 2.3 of the Canadian

Institute of Steel Construction Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel for Buildings, latest revision. 1.1.4 REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL

REQUIREMENTS.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Grouting under Section 03370. Sealants under Section 07900.

Drywall under Section 09250. Painting under Section 09900. Fixing of Mechanical Equipment under Division 15.

Handrails and balusters, ladder. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF WELDING 1.3.1 Perform Work in accordance with CSA W47.1 and CSA W55.3. The welding shop and operators, equipment, materials and methods employed on the work are to be

certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau conforming to CSA W47.1.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 Submit shop drawings of all items of this Section to requirements of Section 01300.

1.4.2 Indicate on shop drawings, profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type

of fasteners, and accessories.

1.4.3 Shop drawings shall bear the stamp and signature of the Engineer, registered in the

Province of Ontario, responsible for the design of the work of this Section.

1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

1.5.1 Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.




SFAI 2

1.6 DESIGN LOAD 1.6.1 Design railings to meet requirements of governing authorities and in no instance shall load design be

less than 1.5 kN/m (100 lb./ft.).

Design stair, balustrade and landing construction and connections to Ontario Building

Code vertical and horizontal live load requirements.

1.7 HANDLING AND STORAGE 1.7.1 Store and handle to prevent damage, warping, chipping and scraping of the paint coat.

2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Materials Generally: New, free of rust, waves buckles or other defects which are visible or that may

impair structural adequacy and durability. 2.1.2 Steel: Structural; CAN/CSA-G40.21-92, Grade 44W, for rolled sections and Grade 50W for hollow

sections, otherwise of hot or cold rolled in alloy to suit needs of fabrication, use, appearance, and specified finishes.

2.1.3 Galvanizing – Hot dipped with a minimum coating of 275g/sq.m. of surface and to CSA G164–M1981.

2.1.4 Anchors: Where exposed, colour of anchor to match colour of material to be fastened; colour of metal to match metal anchored. Where not exposed, galvanized steel. 2.1.5 Angle lintels: welded or bolted back to back steel angles to profiles indicated, to sizes indicated for

openings, provide minimum 6” bearing for ends. Finish: shop painted. 2.1.6 Bituminous Paint: Alkali resisting, CAN/CGSB 1.108-M89. 2.1.7 Prime Paint on Steel: CISC/CPMA 1-73a for concealed work and CISC/CPMA 2-75 for exposed work,

for finish painting. 2.1.8 Fabricate metal fabrications to ensure that work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints

and seams, distortion and permanent deformation. 2.1.9 Fit joints, corners, copes, and mitres tightly, smoothly, and in true planes, and with concealed fastening

unless this is impossible by detail. Provide for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions between this and other work.

2.1.10 Weld connections where possible; bolt where not possible, cut off bolts flush with nuts, countersink bolt

heads and provide means to prevent loosening of nuts. Make welded joints continuous, tight and flush, ground smooth where exposed to view.

2.1.11 Finish surfaces and edges smooth, including holes. Fill joints and depressions with metal paste filler and

welds, and grind smooth. 2.1.12 Support work with level bearings. Machine grind bearing surfaces at loose components.




SFAI 3

2.1.13 Holes and Connections: Ream holes and include connectors as required for other work. 2.1.14 Priming of Steel: One coat of prime paint on surfaces except where field welded or embedded in

concrete. Remove from surfaces loose scale, rust, dirt, weld flux, and other foreign materials, and grind sharp projections smooth before priming. Work paint into all crevices and finish smoothly. Give surfaces inaccessible to finish painting two coats of prime paint.

3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.1.1 Before commencing work, make a thorough examination of other work upon which the miscellaneous

metal work of this contract is dependent. Examine conditions at site to ensure work is fabricated to fit surrounding construction, and around obstructions and projections in place or as indicated on Drawings, or both.

3.2 FABRICATION AND ERECTION 3.2.1 Workmanship: Build and erect the work true, square, straight, plumb, accurate to sizes detailed free

from defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Welding shall conform to CSA W59. Grind all exposed welds smooth.

3.2.2 Fit and assemble work in the shop, where possible. 3.2.3 Attach work with non-corrosive bolts or screws; at masonry into adhesive or expansion shields; at wood

by countersunk wood screws. 3.2.4 Install work plumb, true, square, straight, level, and fitted tightly and accurately to adjacent work. 3.2.5 Insulate between dissimilar metals, or between metal and masonry or concrete with bituminous paint to

prevent electrolysis. 3.2.6 Clean and refinish to remove soil and to repair prime painted finishes. Re-prime damaged prime

surfaces. Remove damaged, dented, defaced, or tool marked components and replace with new. 3.2.7 Hand over items for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with

setting templates. 3.2.8 Hot-dip galvanize all materials to be installed exterior to the building. 3.3 PAINTING 3.3.1 Prepare surfaces, shop prime and finish paint after fabrication of miscellaneous steel items in

accordance with Section 09900. 3.3.2 Do not paint steel surfaces that are to be encased in concrete. 3.3.3 Do not paint steel surfaces indicated as stainless steel finish or otherwise indicated for special finish. END OF SECTION



Renovations ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06100

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 Comply with Section 01005 "General Requirements".

1.1.2 The work described in this Section consists of the supply and installation of rough carpentry items

required in connection with the work as indicated on the drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Finish Carpentry Work under Section 06400. Gypsum Board under Section 09250. Insulation under Section 07200. Sheet Metal Flashing under Section 07600. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION 1.3.1 Deliver, store and protect materials and work at all times to prevent marking, soiling and staining and the

deterioration or the loss or impairment of their structural and other essential properties. 1.3.2 Keep materials under waterproof cover, in transit and at the job site. Do not store materials or finished

work within areas where cement or masonry is not thoroughly dry. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 2.1.1 All materials shall be straight, new, kiln dried and clean, properly sized and shaped to the correct

dimensions from actual and nominal sizes as noted on the drawings. 2.1.2 Quality, dimensions and moisture content of lumber shall conform to CSA Standard 0141–1970 for

Softwood Lumber and the official grading rules of the applicable grading authority for the particular species and grades. Grade mark all lumber delivered to the site.

2.1.3 Dimension Lumber: to CAN/CSA 0141-91 and CAN3-086-M84 and to National Lumber Grades Authority

Standard grading Rules 1987-grade category as follows: a) Light framing and blocking: species group spruce - "Construction" grade. 2.1.4 Plywood: to CSA 0151-M1978, Canadian Softwood Plywood a) All Locations except Backboards: Douglas Fir to CSA 0121-M1978 Un-sanded Sheathing Grade. b) Backboards: Canadian Softwood to CSA 0151-M1978. 2.1.5 Fasteners: nails, spikes and staples to CSA B111-1974; - hot dip galvanized steel for exterior work

including components located in exterior walls and roofs; bright finish steel in all other locations. Unless otherwise indicated use common spiral flathead nails.

a) Fasteners to hollow masonry and aerated concrete panel (Siporex) use toggle bolts; to solid

masonry or concrete use expansion shields, friction fit pins or lag bolts; to steel use self-tapping screws. Use lead or in-organic fibre plugs with specified screws in concrete/masonry.

b) Nails: To CSA B111-1974, c) Bolts, Nuts, Washers: ASTM A307, hot dip galvanized steel.




SFAI 2

d) Connectors, Anchors, Brackets, Spikes: Hot dip galvanized structural quality steel. e) Plugs for Masonry Walls: 4.5 mm galvanized sheet steel wall plugs by Drummond & Reeves,

approx. 75 mm deep and 57 mm wide. f) Screws: To CSA B35.4-1972 zinc, cadmium or chrome plated. g) Nailing Discs: Flat caps, minimum 1" diameter, maximum 16 ga. thick sheet metal, formed to prevent

dishing. Bell or cup shapes not acceptable. 2.2 ROUGH CARPENTRY ITEMS 2.2.1 Sawn timber for rough carpentry work and ordinary framing shall be Standard Grade Light Framing, pine,

spruce or fir conforming to NLGA grading rules. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS 2.3.1 Pressure Treatment of Wood: all exterior wood to be treated in accordance with CAN/CSA-080-1-M89

and supplemented as follows: a) Treat dimension lumber to CAN/CSA-080.2-M89 using pentachlorophenol or copper napthenate

preservative to obtain a minimum net retention of 6.4 kg/m3 of wood. b) Treat plywood to CAN/CSA-080.9-M89 using pentachlorophenol or copper napthenate preservative to

obtain a minimum net retention of 4.8 kg/m3 of wood. Surface, cut, bore and trim components to sizes required as such as possible prior to pressure

treatment. Use Type "A" Hydrocarbon Solvents to CSA 080.201-M89. All wood to have a maximum moisture content of 15% after pressure treatment of wood. 2.3.2 Wood Preservative: copper napthenate or pentachlorophenol base, water repellent wood preservative to

CSA 080-M89, penetrating type suitable for brush or dipping application, coloured for concealed wood in contact with concrete or masonry and clear and colourless for exposed lumber, approved equal to "Pentox" by Osmose Pentox Inc.

2.3.3 Rough Hardware: bolts, nuts, washers, nails, screws, etc. shall be new, properly sized for the required

application, and hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A–153. 2.3.4 Nails: all nails to be long enough so that not less than half their length penetrates into the second

member. Splitting of wood members shall be minimized by staggering the nails in the direction of the grain and by

keeping nails well in from the edges. 2.3.5 Plywood Sheathing: to installed with all edges supported and placed so that surface grain is

perpendicular to the framing members. Not less than 2 mm gaps shall be provided between sheets, to allow for material expansion. All securement should have at least two nails with the nails being at least half the nail length apart and

be not less than quarter of the nail length from the edge of the framing member. 3. EXECUTION




SFAI 3

3.1 EXAMINATION 3.1.1 Examine the completed work of other trades on which the work is dependent. Immediately report

discrepancies. 3.2 WORKMANSHIP 3.2.1 Execute work by persons skilled in this trade, and as shown on the drawings. Fabricate and erect the

work square, plumb, straight and true to required lines and levels. 3.2.2 Accurately fit joints and intersecting members and make in true planes with adequate fastening to

develop the full length of the members. Locate joints over bearing or supporting surfaces. 3.2.3 Ensure that materials are rigidly and securely attached to each other and to adjacent building elements

and will not be loosened by work of other trades. 3.2.4 Where other materials and components are to be applied directly over wood members recess heads of

fastening devices below wood surfaces. 3.2.5 Where work remains exposed to view, fasteners shall be uniformly and evenly spaced and neatly

installed. 3.3 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3.3.1 Provide all rough carpentry items and as required for wall construction and other trades. Wood blocking,

studs and similar items indicated shall not be regarded as exact or complete. Properly frame work close fit, accurately set and rigidly secured. Provide adequate fastenings and supports. Install wood blocking in drywall partitions for anchoring of counters, vanities, cupboards, railings, toilet partitions, washroom accessories, etc. Provide blocking for sheet metal work as indicated on drawings.

3.3.2 Contractor to be responsible for safe disposal of all debris from the job site. 3.3.3 Provide temporary protection, to the satisfaction of the Consultant, to render all wood blocking watertight,

at sheet metal flashing work, if permanent membrane protection cannot be provided within the same day. 3.3.4 Provide wood nailers, blocking, copings, strapping, bucks, grounds and other rough carpentry

components to sizes and in locations required for satisfactory supply of fabricated items and other work. 3.3.5 Unless otherwise indicated, provide minimum 38 mm thick material. Grounds may be 21 mm thick

material unless otherwise indicated. 3.3.6 Install wood members plumb, level, straight, true to line and solidly anchored to adjacent building

elements. 3.3.7 Provide rough bucks where indicated or required for windows, doors lockers and other elements. 3.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT 3.4.1 Coat wood members in contact with concrete or masonry on all surfaces either by brush or dipping, with

wood preservative. Cut all members to fit prior to installation and treat all faces and cuts with preservative. Treat wood blocking by applying full brush coat of wood preservative. Apply treatment after members are cut to size and any holes are bored, but before the members are built in.

3.5 HARDWARE AND FASTENINGS




SFAI 4

3.5.1 Provide rough hardware including nails, screws, bolts, washers, brackets, hangers, and fastening devices of all types.

3.5.2 Size and space fastenings and anchors to adequately support the member and imposed loads. 3.5.3 Unless otherwise indicated, attach wood members at maximum 600 mm o/c. as follows: a) To concrete and solid masonry with expansion type anchor bolts. b) To hollow masonry with toggle bolts. c) To heavy gauge metal with bolts. d) To light gauge metal with screws or bolts. e) To wood with nails, screws or bolts as required to ensure stability. 3.5.3 For sheet metal flashing work: a) Co-ordinate location and installation of anchors and fasteners. Confirm types of fasteners to be

utilized with Consultant. b) Do not use metals in combination that will set up electrolytic action. c) Use non-corrosive or galvanized steel fastenings, as approved by Consultant, or as otherwise

specified. e) Space anchors within load bearing or shear capacity. 3.5.4 Bucks and plates shall be anchored to masonry walls with 13 mm galvanized steel bolts 450 mm long. 3.5.5 Fasten wood copings to supporting masonry elements with 13 mm galvanized steel bolts min. 450 mm

long spaced max. 600 mm o/c. Where width of coping plate exceeds 100 mm, stagger bolts off center. 3.6 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS 3.6.1 Provide backboards for mounting electrical equipment as indicated. use 19 mm thick plywood on 19 x

38 mm furring around perimeter and at maximum 300 mm intermediate spacing. 3.6.2 Size backboards to adequately accommodate equipment to be mounted. Secure boards with

countersunk fasteners to supporting walls in manner which will carry equipment load without damaging wall.

3.7 TEMPORARY STAIR TREADS 3.7.1 Provide 2 x 10, #2 Spruce securely fastened to stair treads and landing. Materials to be full width and

length of the treads and landings. Remove prior to installation of permanent finishes. Do not screw or cut through steel treads to install temporary stair treads where underside exposed to view.



Renovations FINISH CARPENTRY AND ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 06200

SFAI 1

GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 The work described in this Section consists of the supply and installation of finish carpentry and

architectural woodwork items required in connection with the work as indicated on the drawings. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED 1.2.1 as indicated in the drawings. 1.2.2 Hardware and attachment accessories. 1.2.3 Hanging of interior doors from under Division 08. 1.3 RELATED WORK Section 01005 – General Requirements Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and curbing. Section 08100 - Standard Steel Doors: Supply of steel doors. Section 09900 - Painting: Site painting and finishing, back-priming. Section 08710 – Finish Hardware - Supply and installation of locksets for teacher’s closets. 1.4 REFERENCES AWMAC (Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers' Association of Canada) - Quality Standards for

Architectural Woodwork. CAN3-A172M - High Pressure, Paper, Decorative Laminates. NLGA (National Lumber Grades Authority) - Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Fabricator: Company specializing in custom carpentry work with five years documented experience in institutional millwork. 1.5.2 Perform finish carpentry work in accordance with AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Standards, Edition 1,

2009, or current edition. 1.5.3 Lumber Grading: NLGA. 1.5.4 Store and install wood materials where relative humidity is between 25% and 55%. Protect from damage. 1.6 SUBMITTALS 1.6.1 Submit shop drawings of finish carpentry items to requirements of Section 01300. Indicate on shop drawings species, profiles, sizes, connection attachments, jointing, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1.6.2 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples of each type of paneling laminate including heat resistant

laminate, manufacturer’s data sheets and each type of solid wood or plywood to receive stain or natural finish with finish applied as specified.

1.6.3 Submit sample of each type of hardware specified in accordance with Hardware Schedule Acceptable

alternate products must meet or exceed these specifications and will be only reviewed and accepted if submitted within five business days of the close of tenders.

1.6.4 If requested, submit a typical prototype unit representative of the work of this section.




SFAI 2

2. PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS 2.1.1 Lumber Grading Rules: NLGA, CSA O141, S4S. 2.1.2 Lumber: CSA O141, and species group to CSA O86; Pine species, construction grade. 2.1.3 Exposed Solid Wood: No. 1, Clear "C" select or better, species as shown on drawings. 2.1.4 Softwood lumber: to CSA 0121-M1978 and National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) requirements, with

maximum moisture content of 6-8% for interior work. Yard lumber select for natural finish of species, indicated to AWMAC Custom Grade.

2.1.5 Hardwood lumber: to National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) requirements, moisture content of

maximum 10% for interior work, of species indicated to AWMAC Custom Grade. Species: Maple, unless otherwise noted.

2.1.6 Hardwood plywood: to CSA O115 of thickness indicated, birch veneer core of good two sides grade. 2.1.7 Wood Veneer: Birch to CSA O115 in sizes and thickness shown on drawings. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS 2.2.1 Hardwood plywood: to CSA 0115-1967 of thickness indicated, Rotary Cut Birch or Flat cut maple, veneer

core, No. 1 grade. Select veneers to provide book match veneer strips to be 240 mm wide minimum. Species: Birch, unless otherwise noted.

2.2.2 Nails and staples: to CSA B111-1974 galvanized for exterior work, interior high-humidity areas and for

treated lumber; plain finish elsewhere. Use spiral thread nails except where specified elsewhere. 2.2.3 For natural or stain finish millwork use uniform, patch-free Select White birch veneer, G1S or G2S as

determined by Consultant, depending on application. (Refer to drawings for specific noted millwork) 2.2.4 Western Softwood Plywood: CSA O151, S2S for exposed painted shelving where indicated, complete with

19 mm x 6 mm solid hardwood edging. 2.3 FINISH MATERIALS 2.3.1 Plastic Laminate: CAN3-A172M, 1.6 mm General Purpose grade, standard type; colour and surface finish as selected by

Consultant. 2.3.1.1 Plastic Laminate Backing: CAN3-A172M, High pressure paper base laminate without a decorative finish;

0.5 mm thick, smooth surface finish, manufactured by same manufacturer as face sheet. 2.3.1.2 Plastic Laminate: “Nevamar ARP abrasion resistant surface”, acceptable alternate products by Arborite,

Formica, or approved alternative – suede/matte finish. Use waterproof adhesive capable of holding materials together without failure. Provide heat resistant grade; acid resistant grade, etc. where shown. 2.3.1.3 Colours and texture to later selection by Architect from manufacturer's standard range; Allow for maximum of six (6) colours:




SFAI 3

PF-30, for post forming counter tops, .050 for flat work, DC-40 for cabinet facing, Self supporting grade (solid) for dividers, 1/4" thick. Liner-30 for interior of cabinets, Backing sheet.

2.4 ACCESSORIES 2.4.1 Adhesive for Use with Laminated Plastic: of types recommended by laminated plastic manufacturer. 2.4.2 Sealer: Wear resistant sealer or glue acceptable to laminated plastic manufacturer. 2.4.3 Draw Bolts: as recommended by plastic laminate manufacturer. 2.4.4 Nails: CSA B111, size and type to suit application; galvanized for treated lumber, plain finish elsewhere. 2.4.5 Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Blind fasteners, Lags, and Screws: Size and type to suit application. 2.4.6 Lumber for Shimming, Blocking: Softwood lumber of Pine, Spruce or Fir species. 2.4.7 Wood Filler: tinted to match surface finish colour. 2.4.8 Base: All floor cabinetry to have 100 mm. vinyl base to match specified wall base - installed on site over

38x100mm base framing (painted water resistant plywood). 3. EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work. 3.1.2 Beginning of installation means acceptance of site conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 Install work in accordance with AWMAC Custom quality standard and in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. 3.2.2 Apply plastic laminate finishes where indicated and where specified. Cap exposed edges with plastic

laminate of same finish and pattern, unless indicated otherwise. Countertops and vanities to have bull-nosed post formed front edge. Apply laminate backing sheet on reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.

3.2.3 Set and secure materials and components in place, rigid, plumb, square and level.

3.3 HANGIG DOORS 3.3.1 Hang Doors, Provide 3 rubber bumpers per interior door frame.

Adjust all finish hardware for smooth operation of doors.




SFAI 4

3.4 CLEANING 3.4.1 Clean all oils, excess adhesive from cabinetwork after installation. 3.4.2 Repair damage caused to millwork during construction. 3.5 PROTECTION 3.5.1 Protect adjacent finishes from damage during millwork installation. 3.5.2 Protect finished installation. 3.6 EXTENT OF WORK 3.6.1 as indicated / detailed on drawings. END OF SECTION



FIREPROOF SECTION 08710

SFAI 1

1 General


.1 Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for spray applied fireproofing Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM E814, Methods of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

.2 CAN/ULC S101, Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Test of Building Construction and Materials.

.3 CAN/ULC S102, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

.4 Technical Manual 2-A, Standard Practice for the Testing and Inspection of Field Applied Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials by Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry (AWCI).

.5 UL 1479, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetrations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product data: .1 Submit copies of manufacturer's Product data in accordance with the

Conditions of the Contract indicating: .1 Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference

standard, characteristics, limitations. .2 Product transportation, storage, handling and

installation requirements.

.2 Certification: .1 Submit certified documentation for each worker performing

Work of this Section, to substantiate 5 years minimum of experience in sprayed fireproofing installation.

.2 Submit installer's and Product manufacturer's certification verifying compliance with Contract Documents.

.3 For assemblies not tested and rated in accordance with CAN/ULC S101 and CAN/ULC S102, submit proposals based on related designs using accepted fireproofing design criteria.

.4 Submit manufacturer's inspection reports and verification/certification that work has been correctly installed.




SFAI 2


.1 Qualifications: Execute Work of this Section by manufacturer-approved, skilled, qualified, and experienced workers, trained in installation of Work of this Section.

.2 Regulatory Requirements: Be responsible for securing approval of materials and installation of work from authority having jurisdiction: .1 Perform work in compliance with ULC or cUL listed designs for the required

fire resistance ratings. .2 Submit signed engineering proposals to Authority having Jurisdiction for

acceptance if there are no listed designs that match project conditions. .3 Perform tests required by Authorities having Jurisdiction.

.3 Manufacturer's Site Inspection: Manufacturer's technical representative shall inspect

Work at suitable intervals during application and at conclusion of Work of this Section, to ensure Work is correctly installed.

.4 Mock-up:

.1 Construct one 10 m2 mock-up of fireproofing in location acceptable to Consultant.

.2 Arrange for Consultant's review and acceptance, allow 48 hours after acceptance before proceeding with Work.

.3 Mock-up may remain as part of Work if accepted by Consultant. Remove and dispose of mock-ups which do not form part of Work.

.4 Upon acceptance, mock-up shall serve as a minimum standard of quality for the balance of the work of this Section.

1.5

.1

SITE CONDITIONS

Maintain a 50C air and substrate temperature for 24 hours before, during, and 24 hours after application in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Ventilate to dry fireproofing. In enclosed areas circulate interior air and exhaust to the exterior.

.3 Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment around application areas from overspray, marring or damage. Clean, polish or replace materials damaged to acceptance of Consultant.

2

Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to, primers, adhesives, paints, and sealers are to have low VOC content limits.

.2 Primer: As recommended by spray fireproofing manufacturer.




SFAI 3

.3 Spray fireproofing: CAN/ULC S101, Spray applied, single component cementitious fireproofing with a density of 215 to 272 kg/m3: .1 ‘Blaze-Shield II’ by Cafco Industries Ltd. .2 ‘A/D Type 5GP' by A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

.4 Sealer: Latex based emulsion: .1 ‘Bond-Seal’ by Cafco Industries Ltd .2 ‘A/D Sealer’ by A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc

.5 Water: Clean, free from organic and mineral impurities which would be harmful to application.

2.2 MIXING

.1 Mix Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3

Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify condition and dimensions of previously installed Work upon which this Section depends. Report defects to Consultant. Commencement of Work means acceptance of existing conditions.

.2 Verify that substrates are compatible and have suitable bonding characteristics to receive fireproofing.

.3 Ensure written confirmation is received from steel fabricators of the specific surface preparation procedures and primers used to ascertain compatibility with work of this Section.

.4 Ensure that items required to penetrate fireproofing are placed before installation of fireproofing.

.5 Ensure that ducts, piping, equipment, or other items which would interfere with application of fireproofing are not positioned until fireproofing is completed.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Prime substrates where required by ULC or by sprayed fireproofing material manufacturer, unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive work.

.2 Clean surfaces of steel members free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale, rust and other foreign matter in accordance with manufacturers written instructions which would interfere with bond of fireproofing. Steel to receive fireproofing should have no primers or coatings applied to the surface prior to application.




SFAI 4

.3 Coat substrates with bonding adhesive where required to achieve fire resistance rating or as recommended in writing by spray fireproofing manufacturer for material and application indicated.

.4 Use temporary enclosures to prevent spray from contaminating air beyond application area. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out, and dusting of fireproofing material. Protect walls, windows, floors and other surfaces around areas to be fireproofed, from marring or damage.

3.3 APPLICATION

.1 Apply fireproofing in separate coats in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions to total thickness required to achieve fire ratings shown on the Contract Drawings. Comply with accepted ULC or Intertek Testing Services design.

.2 Apply fireproofing on steel over 2000 mm.

.3 Maintain continuity of fireproofing without gaps or voids.

.4 Water tamping: Provide low pressure spray to finished surface of fireproofing to provide dense, medium smooth surface.

.5 Apply sealer to surfaces of fireproofing in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions after tamping.

.6 Repair fireproofing damaged by other trades, to acceptance of Consultant.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Perform field tests as required by Authorities having Jurisdiction. Tests to be carried out as outlined in Technical Manual 12-A by AWCI and UL 1479.

3.5 CLEANING UP

.1 Clean exposed wall, ceiling or other surfaces of fireproofing materials to the acceptance of Consultant.

END OF SECTION



FIRESROPPING AND SMOKE SEALS SECTION 07850

SFAI 1

1 General


.1 Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for firestopping and smoke seals Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM E814, Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

.2 CAN/CGSB 19.13, Sealing Compound, One Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing.

.3 CAN/ULC S102, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

.4 CAN/ULC S115, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems.

.5 CAN/ULC S702, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre for Buildings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product data: .1 Submit copies of manufacturer's Product data in accordance with the

Conditions of the Contract indicating: .1 Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference

standard, characteristics, limitations. .2 Product transportation, storage, handling and installation

requirements. .3 Submit firestop and smoke seal manufacturer's Product data for

materials and prefabricated devices, including manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

.2 Shop drawings:

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract indicating: .1 Fire rated and smoke sealed systems for each typical application. .2 Construction details, accurately reflecting actual job conditions. .3 ULC or Intertek Testing assembly listing.

.3 Certification:

.1 Submit certified documentation from manufacturer for each worker performing Work of this Section.

.2 Submit installer's and Product manufacturer's certification verifying compliance with the Contract Documents and conformance with ASTM E814 and CAN/ULC S115.




SFAI 2

1.4

.1

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Perform Work of this Section by manufacturer-approved, skilled, qualified, and experienced workers trained in installation of Work of this Section.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Conform to manufacturer's requirements and maintain a minimum temperature of 50

C for a minimum period of 24 h before application, during, and until application is fully cured.

.2 Maintain sealant at a minimum 18° C for best workability.

2

Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Acceptable manufacturers of rated systems include: .1 AD Fire Protection Systems Inc. .2 Hilti Canada Corporation. .3 3M Canada Inc. .4 Tremco Ltd.

2.2 MATERIALS

.1 All materials under Work of this Section, including but not limited to, primers and

sealants are to have low VOC content limits.

.2 Firestop sealant: single component, low modulus, silicone rubber, moisture curing, ULC labelled to CAN/CGSB 19.13-M and CAN/ULC S115.

.3 Firestop insulation: to CAN/ULC-S702, Type 2; mineral fibre manufactured from rock

or slag, suitable for manual application. .1 Density: 81 kg/m3 when tested to ASTM C303. .2 Combustibility: Noncombustible to CAN/ULC S114. .3 Melt temperature: >1175 degrees C. .4 Surface burning characteristics: to CAN/ULC S102, maximum flame spread

of 0, smoke developed of 0. .5 Moisture Absorption: 0.04 percent when tested to ASTM C1104. .6 Smoulder Resistance: 0.01 percent when tested to CAN/ULC S129.

.4 Damming, back-up, supports, and anchorage: In accordance with manufacturer's

fire rated systems and to acceptance of authorities having jurisdiction.

.5 Primer: As recommended by firestop sealant manufacturer.




SFAI 3

2.3

.1

SYSTEMS

Firestopping and smoke seals: ULC or Intertek Testing Services listed Products and systems in accordance with CAN/ULC S115 suitable to actual application and

installation conditions.

.2 Do not use Products containing asbestos.

.3 Firestopping components shall not contain volatile solvents or require special application to protect plastic pipe from firestopping compound.

3

Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION


.2 Verify that substrates and surfaces to receive firestopping and smoke seals are clean, dry, and frost free.

3.2 FIRESTOP AND SMOKE SEAL LOCATIONS AND RATINGS

.1 Install ULC firestop and smoke seal systems rated to match fire resistance design rating of assemblies into which they are installed.

.2 Install firestop and smoke seal systems. Use systems with required ratings at following typical locations, including but not limited to: .1 Gaps at intersections of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board

partitions. .2 Control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated walls and partitions such as

masonry and gypsum board. .3 Gaps at top of fire-resistance rated partitions such as masonry and gypsum

board partitions. .4 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated walls and partitions including

mechanical and electrical services and openings and sleeves for future use. .5 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings, and roofs. .6 Perimeter of retaining angles on rigid ducts greater than 0.012 m2,

firestopping material between retaining angle and fire separation and between retaining angle and duct, on each side of fire separation.

3.3 PREPARATION

.1 Prepare, modify, and adjust void sizes, proportions, and conditions to conform to fire

rated and smoke sealed assembly requirements such as assembly opening size and dimensional restrictions.




SFAI 4

.2 Mask adjacent surfaces to avoid spillage and over-coating of adjacent surfaces. Remove stains from adjacent surfaces.

3.4 INSTALLATION

.1 Install firestopping and smoke seal systems in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and fire rated assembly to establish continuity and integrity of fire separations.

.2 Install firestop insulation in compacted thicknesses required by ULC design.

Compress insulation approximately 50 percent.

.3 Install primers as recommended by firestop and smoke seal Product manufacturers.

.4 Install temporary forming, damming, back-up as required, remove after materials have achieved initial cure and will resist displacement.

.5 Install firestop and smoke seal filler in horizontal joints providing 25% compression

fit.

.6 Use resilient, elastomeric firestopping and smoke seal systems in following locations: .1 Openings and sleeves for future use. .2 Penetration systems subject to vibration or thermal movement. .3 Penetration systems in acoustical containment enclosures.

.7 Trowel and tool exposed firestop and smoke seal Product surfaces to uniform,

smooth finish.

.8 Repair damaged firestopped and smoke sealed surfaces to acceptance of Consultant.

.9 Identify each firestop and smoke seal penetration assembly with permanent label

listing following: .1 Assembly and rating in hours. .2 Date of installation. .3 Installing company's name and telephone number.

.10 Do not cover materials until full cure has taken place.

3.5 CLEAN-UP

.1 Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after application.

END OF SECTION



Renovations SEALANTS AND CAULKING SECTION 07900

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 Comply with Section 01005 "General Requirements". 1.1.2 The work described in this Section consists of the supply and installation of caulking components to seal: a) Door and window framing perimeters. b) Joints. c) Miscellaneous construction voids. 1.1.3 Applied sealants shall be non-sag elastomeric material providing flexible, durable weather tight seals,

free of adhesive and cohesive failure, for all types of construction joints. 1.1.4 Proceed with caulking only when air, substrate, and material temperatures are above minimum

established by manufacturer's specifications, and surfaces in contact with sealant are completely dry. 1.1.5 Manufacturer's technical representative to be on site for approval of surface preparation prior to

application of product, and review of completed installation. Manufacturer's representative to provide report to the Owner and Architect.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Miscellaneous Metalwork under Section 05500. Doors and Frames under Section 08100. 1.3 WARRANTY AND SUBMISSIONS 1.3.1 The work of this section shall be warranted against failure or defects of materials and application as

follows: a) Exterior caulking work – 4 year written warranty. b) Interior caulking work – 2 year written warranty.

These warranties shall commence upon accepted Substantial Completion of the work. 1.3.2 Repair or replace all defective material and workmanship at no expense to the Board. This warranty

includes other materials damaged by this trade or which might become damaged due to failure of caulking during the warranty period.

1.3.3 Examine drawings, details and specifications prior to tendering to ensure that the materials and joint

details will satisfy the conditions of the warranty. Submission of tender and commencement of work shall imply an unqualified warranty. All joints required to be larger than 1” must be pre-approved by the Consultant with submission of adjacent materials manufacturer stating why wide joint required. Submit per Section 01340.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.4.1 Deliver and store materials in manufacturer's original packaging, with labels intact. Store in weatherproof

sheds, warmed as necessary. Protect volatile and inflammable materials from direct sources of heat, open flame and sparks.

2. PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS 2.1.1 Colours of sealant, to the approval of the architect, and matching the predominant material to which

sealant is applied.




SFAI 2

2.1.2 Primers are to be type recommended by sealant manufacturer, for the appropriate sealant and corresponding substrate.

2.1.3 Joint backing material shall be compatible with primers, sealants, outsize 30%, polyethylene, extruded

closed cell foam, Shore "A" hardness 20, tensile strength 20-30 psi. 2.1.4 Bond breaker, where joint configuration does not allow for proper depth/width ration with the use of

backer rod (see Section 3.2.5) a pressure sensitive plastic tape such as 3M #226 or #481 shall be placed at the back of the joint which will not bond to the sealant.

2.1.5 Sealant

TYPE 1 Multi-Component, Polyepoxide Urethane Sealant To meet specified requirements of CGSB specification 19-GP-24M; Dymeric, as manufactured by Tremco (Canada) Ltd.

Use at all locations, except where another type is specified. Unless otherwise approved, use

only the one selected type of sealant throughout. TYPE 2 Acrylic Solvent Release, One Part Sealant To meet specified requirements of CGSB

specification 19-GP-5M, such as Tremco 555 Sealant by Tremco. Use at interior joints between windows, door frames and screen frames.

TYPE 3 Silicone Sealant, One Part Sealant To meet specified requirements of CGSB specification

19-GP-9Ma, such as Proglaze by Tremco (Canada) Ltd. Sealant for fixtures and vanity tops, mildew resistant.

TYPE 4 Expanding Foam Sealant - Expansion Joints by Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd. Emseal 25V. Foam sealant for above-grade vertical joints in wall panels, expansion joints in

masonry. Emseal Color-Seal, coated silicone sealant for colored finish coating at joints in walls filled

with expanding foam sealant - at exposed expansion joint at interior and exterior walls.

Emseal WFR2 watertight, fire-rated, dual-sided primary seals for structural expansion joints in fire rated wall applications.

Fire-Rated — The fire-retardant-impregnated foam and intumescent bellows on both the interior and exterior faces work together to ensure 2-hour fire protection in accordance with UL-2079.

TYPE 5 Sealant for Exterior Paving Slabs and Horizontal Traffic Joints THC-900 Hyrbrid

Polyurethane by Tremco (Canada) Ltd. 2.1.6 Acoustical sealant for concealed perimeter joints and openings in drywall systems shall be by Tremco

Ltd., or approved equal, conforming to CAN/CGSB–19.21–M87. 2.1.7 Sealants for control joints and expansion joints in ceramic tile floors to be caulked with "Duoflex S.L." by

Sternson. 2.1.8 Cleaning material for surfaces to receive sealant Xylol, Methylethylketone, Toluol, or as recommended

by the manufacturer of sealant. 2.2 RELATED MATERIALS




SFAI 3

2.2.1 Backup material: of bond–breaking, non–absorbent, closed cell, round cross section polyethylene, neoprene, urethane, or vinyl as supplied or recommended by caulking manufacturer. Backup size shall be 30% larger than joint width.

2.2.2 Tape where required as bond breaker shall be polyethylene which will not bond to caulking material. 2.2.3 Thinners, cleaners, surface conditioner or primer: type supplied or recommended by the caulking

manufacturer for the application and purpose served. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

3.1.1 Ambient and surface temperatures to be within a range of 50C to 300C. Provide heated enclosures when necessary to maintain temperatures above the minimum limit.

3.1.2 Surfaces of materials to be caulked are to be firm, free from dirt, water, frost, oil, grease and foreign

matter which will impede adhesion of the caulking material. Use oil–free solvent recommended by caulking manufacturer to clean surfaces.

3.1.3 Allow masonry mortar to fully cure and dry a minimum of two weeks before caulking joints in masonry. 3.1.4 Examine joint sizes and correct to achieve proper width/depth ratio. 1/4" x 1/4" min. joint size. 1/4" x 1/2" depth shall equal width. 1/2" to 1" depth shall equal half of width. 1" to 2" max. sealant depth to be 1/2" (note: joints required to be larger than 1” must be approved by the

Consultant with submission of adjacent materials manufacturer stating why wide joint required. Submit per Section 01340).

For joints wider than 2", the sealant manufacturer's representative shall be contacted. 3.2 WORKMANSHIP 3.2.1 Carry out work by persons proficient in the use of materials specified neatly and carefully to ensure full

adhesion. Work to be in accordance with the material manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION 3.3.1 Prime joints with surface conditioner, apply in accordance with caulking manufacturer's instructions.

Allow primer to cure. 3.3.2 Before caulking, examine joint sizes and correct to achieve proper width/depth ratio as per

manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3.3 Apply sealant backer wherever necessary to provide correct joint depth. 3.3.4 Where possible, conceal caulking flush. Where caulking is required to be recessed as shown on the

drawings, the recess to be 3 mm. to 6 mm. Apply caulking with pressure gun fitted with a suitable nozzle. Ensure that an excess of the sealant is always pushed ahead of the nozzle and forced into the joint. The cured sealant to be free from ridges, wrinkles, air pockets and imbedded foreign matter and have a slightly concave surface.

3.4 FINISHED APPEARANCE 3.4.1 Present a neat finish with clean lines, without staining, sagging, excess, splatter or drips at the joint or on

adjacent work.




SFAI 4

3.5 CLEAN–UP 3.5.1 Remove droppings of excess caulking using recommended cleaners, and clean surfaces immediately.

Ensure surplus material is not permitted to set hard before removal. 3.3.2 Remove all debris from site daily and upon completion. END OF SECTION



Renovations HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS SECTION 08100

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 The work of this section consists of the supply and installation of interior hollow metal doors, frames and

screens, exterior insulated metal doors, frames and screens and installation of hardware. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND MEASUREMENTS 1.2.1 Provide shop drawings for all hollow metal work within 3 weeks of acceptance of Tender. 1.2.2 Shop drawings are to be produced by the manufacturer or distributor of the hollow metal work. 1.2.3 All shop drawings are to reflect actual site conditions and are to be produced as a result of a thorough

site investigation. Shop drawings that do not reflect the presence of site obtained information will be immediately rejected. Shop drawings are to be site checked and stamped approval by the general contractor before accepted for review by the consultant.

1.2.4 Shop drawings will be reviewed only by the consultant. Drawings stamped, reviewed and returned do

not indicate approval of such drawings. It is the contractor's responsibility to provide all materials indicated in sizes and shapes as indicated and made to fit all possible site conditions.

1.2.5 If at any time the consultant or Board representative indicates that the item supplied does not fit or suit

site conditions, then the item is to be rebuilt or re-supplied meeting those site conditions at no extra cost to the Board whether or not the item was reviewed under shop drawing review.

1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 1.3.1 The subcontractor is responsible for the safe delivery and off loading on the site. 1.3.2 Where interior site storage is permitted by the Board, the doors and frames shall be immediately placed

inside out of the weather. DO NOT STORE FRAMES OUTSIDE. If the Board inspector finds doors and frames stored outside, they will be rejected by the Board and new doors and frames will be supplied at no extra cost to the Board. Where large screens are required on site, do not deliver until ready to install.

1.4 CODES AND REGULATIONS 1.4.1 Construct labeled doors and frames in accordance with ULC, UL, Warnock Hersey or other approved

agencies as well as the following additional requirements. 1.4.2 Work shall comply with regulations of Canadian Board of Fire Underwriters and with requirements of

such other authorities as may have jurisdiction. Requirements of such authorities relative to construction, materials and devices not specifically mentioned or shown on drawings, shall be provided in their entirety.

1.4.3 Frames for labeled doors shall be labeled by the same agency and shall be fitted with labeled hardware. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 2.1.1 Provide interior glazed and flush slab doors as indicated on the Door Schedule and Drawings, typically

44 mm thick of 18 gauge cold rolled or stretcher leveled steel with honeycomb core complete with glazing stops (butt corner joints) secured with oval head screws at 200 mm o/c. Tops and bottoms to be tack welded side seams to be tack welded and filled. Finish in light grey rust resistant primer.

2.1.2 Glazed fire rated doors to be complete with Firelite lite with steel glazing stops. Glazed lites sized to suit

rating requirements, in accordance with validating label requirements, complete with approved labels in accordance with Section 08900.

2.1.3 For fire-rated frames and doors at exterior applications, frames to be filled with insulation; fire-rated

doors to be insulated.




SFAI 2

2.1.4 Glazed screens complete with glazing stops (butt corner joints) secured with countersunk oval head

screws at 200 mm o/c. 2.1.5 Exterior fire-rated glazed screens to be complete glazed Firelite interior and 6mm tempered exterior lite. 2.1.6 Exterior Doors, Frames and screens to thermally broken, insulated metal frames and door slabs with

insulating glass unit per Section 08900 as indicated on the drawings equivalent to Fleming Series TB frames and equivalent doors packed with poly-isoscyanurate II insulation.

2.1.7 Solid panels at screens: At interior fire-rated screens - sheet steel laminated to both sides of 5/8" gypsum

board. At exterior fire-rated screens - to match composition of doors. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 2.2.1 Only doors manufactured by the following companies will be accepted by the for use on this project: ALL STEEL DOORS LTD. BARON METAL INDUSTRIES LTD. S.W. FLEMING LTD. METAL DOOR HARDWARE LTD. 2.3 MATERIALS 2.3.1 Doors and frames shall be manufactured by a firm that has been manufacturing hollow metal doors and

frames under the present day name for the last 5 years. 2.3.2 Steel shall be free from scale or rust. a) Interior doors shall be fabricated of 2 sheets of not less than 18 ga galvanized steel, insulated and

sound deadened with pre-expanded small cell honeycomb core, completely filling the inside of doors and laminated to the inside faces of panels with ULC or Warnock Hersey approved adhesive.

b) Exterior doors shall be manufactured from 16 ga steel and stiffened with continuous interlocking 20 ga steel rib stiffeners welded at 6" o/c. continuous full height. All voids insulated with Poly-Isocyanurate II insulation and thermally broken.

2.3.3 Frames shall be fabricated of 16 gauge galvanized steel. Exterior frames shall be thermally broken and

packed with insulation. 2.3.4 Doors and frames shall be "wipe coated" or "satin coated" with a minimum coating weight of 0.25

oz./sq.ft., as defined by ASTM A90 or prime painted with one heavy coat of rust inhibitive paint. 2.3.5 All material shall be free from paint sags and runs. 2.3.6 Reinforcing for hardware shall be welded in place and consisting of the following thicknesses: Mortise locksets and deadlocks 12 gauge thick Bored or cylindrical locks 12 " Surface mounted closers 16 " Surface and panic devices 16 " 2.3.7 Hinge Reinforcement Provide 10 ga high frequency angled hinge plate reinforcing projection welded for

strength and durability. On door across corridor, stairwell door and exit doors, install 3 high frequency angled hinge plates on each door and on each frame location. On all other doors and frames install on top of door and frame only.

2.3.8 Provide a minimum of 2 rubber or plastic bumpers at strike jamb of single swing doors and 4 bumpers in

head members at pairs of doors.




SFAI 3

2.3.9 Core material of labeled doors shall conform to UL, ULC, Warnock Hersey or other approved agency regulations.

2.3.10 Glazing screws shall be oval head cadmium plated self tapping steel screws. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION 3.1.1 Fabricate in accordance with profiles detailed and approved shop drawings. 3.1.2 Flat work shall be leveled and straight with surfaces smooth and true. Edges, angles and corners shall

be square and clean. After welding, units shall be made square and true, free from distortion and wind. Maximum door deformation (bow, cup, twist, warp, wind) in doors shall be 0.125" measured on diagonal of door.

3.1.3 Interior door face sheets shall be connected by a continuous interlocking edge seam and welded at 6"

o/c. and above and below each cut out. Edges shall be filled with body filler and ground smooth. 3.1.4 Exterior doors shall have a continuously welded edge seam ground smooth and body filled where

necessary. 3.1.5 Doors shall have top cap forming a weather tight seal on all edges and shall not interfere with closers or

stays. 3.1.6 Welds shall be made without spatter, cleaned off and dressed flush with base metal surfaces.

Resistance welding shall comply with American Welding Society Ci.1 "Recommended Practices for Resistance Welding", latest edition.

3.1.7 Fill seams, depressions and intersection corners completely with epoxy filler and sand smooth. 3.1.8 Mitres shall be accurately cut, welded and sanded or ground smooth. All fastening shall be concealed. NOTE: TOP FRAME CORNERS SHALL BE MITRED AND ALL RETURNS AND REBATES SHALL BE

CONTINUOUS. 3.1.9 All members used for construction of screens are to have same frame depth. all intersections are to be

neatly joined, welded and sanded smooth. 3.1.10 The work shall be reinforced to produce absolute stiffness and rigidity and to resist all stresses of normal

operation. Doors and frames shall be blanked, reinforced, drilled and tapped to receive template hardware.

3.1.11 Extend frames to finished floor line and provide removable metal spreader. Supply 6 loose anchors per

door frame to suit site conditions, except as specifically required on labeled doors/frames. 3.1.12 Anchors for labeled doors shall conform with ULC, UL or Warnock Hersey regulations for thickness of

material, spacing and anchorage methods. 3.1.13 Mitre or cope glazing stops at corners and drill for countersunk screws. 3.1.14 All glazing, panels and all stops are to be on exterior side of exterior frames or on secure side of secure

frames and shall not be removable. All other stops shall be removable stops secured with countersunk Phillips head screws, spaced 9" o/c. and symmetrically located on stop length.

3.1.15 Touch up welds on galvanized steel with aluminum oxide paint.




SFAI 4

3.1.16 Clearance of 1/8" between hollow metal door and frame to be maintained on sides and head of all doors.

This item will be strictly enforced. 3.1.17 All frames that butt up to existing masonry surfaces shall be set up for an existing masonry condition with

dimples and secured with 3/8" dia. screw anchor at 2'-0" on center minimum. Fill depressions with body filler and sand smooth. 2" bottom rails shall be secured in the same manner.

3.1.18 No visible seams are permitted on door or vertical edge. Close bottom and top of door with recessed

channel and flush end enclosure caps. 3.1.19 Provide roll formed steel lite kit with wrap around section through opening as well as screw fixed

removable glass top. 3.1.20 STC Rating Interior hollow metal doors not less than 20. 3.1.21 Frame Installation a) Install frames plumb and level. Secure to floor construction with minimum two fasteners at each

jamb. Secure jambs with expansion units, at locations where frames cannot be built-in. Depress fastening device and fill with metal paste filler, grind smooth and patch primer.

b) Provide anchorage and connections to adjacent construction. c) Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install temporary horizontal wood spreader at third

points of door opening to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support at center of head for openings over 48" wide. Remove temporary spreaders after frames are built-in. Make allowances for deflection of structure to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frames.

3.1.22 All anchor plates for frames and screens are to be totally hidden when frame or screen is installed. 3.1.23 Unless otherwise noted, panels in lieu of glass shall consist of 18 ga galvanized sheet steel laminated

both sides to 3/4" waterproof plywood. Where fire rated, 3/8" cement board in lieu of plywood. On exterior screens, position panels on exterior side of frame.

3.2 GENERAL FINISHING 3.2.1 Finish painting of metal doors and frames is specified in Section 09900. 3.2.2 Replace doors in which the bond between the core and face sheet has failed. 3.2.3 Sizes as per door schedule and drawings. 3.2.4 For hardware specifications and preparation refer to Section 08710. 3.2.5 Install hollow metal doors, complete with hinges supplied under the work of Section 08710. 3.2.6 Adjust doors to swing easily and freely and to close tightly and evenly on frames without binding. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION TAG INSTALLATION 3.3.1 Supply and install a door tag identification number on every new and altered door frame. Where

possible, existing tags are to be revised. New tags are to match existing in size, shape and number stamping. The numbers are to follow the existing numbering system. If in doubt ask inspector for actual number to be stamped. Secure tags to frames as per existing tags. Tags to be applied to all rated doors, frames and screens.

END OF SECTION



Renovations GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS SECTION 09250

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 The work described in this section consists of the supply and installation of gypsum board (drywall)

partitions, bulkheads and ceilings. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED Metal stud wall framing. Metal channel ceiling framing. Acoustic insulation. Gypsum board. Zed bar insulation/gypsum board supports. Fire protection of structural elements. Taped and sanded joint treatment. 1.3 RELATED WORK Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking. Section 07200 - Insulation: Thermal insulation and fastening studs to exterior walls. Section 08100 - Standard Steel Frames. Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish. 1.4 REFERENCES 1.4.1 Unless otherwise specified, do work in accordance with CSA–A82.27–M91 and approved manufacturer's

printed instructions as applicable. ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building

Partitions. ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. CGSB 19-GP-21M - Sealing and Bedding Compound for Acoustical Purposes. CSA A82.27M - Gypsum Board Products. CSA A82.30M - Interior Furring, Lathing, and Gypsum Plastering. CSA A82.31M - Gypsum Board Application. ULC List of Equipment and Materials, Volume II, Building Construction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with five years documented

experience. 1.6 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.6.1 Provide fire separations and fire protection exactly as specified in Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada

test design specification Design No. that validates the specified rating. 1.6.2 Fire rated gypsum board to be utilized for all rated partitions and assemblies as indicated on drawings to

comply with ULC Design or National Building Code Supplement as indicated on drawings. 1.6.3 Provide written confirmation that the suspended ceiling provides adequate support for the electrical

fixtures, as required by the current bulletin of the Electrical Inspection Department of Ontario Hydro.




SFAI 2

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1.7.1 Carry out this section only when temperature is maintained and controlled in range of 130 C to 210 C for

at least 24 hours before installing drywall and until joint cement has dried. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.8.1 Deliver, handle and store materials so as to prevent damage, moisture and contamination from oil,

grease and other foreign matter. 1.8.2 Tolerances: Install work within 1/8" maximum in 10'-0". 1.8.3 Store gypsum boards flat and protect edges from damage. Store metal accessories in a manner to

protect from rusting, bending and denting. 1.8.4 Provide adequate protection to materials and work of this Section. Protect surrounding surfaces against

damage. Use bumpers, drop cloths and other approved means as required to ensure adequate protection.

2. PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 2.1.1 Approved manufacturers of materials to be used are CGC Gypsum, Domtar Gypsum, Westroc Industries

Ltd., CertainTeed Gypsum Canada Inc., or approved equal. 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS 2.2.1 Studs and Tracks: CSA A82.30M, Galvanized sheet steel, Minimum 20 ga. steel at cement board

installation. 2.2.2 Shaft Wall Framing Components: Thicknesses and sizes required to achieve fire rating indicated; J, C-H

and E studs manufactured by Canadian Gypsum Company, Limited or approved alternative. 2.2.3 Furring, Framing, and Accessories: CSA A82.30M, galvanized steel, of gauges and sizes required. [min.

0.9 mm thick to support cement board. 2.2.4 Fasteners: Galvanized steel, manufacturer's standard, suitable for application intended. 2.2.5 Tie Wire: 1.6 mm galvanized soft annealed steel wire. 2.2.6 Hangers: Sized in accordance with ceiling area to be supported as follows:

Max. Ceiling Area Size of Hangers 1. sq. m 8 ga wire, galvanized 1.8 sq. m 4 mm dia. rods or 32 mm x 3 mm flats

2.3 BOARD MATERIALS




SFAI 3

2.3.1 Standard Gypsum Board: CSA A82.27M 5/8" thick unless otherwise indicated or required, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges, use sag resistant type for ceiling applications.

2.3.2 Fire Rated Gypsum Board : CSA A82.27M, type X, fire resistive type, ULC rated; 16 mm thick unless

otherwise indicated or required, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. Fire rated wallboard shall be classified as to fire hazard by Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada and be labeled in conformance with ULC label service for application specified.

2.3.3 Exterior Grade Gypsum Board: CSA A82.27; 13 mm thick unless otherwise indicated or required,

maximum permissible length; edges eased; brown back paper and beige water-repellent face paper. 2.3.4 Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630, 16 mm thick unless otherwise indicated or required,

maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square edges. Do not use for ceilings. 2.3.5 Sheathing Board: DensAmour Plus abuse resistant and impact –resistant 5/8” (15.9 mm) thickness to be used in all the walls for this project unless noted otherwise. 2.3.6 DensShield Tile Backer in 5/8” (15.9 mm) thicknesses conforms to current IRC and IBC codes and is

manufactured to meet ASTM C 1178 as a fiberglass mat gypsum substrate for use as tile backer. 2.3.9 All gypsum board to have anti-microbial/anti-mold properties. 2.4 ACCESSORIES 2.4.1 Acoustical Insulation: Semi-rigid, paperless, mineral fibre blanket; 51 mm thick; Thermafiber Sound

Attenuation Blanket distributed by Canadian Gypsum Company, Limited or approved alternative. 2.4.2 Acoustical Sealant: CGSB 19-GP-21M, non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum

board. 2.4.3 Casing Beads, Corner Beads: Galvanized sheet steel; perforated flanges; one piece length per location. 2.4.4 Edge Trim: Galvanized steel with J type bead. 2.4.5 Reveal Trim: Galvanized steel, 13 mm reveal, where indicated. 2.4.6 Resilient Channels: RC-1 manufactured by CGC Company Limited or approved alternative. 2.4.7 Joint Materials: CSA A82.31M, reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, fasteners; as

recommended by board manufacturer for intended use. 2.4.8 Laminating Adhesive:

a) to wood framing and to metal studs: CGSB 71-GP-25M; b) to concrete and concrete block: Durabond 90 manufactured by CGC Company Limited or approved

alternative; or as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. 2.4.9 Access Panels: For ceiling: WB-FRC Fire-rated and non-rated Ceiling Access Door manufactured by

Williams Brothers Corporation; sizes and locations indicated on mechanical and electrical drawings; appliance white baked enamel finish unless otherwise indicated.

3. EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION




SFAI 4

3.1.1 Clean surfaces of dust, loose particles and foreign matter. Ensure proper ventilation in work area. 3.1.2 Carry out the work of this section by mechanics skilled in this trade, in accordance with CAN/CSA–

A82.31–M91. 3.2 PARTITIONS 3.2.1 Support partitions laterally at top and bottom for service load of 3.0 kN.m. Detail top support to permit

differential vertical movement of floors above and below. Unless indicated otherwise, allow movement of +12 mm.

3.3 METAL STUD INSTALLATION 3.3.1 Install studding in accordance with CSA A82.31M, and manufacturer's instructions. 3.3.2 Metal Stud Spacing: 400 mm o/c unless indicated otherwise. 3.3.3 Partition Heights: Full height with gypsum board to floor or roof construction above or as indicated or

required. Install additional bracing for partitions extending above ceiling. Install fire rated partitions from floor to underside of structure above. Frame around structural elements with equivalent construction to maintain fire ratings.

3.3.4 Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. 3.3.5 Blocking: Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet

partitions, toilet accessories, and elsewhere as required. 3.3.6 Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work placed in or behind

partition framing. 3.4 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION 3.4.1 Erect wall furring to CSA A82.31 for direct attachment to concrete block and [concrete walls. 3.4.2 Secure furring channels in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 600 mm o/c. 3.4.3 Space furring channels maximum 400 mm o/c, not more than 100 mm from floor and ceiling lines and

abutting walls. 3.5 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION - AT INSULATION 3.5.1 Apply metal furring members vertically to exterior masonry [concrete walls at spacing to suit insulation

sizes. Provide supports for top and bottom end joints. 3.5.2 Shim furring members as required to present true, plumb line and plane face for application of wallboard. 3.5.3 Locate furring members not more than 50 mm away from openings, interior corners, intersections,

frames, control joints. 3.6 CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION 3.6.1 Install in accordance with CSA A82.31M, and manufacturer's instructions.




SFAI 5

3.6.2 Install framing for cement board ceiling in accordance with cement board manufacturer's instructions. 3.6.3 Coordinate location of hangers with other work. 3.6.4 Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work. 3.6.5 Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring

channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 600 mm past each end of openings. 3.6.6 Reinforce ceiling to carry mechanical and electrical loads imposed thereon. 3.6.7 Laterally brace entire suspension system. 3.8 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION 3.8.1 Install resilient channels at maximum 600 mm o/c. Locate joints to occur over framing members. 3.8.2 Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around

electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 3.8.3 Install acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Caulk all

penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, ductwork, rough-in boxes. Where acoustical sealant exposed - tool to receive finish coat of sealant by Section 07900.

3.8.4 Friction fit acoustical board in ceiling spaces above partitions which are ceiling height only. 3.9 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION 3.9.1 Install gypsum board in accordance with CSA A82.31M, and manufacturer's instructions. 3.9.2 Where indicated, laminate gypsum wallboard directly to concrete block with laminating adhesive. 3.9.3 Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring

over firm bearing. 3.9.4 Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. 3.9.5 Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. 3.9.6 Where double layer of wallboard is indicated or required, overlap joints of base and face layers. 3.9.7 Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum ceiling board with

sealant. 3.9.8 Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as indicated or as directed. 3.9.9 Place corner beads at exposed edges and external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge

trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials as indicated. Place casing beads at perimeter of gypsum board ceilings. Fasten with screws or staples at 300 mm o/c along entire length.

3.9.10 Provide a continuous moisture resistant insulating material at edges of gypsum wallboard in contact with

metal windows and exterior door frames to provide a thermal break.




SFAI 6

3.9.11 Install hollow metal door frames (supplied under Section 08100) located in metal stud and gypsum board partitions. Attach metal studs to door frame anchors with 10 mm CGC drywall screws.

3.9.12 Furr-out and apply gypsum board around ducts and pipes projecting into room areas where indicated or

required. 3.9.13 Cement Board:

a) For areas to receive paint finish: joints to be taped with fibreglas mesh tape, provide skim coat "Duracrete Exterior Basecoat" and prepare to receive finish paint.

b) For areas to receive ceramic tile finish: joints to be filled with tile-setting adhesive, and taped with fibreglas mesh tape, joints to be leveled to receive ceramic tile finish.

3.9.14 At fire – rated walls and ceilings ensure gypsum board membrane continuous through intersection by

staggering and alternating layers to interlock joint. At non – rated walls continue wall board minimum 6” above adjacent ceiling level unless indicated otherwise (ie. To u/s of deck for acoustic barriers).

3.10 FIRE STOPPING 3.10.1 Construct fire separations tightly to enclosing construction to maintain integrity of separation. Provide

fire stopping at all fire separations at spaces between the separation and structural and mechanical elements adjoining or passing through the separation.

3.11 ACCESS PANELS 3.11.1 Provide J moulds at exposed gypsum board edges. 3.11.2 Reinforce panel with plywood as required. 3.11.3 Install access panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Ensure continuity of fire resistance

rating. 3.12 CONTROL JOINTS 3.12.1 Provide shrinkage control joints to Consultant's approval and as noted on drawings. Place control joints

consistent with lines of building spaces as indicated or as directed. 3.12.2 Construct control joints of two back-to-back J moulds set in gypsum board facing and supported

independently on both sides of joint. 3.12.3 Provide continuous polyethylene dust barrier behind and across control joints. 3.12.4 Locate control joints at approximately 7600 mm in walls and ceilings and where indicated on drawings.

Locate control joints at approximately 3600 mm o/c in cement board ceilings and where indicated on drawings. Install additional control joints as directed on site by Consultant.

3.12.5 Install control joints straight and true. 3.13 JOINT TREATMENT 3.13.1 Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive

finishes. 3.13.2 Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 0.8 mm.




SFAI 7

3.13.3 Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile. 3.14 TOLERANCES 3.14.1 Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 3 mm in 3 m in any direction. END OF SECTION



Renovations CERAMIC TILE SECTION 09300

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 Comply with Section 01005 "General Requirements". 1.1.2 The work described in this section consists of the supply and installation of ceramic tile. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 Tile work to be in accordance with installation manual 200-1979, "Ceramic Tile" by Terrazzo, Tile and

Marble Association of Canada and CSC Architectural Specification Study 09300 on Ceramic Tile. 1.3 PROTECTION 1.3.1 Fully protect the work of others from damage arising out of the execution of the work. 1.3.2 Barricade tiled areas and otherwise protect newly installed tile for at least 48 hours after laying. 1.3.3 Cover floors with heavy Kraft paper and remove just before final cleaning. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.4.1 Deliver, store and handle to protect materials and work of this section from marking, soiling, staining,

chipping and breakage. 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.5.1 Submit sample board, with four tiles in place, with joints filled with specified grout. Submit two 24" x 24"

sample panels of each tile type specified. Construct sample panels of finished ceramic tile work, 2.5 m X 2.5 m in size of each ceramic tile type to be inspected by the Consultant. Observation of the procedure for cleaning the grout from the tile to be carried out in the presence of the Owner’s representative, the Consultant and the Contractor: minimum three washes. The approved sample panels will establish the standard for all work of this Section and may be incorporated into the finished work. Do not proceed with installation of ceramic tile until the sample panels have been approved.

1.5.3 Provide 2% of the quantity used for each specified tile, for Owner's use. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 Ceramic Tile WALL TILE:




SFAI 2

7.5 x 15 cm x 6 mm Maple Leaf “Colour & Dimension Collection” by Olympia Tile, complete with all trim pieces. To be installed with long side horizontally.

CT-WA: Colour & Dimension Collection – Bone Bright (Group 1) - background colour CT-WD: Colour & Dimension Collection – Beige Bright (Group 1gh) – taupe accent band Colour and Pattern: To Architects Future Selection from full range of colours. Allow for 25% contrasting colour for pattern/accent to later detail, allow up to 6 deep accent colours and

base colour. 2.1.2 All thresholds at doors and changes in floor finish to be maximum 12 mm high above the finished floor

and complete with beveled edges for wheelchair use throughout and as indicated in the drawings. 2.1.3 Adhesive: "Thin–set" method by Laticrete International, Inc., Mapei Inc., or approved equal. Primer as

recommended by manufacturer of thin-set mortar. 2.1.4 Epoxy Floor Grout: stain resistant Latapoxy SP-100 Colour to later selection. Samples to be provided to

Architect for selection prior to installation. Wall Grout: unsanded dry set Laticrete 600 Series/1776 2.1.5 Sealant: in accordance with requirements specified by manufacturer. 2.1.6 Bases: 80mmx300mm bullnose. thin-set. 2.1.7 Slip resistant finish: "No Skidding", industrial strength, as distributed by Color Your World, or approved

equal. 2.1.8 Cleaner: To conform to #1000 Series of Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada. 2.1.9 Control Joints: Schluter Dilex-BWB - telephone 1-800-667-8746 and (514) 695-2100. Colour to match

tile, to Architect's approval. 2.1.10 Edging & Outside Wall Corners (if tile trims not available) Schluter®-RONDEC is a finishing and edge-protection profile for tiled edges and outside corners of tiled

surfaces. Telephone 1-800-667-8746 and (514) 695-2100. Colour and finish material to Architect's approval.

3. EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP 3.1.1 Examine tile substrates before commencing work to ensure they are satisfactory. Defective work

resulting from installation on unsatisfactory surfaces will be considered the responsibility of those performing the work of this Section.

3.1.2 Perform work neatly and carefully by persons skilled in this trade. Work of this section shall be executed by a company that is a registered member in good standing of the Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association.

3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 Prepare surfaces and install tile in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Ensure substrate

is clean, dry, smooth and free of grease, oil, rust. sealers or curing compounds, etc.




SFAI 3

3.2.2 Thoroughly clean all surfaces of substances deleterious to the bond of the setting bed. 3.2.3 Minimum curing of new concrete slabs is 28 days. 3.3 INSTALLATION 3.3.1 Installation to the Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada Installation Manual 200-1979,

Ceramic Tile as applicable. Floor Tile Installation: In dry set mortar bonded to concrete slab; in accordance with TTMAC Detail No. 200-15.

3.3.2 Prime entire substrate surface at dry set mortar applications in accordance with bedding manufacturer's

recommendations. 3.3.3 Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3.4 Proceed with tile work only when base surfaces, materials, and air temperatures have been maintained

between 10oC and 21oC for 72 hours preceding installation, and will be so maintained during installation and until setting materials have cured, minimum 72 hours after installation.

3.3.5 Lay out tiles, as per approved drawings and site conditions, to minimize cutting and to center joints. Lay

out tilework with fields centred on areas, with no tiles of less than half size and with floor joints parallel with wall and at right angles to each other unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

3.3.6 Begin laying floor tile at a control joint or expansion joint in both directions. 3.3.7 Leave or cut openings of correct sizes for installation of accessories, fittings, and similar built-in work. 3.3.8 Butt internal vertical intersections. 3.3.9 Cut and grind tile where required to fit. Rub cut edges smooth with abrasive stone. 3.3.10 Drill tile for hardware and for pipes where possible. Where tile are cut at pipes, fit them closely so that

escutcheons cover cuts. 3.3.11 Caulk joints around all pipes and other components penetrating tile surfaces with sealant in accordance

with requirements of Section 07900. 3.3.12 Extend tile into reveals and behind fitments. 3.3.13 Joints: 1/16" wide. 3.3.14 Sound tiles after setting and replace hollow–sounding units to obtain full bond. 3.3.15 Provide control joints in ceramic tile floors at maximum 16'-0" o.c. in both directions, at perimeter

restraining walls, around columns and where tile abuts other hard materials and over all slab expansions joints. Locations to be confirmed on site. Caulk joint with sealant, in accordance with requirements of Section 07900.

3.3.16 Replace defective, damaged, loose, and un-bonded tiles, and point defective joints. 3.3.17 Wash glazed tile surfaces with water. Wash unglazed surfaces with tile cleaner. Do not use muriatic

acid for cleaning unless other methods fail, and only in a 5% solution followed by a drenching rinse of water and when approved by Architect.

3.3.18 Clean with cloths dampened with mineral spirits and allow to dry overnight before grouting.




SFAI 4

3.3.19 Allow 24 hours for thinset to dry. 3.3.20 Apply sealer as per manufacturer's instructions. Allow to dry minimum of 12 hours. 3.3.21 Grout between tiles shall be mortar mix coloured to match tile. Colour to Architect's approval. Grouting

shall be done 24 hours after completion of tile lay up. Use spacers between tiles while adhesive sets. 3.3.22 Grout with dry–set cement forcing grout well into joints. 3.3.23 Remove excess and polish with clean cloths.

3.3.24 Minimum ambient temperature during installation: 120C. 3.3.25 Do not permit any foot traffic for 48 hours following installation. 3.3.26 Allow grout to dry completely. Clean remaining grout from surface of tile with water and a light abrasive

to manufacturer's recommendation. No acid to be used. Remove excess and polish with clean cloths. 3.3.27 Apply finish coat of sealer as per manufacturer's instructions. 3.3.28 Ceramic Tile Base Installation: On masonry and gypsum board; by dry set mortar, in accordance with

manufacturer's specifications. 3.3.29 All joints in floor, wall or base tiles shall line up. 3.3.30 All ceramic tile bases shall match floor tile. 3.3.31 Install stone base on walls and base where noted on drawings. 3.3.32 Install ceramic tile on counter face and base where noted on drawings. 3.4 CLEANING 3.4.1 Submit manufacturer's cleaning and maintenance instructions for tiles and include in maintenance binder

specified. 3.4.2 Clean floor immediately after grouting. 3.4.3 Stainless steel wool may be used to remove spots of grout which have set on surface. 3.4.4 If acid cleaning is deemed necessary, obtain written permission from Consultant before proceeding. 3.4.5 Apply a slip–resistant finish to all ceramic tile floor areas in accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions. END OF SECTION



TERRAZZO RESTORATION SECTION 09490

SFAI 1

1 General

1.1

SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for terrazzo restoration Work in

accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1 CSA A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test for

Concrete.

.2 CAN/CSA A3000, Cementitious Materials Compendium.

.3 TTMAC, Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1 Product data:

.1 Submit duplicate copies of manufacturer's Product data in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract indicating:

.1 Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard(s), characteristics, limitations, and trouble-shooting protocol.

.2 Product transportation, storage, handling and installation requirements.

.2 Shop drawings:

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract indicating:

.1 Terrazzo layout.

.2 Perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials.

.3 Setting details.

.3 Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates stating that materials supplied are in accordance with this specification.

.4 Closeout submittals: Submit recommended maintenance instructions and listing of recommended maintenance Products for incorporation into Operations and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.


.1 Installers qualifications: Perform Work of this Section by a company that has a minimum of five years proven experience in the installation of terrazzo units of a similar size and nature and that is approved by manufacturer. Submit to Consultant, applicator’s current certificate of approval by the material manufacturer as proof of compliance.




SFAI 2

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Do not install Work of this Section outside of the following environmental ranges without the Consultant's and Product manufacturer's written acceptance:

.1 Ambient air and surface temperature: 15°C to 45°C.

.2 Precipitation: None.

.2 Install temporary protection and facilities to maintain the Product manufacturer's, and specified, environmental requirements for 7 Days before, during, and 7 Days after installation.

2 Products

2.1

MATERIALS

.1 Cement: Portland cement to meet specified requirements of CAN/CSA A3000, Normal

or High-Early strength. Use white portland cement in white matrix.

.2 Sand: To meet specified requirements of CSA A23.1, sharp, screened, washed. Use

white sand in white matrix.

.3 Water: Potable, free from acids, alkalies, oil, or organic materials.

.4 Divider Strips: To match existing material and size.

.5 Topping:

.1 Marble Chips: To meet specified requirements of Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada, match existing size gradation and colour.

.2 Colour pigments: Pure mineral, alkali-resistant, non-fading, colour to match existing.

.6 Cleaner: To meet specified requirements of #1000 Series of Terrazzo, Tile and Marble

Association of Canada.

.7 Sealer: To meet specified requirements of #2000 Series of Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada.

.8 Floor Finish: To meet specified requirements of Type #3001 of Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada.

.9 Curing Agent: Non-staining, maximum moisture retention 0.015 grams, to meet specified requirements of Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada.

2.2

MIXES

.1 Underbed:

.1 One part cement to four parts sand by volume.

.2 Add water to product stiff mix, but use no more than four gals/80 lb. bag of cement




SFAI 3

to make workable.

.2 Topping:

.1 Marble chip aggregate and cement mixed dry with colour pigments to match existing. Grind a small area to determine the true colours of existing terrazzo and chip gradation.

.2 Water shall not exceed 18 L /bag of cement.

.3 Prepare topping by mechanical mixing with materials added in the following order: one-half of aggregate, total of cement, water, remaining aggregate.

3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Ensure that environmental conditions and backing surfaces have been provided according

to specified requirements. Do not proceed with work until satisfied that installation will meet specified standard.

3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Take extreme care that surfaces adjacent to terrazzo work are protected from staining by terrazzo materials, and that slurry is not tracked into other building areas any time during installation.


.3 Sweep backing surfaces clean of all loose materials, and remove the debris. Clean off contaminants which would cause a defective installation.

.4 Locate and prepare for equipment or accessories recessed in finished terrazzo work.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 General:

.1 Installation shall match existing type. Profile of base shall match existing. Where bases are of different profiles, install new base of profile to match finished installation.

.2 When patching terrazzo, extend area to nearest divider strip in all directions.

.2 Underbed for Bonded Installation:

.1 Wet backing surfaces with water, remove excess, and when surface water has dried, slush into soaked backing a neat portland cement grout.

.2 Immediately following application of grout, place underbed, spread evenly, and screed to true levels to receive specified topping.

.3 Divider Strips:

.1 Install divider strips in underbed while it is still semi-plastic.

.2 Locate divider strips accurately. Set them straight, aligned, to line up with existing




SFAI 4

and at correct level; make junctions tight; and firmly trowel them along edges into underbed to ensure anchorage.

.3 Set edging strips at junctions with other floor finishes to provide precisely for their thicknesses and finished levels after grinding. At openings set edging strips under doors.

.4 Extend divider strips at right angles across borders.

.4 Placing of Topping:

.1 Let underbed cure for at least 24 hours.

.2 Wet top of underbed with water, remove excess, and when surface water had dried slush into soaked underbed a neat Portland cement grout of same colour cement and pigment as for matrix.

.3 Apply topping to slurry or underbed while it is still wet.

3.4 TOPPING

.1 Standard Finish:

.1 Into wet topping surface of floors, sprinkle wet aggregate of same materials in same proportions as specified for topping.

.2 Apply so that finish surfaces match existing.

.2 Surface Preparation:

.1 After finish aggregates are added, immediately roll floor topping with a heavy roller to compact and to remove excess water and cement. Pack bases.

.2 Hand trowel all terrazzo surfaces to expose divider strips level with topping.

.3 Curing:

.1 Cure topping for a minimum of six days following placing.

.2 Cure to ensure that topping is kept damp until cement is hydrated.

.3 Use wet mats or sand, paper or plastic sheets, or liquid curing compound.

3.5 FINISHING

.1 Grind terrazzo surfaces by machine. Hand rub places inaccessible to grinding machines.

.2 Constantly flood surfaces with water during grinding.

.3 For initial grinding, use 24 to 60 grit carborundum stones.

.4 After initial grinding, wash surfaces clean, remove all residue from holes and voids, and thoroughly rinse with only water.

.5 Trowel plastic grout, of same mix and colour as matrix, into holes and voids of wetted surface, and remove excess. When grout begins to set, work it into holes and voids with burlap or excelsior pads, and remove excess.

.6 Cure grout for a minimum of 48 hours as specified above for curing.




SFAI 5

.7 Give final grinding with 120 grit stones and water.

.8 Wash off surfaces thoroughly after grinding.

3.6

SITE TOLERANCES

.1 Finish surfaces shall be level or straight within a tolerance of 1.6 mm between division strips.

3.7

REPAIR

.1 Before Project completion, remove and replace defective, off-colour, and damaged work.

Defective work shall include areas where distribution of surface aggregate is visually different from surrounding area. Removed areas shall be completely bounded by divider strips or edges. Regrout and regrind surfaces left with open fissures and holes.

3.8

CLEANING

.1 Scrub terrazzo surfaces with an abundance of clean water. Use machine scrubbers where

possible for floors.

.2 Rinse with clean water and allow to dry.

.3 Remove dust with heavy-duty vacuum cleaner.

.4 If further cleaning is required, use Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada

#1001 cleaner in accordance with their specifications.

.5 Sealing:

.1 As soon as possible after final cleaning, apply a coat of sealer. Wipe off excess before it dries.

.2 Just before completion of Project, clean terrazzo, as specified above, and apply a second coat of sealer as before.

.3 Apply two coats of floor finish.

3.9 PROTECTION

.1 Prevent all traffic and work on newly laid floors by barricading areas for at least 24 hours following installation.

END OF SECTION



Renovations ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS SECTION 09511

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 The work described in this section consists of the supply and installation of: Suspended metal grid ceiling system. Acoustical panels. Fire rated assembly. Perimeter trim. 1.1.2 Include all areas where new services and connections require removal / replacement of existing ACT

ceilings. All replacement with new materials unless otherwise specified / agreed to by the Architect. 1.2 RELATED WORK Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Suspended gypsum board ceilings. Division 16 - Electrical: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience. 1.3.2 Installation: ASTM C636 except where specified otherwise. 1.3.3 Fabrication: ASTM C635. 1.4 SUBMISSIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1.4.1 Submit TWO identical samples of each type utilized per SITE of panel material 300 mm x 300 mm and

300 mm. sample of each grid type specified. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions to requirements of Section 01340 for review prior to commencing installation.

Submit complete assembly specifications for required fire-rated assemblies. 1.5 SEQUENCING / SCHEDULING 1.5.1 Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating

activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. 1.5.2 Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. 1.6 EXTRA STOCK 1.6.1 Provide extra quantity of acoustic [and luminous ceiling] units for maintenance use amounting to 2% of

gross acoustic ceiling area. Store at school where indicated by Custodian. Clearly identify contents. 1.6.2 Maintenance materials shall be same production run as installed materials. 1.7 WARRANTY 1.7.1 Provide a warranty for work of this Section as required by the General Conditions against defects in

materials and workmanship for a period not less than two years from Substantial Completion. Defects shall include, without being limited to, the following:

Failure of the suspended ceiling to remain water level;




SFAI 2

sagging or lifting of acoustic boards between supports; staining and discolouration of factory finishes; development of corrosion of galvanized ferrous metal; development of cracks, splits and other surface deterioration in acoustic panels. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

1.8.1 Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 160C, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation.

2. PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS 2.1.1 Grid: Heavy duty, two directional exposed tee bar grid; components die cut and interlocking, including

wall mouldings and all supports required for radiant panel heating elements indicated on Mech. Dwgs.;

a) Main tees nominally 3600 mm long with at least one expansion per 3600 mm length spaced 1200 mm o.c. Cross tees nominally 1200 mm long and spaced 600 mm o.c. by CGC Inc. or Bailey Metal Products Ltd. as per ULC I214 assembly listing.

DX for non- fire rated ceiling Exposed Grid manufactured by Donn Products Ltd /Armstrong Prelude XL” or approved alternative.

2.1.2 Accessories: Edge mouldings including perimeter and shadow moulding, required for suspended grid

system; hold – down clips as required. Finish to match tee bar finish. 2.1.3 Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating, components die cut. 2.1.4 Main Tee: With double web, rectangular bulb and 25 mm rolled cap on exposed face. 2.1.5 Cross Tee: With rectangular bulb; web extended to form positive interlock with main tee webs; lower

flange extended and offset to provide flush intersection. 2.1.6 Grid Finish: Baked satin sheen white enamel finish. 2.1.7 Support Channels: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling

system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 2.1.8 Tie Wire: 18 ga galvanized soft annealed steel wire. 2.1.9 Hangers: Galvanized mild steel rod or galvanized steel wire of size capable of safely supporting

anticipated ceiling system and loading within maximum deflection of 1/360. 2.1.10 Inserts and Attachments to Structure for Hanger Connections: To suit conditions and loading,

galvanized after fabrication. 2.2 PANEL MATERIALS 2.2.1 Fire Rated Acoustic Panels: CAN2-92.1M, 600mm x 1200mm x 15mm thick, colour white, pattern to

match existing; Fire Guard “Fine Fissured”, 1830M by Armstrong World Industries Canada Limited; colour: white. No substitutions accepted. Provide complete system to meet required fire resistance rating including hold down clips and fire-rated protection boxes for recessed light fixtures where required, as per ULC I214 assembly listing.




SFAI 3

2.2.2 Regular (non-rated) Acoustic Panels: CAN2-92.1M, 600mm x 1200mm x 15mm thick, colour white, pattern to match existing; “Fine Fissured”, #1729M by Armstrong World Industries Canada Limited; colour: white.

2.2.3 All suspended ceiling materials to complete with anti-microbial/anti-mold properties. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on drawings. 3.1.2 Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.1.3 Beginning of installation means acceptance of site conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. 3.2.2 Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. 3.2.3 Install after major work above ceiling is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. 3.2.4 Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are

spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 3.2.5 Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected

hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. 3.2.6 Locate system on room axis leaving equal border units and according to reflected plan. 3.2.7 Support suspension system main runners at max. 1200 mm. o/c. Do not support components on main

runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Reinforce ceiling to carry mechanical and electrical loads imposed thereon. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 150 mm. of each corner and at max. 600 mm. spacing around perimeter of fixture.

3.2.8 Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 3.2.9 Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter

corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. 3.2.10 Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and

function. 3.2.11 Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. 3.2.12 Install panels only after all mechanical and electrical equipment, conduits, piping, telephone distribution

etc., are in place. Supply and install wall chanel and T bar to support radiant panels as shown on Mechanical drawings.

3.2.13 Make clean cuts for penetrations. Do not use secondary tee bars to subdivide typical full size panels to

accommodate cutouts. 3.3 TOLERANCES




SFAI 4

3.3.1 Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 3 mm. in 3 m.

3.3.2 Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 20 max. 3.4 CLEANING 3.4.1 Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces. Replace all damaged ACT

tiles in the place of Work with new stock prior to turnover. 3.5 MAKE GOOD 3.5.1 Make good existing acoustic treatment at junctions with the new work. All revised areas to receive new

tiles unless otherwise specified / approved by the Architect. END OF SECTION



SAFETY SHEET VINY FLOORING SECTION 09657

SFAI 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes: This section includes labor, materials and other services necessary to complete resilient sheet flooring, safety and slip resistant sheet vinyl flooring systems and accessories work. Conform with requirements of all Sections of Division 1, General Requirements, as it applies to the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: .1 Coordination of start date and timeframe. .2 Coordination of substrate preparation. .3 Coordination of moisture and pH testing. .4 Coordination with moisture mitigation if required. .5 Coordination of proper plumbing fixtures for connections with flooring. .6 Floor installation and heat welding of all seams, horizontal and vertical.

.2 Related Sections: .1 Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete finishing. .2 Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Plywood floor sheathing. .3 Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection. .4 Division 15 - Mechanical.

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM D 2047, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.

.2 ASTM E 648/NFPA 253, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

.3 ASTM E662, Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.

.4 ASTM F710, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.

.5 ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit.

.6 ASTM F1482, Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use Under Resilient Flooring.

.7 ASTM F1303, Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing.

.8 ASTM F2170, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.

.9 (RFCI) Resilient Floor Covering Institute 1. RFCI Standard Slab Moisture Test Method (Calcium Chloride Method) as a supplementary test

method to ASTM F2170. .10 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

1. CAN/ULC-S102.2, Surface Burning Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Covering and Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies

.11 ASTM F 3010 Standard Practice for Two-Component Resin Based Membrane-Forming Moisture Mitigation Systems for Use Under Resilient Floor Coverings

.12 DIN 51130 Slip Resistance Test

.13 ACI 302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials

.14 RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Covering 1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current printed product literature, specifications, installation instructions, and field reports in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to indicate materials, details, and accessories in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures including but limited to the following: .1 Submit a cut diagram indicating seam locations and roll direction. Use mitered seam layouts for corners

when changing directions 180 degrees (e.g. when running material down corridors which bisect at a right angle), unless approved otherwise.




SFAI 2

.3 Samples: Submit duplicate 6" x 9" (152 mm x 228 mm) sample pieces of sheet material, 6" (152 mm) long

[gulley edge] [cap strip] [joint cover strip] [cove former] in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

.4 Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: .1 Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data for

incorporation into manual specified in accordance with Section 01780 – Closeout Submittals. Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.


.1 Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project. .1 Training: Installer who has attended an Altro flooring installation training clinic or who has successfully

installed Altro in three previous wet-area environments. .2 Awarded flooring contractor must use in-house installers. .3 Awarded flooring contractor must be able to provide recent Altro references with contacts.

.2 Mock-ups: Install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer approved

installation methods, including concrete substrate testing. .1 Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison; remove and legally

dispose of mock-up when no longer required. .2 Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner’s approval.

.3 Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate

conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions, manufacturer’s warranty requirements, and installer qualifications.

.4 Bond Test: Install multiple bond tests using 3’ x 3’ pieces of material adhered with the appropriate adhesive to verify quality of adhesion. Remove half of each piece after 24 hours, then the other half after 48 hours. To help assess resistance to indentation, place end user equipment onto a sample for 72 hours. Document all results.

.5 Regulatory Requirements: Provide slip resistant sheet vinyl safety flooring in compliance with the following: .1 Americans with Disabilities Act Architectural Guidelines (ADAAG) .2 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Temperature Requirements: If storage temperature is below 65F (18C) or the floor temperature is below 50F (18C), the Altro Aquarius flooring product must be moved to a warmer place and allowed to reach this temperature before unrolling or installation. For further information, refer to current Altro Installation Practices and Quick Facts.

.2 Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at flooring installation area between 68F (20C) and

80F (26C) for 48 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

.2 Deliver, store and handle resilient flooring materials in accordance with Section 01610 - Basic Material Requirements.




SFAI 3

.3 Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

.4 Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions, at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.

.5 Store rolls in dry locations. Stand rolls on end. Protect and secure rolls from falling. 1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Deposit all packaging materials in appropriate container on site for recycling or reuse.

.2 Avoid using landfill waste disposal procedures when recycling facilities are available.

.3 Keep all discarded packaging away from children. 1.8 WARRANTY

.1 Warranty period for Altro Aquarius shall be 10 years commencing on date of substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SAFETY FLOORING

.1 Safety Sheet Vinyl Manufacturer: Aquarius by Altro.

.1 CANADA: 6221 Kennedy Rd, Unit 1, Mississauga ON, L5T 2S8 Toll Free: 800.565.4658 Tel: 905.564.1330 Fax: 905.564.0750

.2 Acceptable material: Altro Aquarius (measurements and product weights listed are

approximate): Slip Resistance ASTM D2047 .88 Dry, 1.03 Wet; Thickness: 0.08” (2 mm); Roll Width: 6' 7" (2 m); Roll Length: 66' (20 m); Roll Weight: 220 lb (100 kg).

SOLID COLOUR Colour to be selected from current range found at www.altrofloors.com

and as selected by the Architect.

2.2 ACCESSORIES Including but not limited to:

.1 Vinyl welding rod: Acceptable material: .1 Altro Weld Rod

.2 Cove former: Acceptable material, sized to suit application: .1 Altro Cove former [20R - 24 mm (1") radius] [38R - 45 mm (1.75") radius].

.3 Gulley edge: Acceptable material, vinyl, sized to suit application: .1 Altro Gulley Edge [GA 35/25] [GE 35RE] [GE 25RE].

.4 Cap strip: Acceptable material, sized to suit application, [Vinyl] [stainless steel]: .1 Altro Cap Strip [C4] [C5] [C8] [C11].

.5 Subfloor Filler and Leveler: Use only grey Portland cement-based “moisture tolerant” underlayments, and patching compounds. Use for filling cracks, holes or leveling. White gypsum materials are not acceptable.

.6 Metal edge strips: .1 Aluminum extruded, smooth, [mill finish] stainless steel with lip to extend over flooring.

.7 Adhesives .1 Altrofix 30 – 2-part Polyurethane adhesive .2 Altrofix 31 – 2-part Polyurethane fast set version for repairs and small areas.

http://www.altrofloors.com/




SFAI 4

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog, installation instructions found at www.altrofloors.com.

.2 Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other

sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.2 PREPARATION

.1 Remove substrate paint, coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives or contain soap, wax, oil, solvents, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

.2 Permanent and non-permanent markers, pens, crayons, and paint shall not be used to write on the back of the flooring material or used to mark the substrate as they could bleed through and stain the flooring material.

.3 Safety flooring shall be installed over subfloors conforming to ASTM F710 for concrete and other monolithic

floors or ASTM F1482 for wood subfloors.

.4 Always conduct moisture tests per ASTM F-2170 on all concrete slabs regardless of age or grade level. ASTM F-2170 Internal Relative Humidity (IRH) test results must not exceed 90%. Alkalinity Testing per ASTM F710 with an acceptable range of 7-9.9 pH.

.5 Do not proceed with work until results of moisture condition tests are acceptable.

.6 When patching, a moisture tolerant patching compound must always be used.

.7 Contingency for High Moisture Readings in Concrete:

.1 If at the time of installation the moisture readings are in excess of Altro’s recommendations, the General Contractor shall employ a means of Moisture Mitigation. This includes, but is not limited to, the following methods:

.1 Application of a Moisture Reduction Barrier (MRB)

.2 Temporary use of dehumidification equipment.

.3 Postponing of the flooring installation start time.

.4 A budget should be provided to the general contractor for use of an MRB

.8 Wood Subfloors: Confirm wood subfloors meet the following requirements. .1 Must conform to ASTM F-1482 Standard Guide to Wood Substrates. .2 Wood subfloors shall have a minimum 18 inch (45.7 cm) of cross-ventilated space beneath the bottom

of the joist. The floor must be rigid, free of movement. .3 Single wood and tongue and groove subfloors shall be covered with a minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), 3/8

inch (9mm) or 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) APA approved underlayment plywood as follows. .4 Use 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick underlayment panels for boards with a face width of 3 inches (76 mm) or

less. .5 Use 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick underlayment panels for boards with a face width wider than 3 inches (76

mm). .6 Do not install directly on OSB (Oriented Strand Board), particleboard, chipboard, luan or composite

type panels unless specifically designed and approved by the panel manufacturer for use as a resilient flooring underlayment.

3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Installation: Install Altro Aquarius in accordance with the current posted Altro Installation Practices at www.altrofloors.com, Downloads, Technical Documents, Installation Guides. All Seams shall be heat welded






SFAI 5

with Altro Weldrod™ only. Failure to install Altro Aquarius flooring in accordance with recommended procedures will void the Altro Limited Product Warranty.

.2 Detailing Guide for Wet Areas: can be found on our website at www.altrofloors.com, Downloads, Technical Documents, Installation Guides. The installation of Altro Aquarius in a wet environment is a system installation. All circular drain covers must be modified in the field or specified by the architect to be Surface-Membrane Clamping Style Drains and installed per the instructions in the Altro Flooring installation guide. The Gulley Edge/Angle, AltroMastic, Cove Former, and Cap Strip Accessories are necessary accessories for a water-tight and manufacturer-compliant installation.

.3 Drains: Fit Altro Safety and Slip Resistant Flooring and mechanically fasten to drain outlets to ensure a

permanent, watertight installation. .1 New Round Drains: Install round flash clamping ring type drains to accommodate Altro safety

flooring. Install drains to fit flush with surrounding floor surface. Acceptable drain manufacturers and drain types include Zurn Z 415-H, Mifab F1100-FC, Wade 1100-FC, Josam 30000-AD, Watts FD 100-FC and Smith 2051. Please refer to Altro’s current Installation Guide for approved drain manufacturers and styles, www.altrofloors.com, Downloads, Technical Documents, Installation Guides. If Surface-Clamping Style Drains are not utilized, the Flooring Sub-Contractor MUST modify the drain covers to mechanically fasten flooring to drain outlets.

.2 Existing Drains: When existing drains are to be used, provide mechanically fastened stainless

steel drain rings over all-round drain outlets. Fit rings over slip resistant sheet vinyl and permit inside diameter that will allow clean-out plate to be removed after installation. Drill into concrete to accommodate lead or plastic anchors. Screw drain rings to create a tight seal with beveled head stainless steel screws.

.3 Square and Rectangular Drains and Floor Sinks: Install Altro Gully Edge GE25RE or

GE35RE around perimeter of drain which has been set in concrete in accordance with Altro Installation Guide. Do not use Altro Gully Edge around drains set in wood floors. Provide stainless steel strips, mechanically fastened with stainless steel screws. Use stainless steel strips in other areas where it is not practical to use Altro Gully Edge.

.4 Coved Installation: Where Altro flooring is coved up wall surfaces and other abutments, installation

shall be in accordance with Altro Installation Practices using the following accessories: .1 At standard wall finishes: Use Altro C5 vinyl cap strip to accommodate sheet vinyl to a

height as indicated; adhere with contact tape. .2 At ceramic tile, Altro Whiterock semi-rigid wall cladding or FRP paneling: Use Altro C8

Vinyl Cap Tile Strip or C4 cap, respectively. .3 When coving up the wall; at juncture of vertical and horizontal surfaces: Use Altro Vinyl

Cove Former 901: install with contact tape. .4 Top set cove base: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 CLEANING

.1 Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. .1 Repair or replace damaged installed products. .2 Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to Owner’s

acceptance. .3 Current recommended maintenance procedures can be found on the Altro website at

www.altrofloors.com, Downloads, Technical Documents, Maintenance Guides.

.2 Protection: .1 Sweep or vacuum all construction debris and dust first, then clean the flooring with AltroClean

44 /AltroClean 44 Plus using an auto scrubber. .2 Cover and protect finished installation from damage from other trades using a non-staining,

temporary floor protection system, such as reusable textured plastic sheeting. .3 Never use tapes on the surface on the finish flooring, Sharpies, pens, crayons or construction

markers on either the finish flooring or the substrate. .4 No traffic for 24 hours after installation, unless approved by Altro technical.

https://www.altro.com/getmedia/54eccf35-fccd-46f0-afe0-52288f8b483d/Wet-areas-detailing-guide-2017.pdf.aspx







SFAI 6

.5 No heavy traffic, rolling loads, or furniture placement for 72 hours after installation.

.6 Wait 72 hours after installation before performing initial cleaning. Start a regular maintenance program after the initial cleaning as recommended by manufacturer

3.5 PROTECTION

.1 Cover and protect finished installation from damage from other trades using a non-staining, temporary floor protection system, such as a reusable textured plastic sheeting.

.2 Altro Aquarius should be covered and protected from all other trades during construction with a suitable

non-staining protective covering without taping to the surface of the flooring.

END OF SECTION



PAINTING SECTION 09900

SFAI 1

Part 1 General

1.1 Acceptable Manufacturers:

.1 Materials shall be produced by one of the following manufacturers:

.1 Para Paints Ultra Semi-gloss 8300 Series

.2 Pratt and Lambert Inc.

.3 Pittsburgh Paints (PPG) Manor Hall Series

1.2 Paint and Finish Schedule

.1 Prior to ordering materials submit paint finish schedule to the Consultant for approval. Schedule shall list materials to be provided, surface to be painted, room name and number, material name and manufacturer’s colour ship sample.

1.3 Samples

.1 Submit two 100 X 200 mm colour chips of each paint colour to confirm colour match

with approved paint and finish schedule.

.2 Prepare samples of each natural or stained finish; door finish (full size) and epoxy coated handrails.

.3 Prepare sample panels on permanent wall and ceiling areas for each paint system

demonstrating first coat, second coat and third coat coverage.

.4 Sample panels shall remain until completion of painting at which time they shall be finished with full coats of paint. Do not proceed with paining until sample panels have been approved.

Part 2 Products

2.1 Materials

.1 Materials shall be “top line” quality, supplied by a single manufacturer except for

specialty products.

.2 Confirm gloss levels for all surfaces with Consultant before starting work. Unless otherwise indicated allow for the following:

1 Ceiling: satin 2 Walls: semi-gloss 3 Trims, doors, and frames: semi-gloss 4

All other surfaces: semi-gloss




SFAI 2

Part 3 Execution

3.1 General Requirements

.1 Paint behind surface mounted fixtures on walls and ceilings with full coats of paint.

.2 Paint inside of light coves white.

.3 Finish edges of doors to match face of door.

.4 Finish drawers on all sides.

.5 Paint tops, bottoms and edges of shelves with full coats, whether exposed or not.

.6 Paint interiors of ducts at grilles and diffusers with two coats of flat black paint.

.7 Paint exposed ductwork and piping in colours to match background wall or ceiling colour.

.8 Paint all gas piping with high visibility yellow-orange.

.9 Paint all roof top equipment and components including vent stack flashings and

sleeve flashings but not including prefinished sheet metal flashing.

3.2 Schedule of Interior Finish

.1 Gypsum Board (walls and partitions)

1 coat drywall primer tinted to base colour 2 coats latex enamel or latex acrylic

.2 Gypsum Board (ceilings and bulkheads) 1 coat drywall primer

2 coats acrylic latex semi-gloss

.3 Concrete and Concrete Block 2 coat block filler tinted 2 coats acrylic latex semi-gloss

.4 Metal, prime painted spot prime with acrylic metal primer 2 coats acrylic semi-gloss

.5 Metal, zinc coated 1 coat acrylic metal primer 2 coats acrylic semi-gloss

.6 Woodwork, painted 1 coat alkyd or latex primer 2 coats acrylic latex enamel

.7 Woodwork stained and varnished (transparent finish) 1 coat stain 1 coat sand sealer, light sanding 1 coat polyurethane varnish, gloss 1 coat polyurethane varnish, satin 2

.8 Exposed piping, wrapped 1 coat block filler 3 coats acrylic semi-gloss




SFAI 3

.9 Exposed piping and conduit, unwrapped 1 coat metal primer 2 coats acrylic semi-gloss

.10 Exposed Ductwork, insulated 1 coat block filler 2 coats acrylic semi-gloss

.11 Metal, epoxy coated 1 coat epoxy primer 1 coat epoxy gloss

END OF SECTION



Renovations WASHROOM ACCESSORIES SECTION 10800

SFAI 1

1. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 The work described in this section consists of the supply and installation and placement of WASHROOM

ACCESSORIES. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

Finish Carpentry under Section 06200 Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing Systems under Section 09110

Acoustic Ceiling Tile Suspension Systems under Section 09130 Painting under Section 09900 Manufactured Specialties under Section 10925

Electrical under Div. 16 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS / SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Provide shop drawings and product sheets for each item to be installed, include installation drawings and

details. The General Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings in sufficient time to allow Architect to review placement with Owner and propose alternate placement without disruption of Work schedule and / or added cost to Owner for additional blocking etc. All work shall be set out from approved shop drawings.

1.3.2 Indicate correct size and description of components, base material, surface finish inside and out,

hardware and locks, attachment devices, description of rough-in framing and building-in details of anchors, etc. required for installation.

1.3.3 Provide plan and elevations indicating the proposed location, clearances and mounting heights for all

items. 1.3.4 Provide 3 copies of operation and maintenance data for each item of washroom accessories for

incorporation into the Project Manuals specified under Section 01300 Administrative Submittals by General Contractor.

1.3.5 Provide special tools and keys required for accessing, assembly/disassembly or removal for washroom

accessories in duplicate for each item. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.4.1 Deliver manufactured items to the site packed in protective coverings. Supply protective coatings to

prevent damage and store in approved areas. 1.4.2 No trademarks or labels will be accepted on exposed finished surfaces. 1.5 REFERENCES 1.5.1 ASTM-A167-96: Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,

Sheet and Strip ASTM-A653 / A653M-97: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. ASTM-A924 / A924M-96a: Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-

Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.




SFAI 2

ASTM-B456-97: Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.

CAN/CGSB-1.81-M90: Air Drying and Baking Alkyd Primer for Vehicles and Equipment. CAN/CGSB-1.88-92: Gloss Alkyd Enamel Air Drying and Baking. CAN/CGSB-12.5 –M86: Mirrors, Silvered. CAN/CGSB-31-GP-107Ma-90: Non-Inhibited Phosphoric Acid Base Metal Conditioner and Rust

Remover. CAN/CGSB-B651-95: Barrier-Free Design. CAN/CGSB-G164-M92: Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregular Shaped Articles. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 As indicated on the drawings. 2.1.1 Provide reinforcing and anchorage for built-in products. 2.1.2 Insulate between dissimilar metals, and metal and masonry, to prevent electrolysis. 2.2 FABRICATION GENERAL 2.2.1 Fabricate work true to dimension, square and plumb. 2.2.2 Thickness of metals shall be adequate for the various conditions and intended uses. 2.2.3 Finished work shall be free from warping, open seams, weld marks, rattles, and other defects. Drilling

shall be reamed and exposed edges finished smooth. There shall be no sharp edges. 2.2.4 Fastenings shall be concealed or theft-proof type where possible. Exposed fastenings shall be neatly

executed and shall be of the same material, texture, colour and finish as the base metal on which they occur. Keep exposed fastenings to absolute minimum, evenly spaced and neatly laid out. Make fastenings of permanent type unless otherwise indicated.

2.2.5 Supply all fasteners, anchors, accessories required for fabrication and erection of work of this Section.

Such items occurring on or in an exterior wall or slab shall be hot dip galvanized. Make thread dimensions such that nuts and bolts will fit without rethreading or chasing threads.

2.2.6 Manufactured items shall be shop fabricated according to the best shop practice and shall be finished

with a paint prime coat or baked enamel finish according to manufacturer's literature unless stated otherwise herein.

2.2.7 Fit and assemble work in shop where possible. Execute work according to details and approved shop

drawings. Where shop fabrication is not possible, make trial assembly in shop. 2.2.8 Do all welding in accordance with requirements of CSA W59. File or grind welds smooth and flush

where exposed to view and where specifically indicated on drawings. 2.2.9 Fit joints and intersecting members accurately. Make work in true planes with adequate fastening. 2.2.10 Shop Painting: Where other types of finishing or priming are not specified, thoroughly clean ferrous

metals in accordance with SSPC-SP5-63 and apply one coat of primer to CGSB 1-GP-40M. Brush on thoroughly and work well into crevices and interstices.




SFAI 3

2.3 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES 2.3.1 Washroom accessories of the same materials, construction and finishes, similar in function, design,

appearance and conforming to the standards of those specified, provide all the equipment from one manufacturer only, manufactured by the following are considered equal, subject to the approval of the Board:

Bobrick Washroom Equipment of Canada Ltd. Bradley Washfountain Co. Frost Metal Products Ltd. Twin-Cee Ltd. Watrous Sales Inc. 2.3.2 General Materials: a) Sheet Steel: commercial quality to ASTM-A653/A653M with ZF75 designation zinc coating to ASTM-

A924/A924M. b) Stainless Steel Sheet Metal: to ASTM-A167, Type 304, with satin finish. c) Stainless Steel Tubing: Type 304, commercial grade, seamless welded, 1.2 mm wall thickness, satin

finish. d) Fasteners: concealed screws and bolts hot dip galvanized. Exposed fasteners shall match the face

finish of the unit. Expansion shields of fibre, lead or rubber at solid walls and toggle bolts at hollow walls with blocking reinforcing as required / recommended by accessory manufacturer for the component and its intended use (maximum vandal resistant mounting).

2.3.3 ACCESSORIES: NEW WASHROOMS AND AS INDICATED

The following list of accessories is based on Bobrick but any of those listed above is acceptable.

a) Framed Tilting Mirror: (B-290 Series) B-293 -1836 by Bobrick with one piece roll framed, stainless steel frame 1/4" float glass, mirror guaranteed 15 year, tilted, with vandal proof framed mounting assembly. One per washroom

b) Full Length Mirror: 24" W x 60" H (61 x 152cm). One-piece, roll-formed 3⁄4" x 3⁄4" (19 x 19mm) angle-frame. Corners heliarc welded, ground and polished smooth. Beveled frame edge at mirror for improved appearance. No. 1 quality, 1⁄4" (6mm) glass mirror; warranted against silver spoilage for 15 years. Galvanized steel back. Secured to concealed wall hanger with theft-resistant mounting.

c) Surface-Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser B-2621ClassicSeries® Satin-finish stainless steel. Dispenses 200 C-fold or 275 multifold towels. Door has knob-latch. Hemmed towel tray opening. Unit 10 3/4" W, 7 1/8" H, 4" D (275 x 180 x 100mm).

d) Sanitary Napkin Disposal: B-270 by Bobrick Radius on corners and edges of sanitary napkin disposal shall complement other Bobrick Contura Series washroom accessories. Cover shall be drawn, one-piece, seamless construction and secured to container with a full-length stainless steel

piano‑hinge. Container shall have integral finger depression for opening cover.

e) Soap Dispenser :SD80V-EXT Chrome soap dispenser manufactured from chromium plated brass. Incor-porates a replaceable 1 litre polyethylene container for use with liquid soap standard. Rod extension for "Murro" basin Support rod fits (22 - 32 mm) opening.

f) Washroom Grab Bars: type-304 stainless steel with satin finish. Grab bar shall have 18-gauge (1.2mm) wall thickness and 1–1/2" (38mm) outside diameter. Backplate shall be 3/16" (5mm) thick




SFAI 4

stainless steel, equipped with screw holes for attachment to wall., with 1-1/2" clearance between wall and bar. Surface of all bars peened gripped all attached with stainless steel screws in appropriate stems for concrete block application – concealed fasteners. Sizes and shapes as follows:

Straight Grab Bar B-6806.99 x 24: 24″ (610mm) by Bobrick.

Unit L4 - B- 6898.99 by Bobrick Grab Bar —30"(760) x 30"(760) 90˚ angle. - Beside toilet Ends are heliarc welded to flanges. Clearance between the grab bar and wall is 1-1/2" (38mm).

Concealed Mounting Flanges — 18-8, type-304, 1/8" (3mm) thick, stainless steel plate; end flanges 2" x 3-1/8" (50 x 80mm) with two holes for attachment to wall. Intermediate flanges 2-5/8" x 3-1/8" (65 x 80mm) wide x 3-1/8" (80mm) diameter. Snap Flange Covers — 18-8, type-304, 22-gauge (0.8mm) drawn stainless steel with satin-finish. 3-1/4" (85mm) diameter x 1/2" (13mm) deep. Each cover snaps over mounting flange to conceal mounting screws.

Place horizontal bar 750mm above finished floor and vertical bar 150 mm in front of toilet.

SWING-UP GRAB BAR: B- 4998.99 by Bobrick Swing-up grab bar shall be manually raised for approach or departure and lowered to horizontal position for support; counterweighted design shall prevent grab bar from falling back down to the full horizontal position once grab bar is raised to the full upright (vertical) position. Grab bar shall comply with ICC/ ANSI A117.1-2003 Accessibility Standards. NO SUBSTITUTIONS

g) Washroom Shelf: B-298 x18 by Bobrick Surface mounted, 1.2 mm stainless steel with 1.6 mm stainless steel mounting brackets, 460 mm long x 200 mm deep, all edges to be rolled to avoid sharp edges.

h) Coat hooks: ONLY AT BF WASHROOMS. Surface-mounted hat and coat hook shall be constructed

of type-304 stainless steel with bright polish and shall project 3-1/16" (80mm) from wall. Flange and support arm shall be 22-gauge (0.8mm) and equipped with a concealed, 16-gauge (1.6mm) mounting bracket that is secured to a concealed, 16-gauge (1.6mm) wall plate with a stainless steel setscrew. Hook shall be 12-gauge (2.8mm) and shall be welded to support arm.

Bobrick model B-6827.

2.3.4 See Electrical Specifications for specification / connection of electric hand dryers, nurse call devices, etc. Locations shown on drawings. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Strictly adhere to manufacturer's instructions. Ensure proper backing and anchoring to suit required

loading. Obtain Architect's and manufacturer's approvals prior to deviations from manufacturer's procedures. Ensure guarantee conditions are met

3.1.2 Confirm EXACT installation locations with Architect before proceeding with the work. Do not install items

unless back–up surfaces are adequately reinforced to support the item.




SFAI 5

3.1.3 Mount items securely with concealed or tamper-proof fastenings. Install as indicated on drawings and to required line and levels. Repair construction voids produced by the work of this section to match existing surfaces. Fastenings shall be non-corrosive type.

3.1.4 Build and erect work plumb, true, square, straight, level, planar, flush and accurate to sizes detailed, to

reviewed shop drawings, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance. 3.1.5 Insulate metals where necessary to prevent corrosion due to contact between dissimilar metals and

between metals and concrete. Use bituminous paint, butyl tape, building paper or other approved means.

3.1.6 Supply adequate instructions, templates, and, if necessary, supervise installation of fastenings,

accessories, components, etc, required to be built in by Other Contractors and/or Subcontractors. 3.1.7 Provide mounting and anchorage devices to be built in to walls and other construction elements as

required to securely anchor components in place. Securely anchor components in place. Method of fastening shall ensure that components will be capable of withstanding expected loads without movement.

3.1.8 Install framed mirrors with concealed wall hinges and lock in place with theft-proof screws. 3.1.9 Strictly adhere to manufacturer's instructions. Ensure guarantee conditions are met. Obtain Owner's

and manufacturer's approvals prior to deviations from manufacturer's procedures. 3.1.10 Accessories shall comply with all local code requirements for the physically handicapped and installed

grab bars shall withstand a minimum push/pull force of 400 lbs. (1.779 KN). 3.2 CLEANING ADJUSTMENTS 3.2.1 Upon completion of work or when directed, remove all traces of protective coatings or paper. 3.2.2 Test mechanisms, hinges, locks, and latches, and where necessary, adjust and lubricate and ensure that

accessories are in perfect working order. 3.2.3 Remove all sharp edges. 3.2.4 After erection and installation, thoroughly clean work and apply field touch-up of same formula as shop

coat primer to damaged or unpainted surfaces of shop primed material. Work primer well into joints, crevices, interstices and open spaces.

END OF SECTION



Renovations

SFAI

MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTENT YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 15000 BARRIER FREE UPGRADES 490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.

SAL Project No. 19-221

CONTENT

SECTION TITLE 15000 Mechanical Specifications Content 15005 Demolition 15010 Mechanical General Requirements 15015 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 15060 Pipe Hangers and Supports 15075 Access Doors 15090 Identification 15260 Piping Insulation 15270 Ductwork Insulation 15410 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 15412 Domestic Water Piping 15413 Drainage Piping and Vent 15430 Plumbing Specialties and Accessories 15801 Metallic Ductwork and Accessories

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. DEMOLITION

YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 15005-1

BARRIER FREE UPGRADES

490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDING IN THIS SECTION

.1 Refer to drawings for detailed demolition scope of work.

.2 All existing building services not affected by this work shall be maintained in operation

during and after the demolition work is complete. Any accidental interruption of existing

building services not required by this project will be promptly repaired at no additional cost

to the Board.

.3 Prior to removing any piping, ensure the system is completely isolated and is not live.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Work of this section shall be executed by trades personnel having a minimum of five years

of experience in the demolition field and capable to deploy adequate equipment to

complete the work in an efficient and orderly manner.

1.3 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine existing property. Determine the nature of materials to be removed.

1.4 SALVAGE

.1 The Board Representative will review the Site prior to commencement of demolition and

instruct the Contractor, in writing, as to the items to be retained for re-use or be turned over

to the Board. In the absence of such specific instructions, materials from demolition shall

become property of Mechanical Contractor who shall promptly remove all salvageable

material and debris from Site.

.2 Remove and store indicated items for future use by the Board. Remove, handle and

transport such items to storage area designated by the Board Representative. Perform such

work carefully and with diligence to prevent any damage to the items during removal and

in storage. Store material to be salvaged, neatly on wooden pallets, where directed by

Board.

1.5 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC

.1 Maintain and preserve Board's access requirements within, to and from existing building in

areas where demolition and removal work is being carried out.

.2 Do not close, obstruct, place or store material in Board's driveways and passageways.

Conduct operations with minimum interference with roads, streets, driveways, user traffic

and passageways.






1.6 HAULING OPERATIONS

.1 Maintain roadways and paving in the hauling areas clean on a daily basis and as required

by Municipal Authorities.

1.7 INTERRUPTIONS TO BOARD’S OPERATIONS

.1 There will be absolutely no interruptions to the School schedule during demolition work.

Therefore, it is imperative that operations and machine and equipment movements,

deliveries and removals are executed at time or times that will permit uninterrupted Board's

operations in and around the school, including parking, receiving areas, deliveries and site

and access and egress.

.2 Where interruptions of domestic cold and hot water are necessary, coordinate with the

School Representatives the timing and duration of such interruptions.

1.8 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Coordinate posting of danger signs conspicuously around property. Close doorways and

thoroughfares giving access to area of demolition with barricades.

.2 Provide a competent, experienced supervisor in charge of the Work and on Site while work

is in progress.

.3 Should any suspect designated substance not already identified, be encountered, cease work

in the immediate area and immediately report, to the Board. Board is responsible for

removal of designated substances.

1.9 PROTECTION

.1 Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent structures, services, walks, paving,

and parts of existing building to remain. Make good any collateral damage caused by

demolition.

.2 Take precautions to support affected structures and, if safety of building being demolished

or adjacent structures or services appears to be endangered, cease operations and notify the

Board.

.3 Prevent debris from blocking drainage systems (floor drains) or other mechanical and

electrical systems that must remain in operation.

.4 Protect building floors against damage from demolition work. Use ½” plywood covers over

floor where lifting, moving, rolling of removed equipment is anticipated. Be responsible for

repairing any damage to flooring caused by the work defined in this section. Execute

repairs to the satisfaction of the Board at no cost to the Board.






PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Applicable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 DEMOLITION

.1 At the end of each day’s work, leave site in a safe condition and erect safety barriers and

lights as required. Ensure that no parts of the existing building are in danger of collapsing.

.2 Review the requirements of new equipment to be installed. Perform all demolition work

required to allow for the new equipment to be installed, whether shown on the drawings or

not.

.3 Control dust and dirt produced during demolition.

.4 Provide any additional labour, materials and services not specifically indicated on the

drawings but required to complete the work.

.5 Dispose of demolished materials in accordance with the requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.

.6 At the end of demolition work, leave site in broom-clean condition. Clean existing surfaces

specified to receive new applied finishes to ensure proper adherence.

.7 Do not disturb adjacent structures or equipment designated to remain in place.

.8 Confine operations and workers to those parts of the building which are defined on the

drawings and exercise great care not to damage existing construction beyond that necessary

for the carrying out of new work. Make good any such damage in every respect, to the

satisfaction of the Board.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 15010-1 BARRIER FREE UPGRADES 490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.


PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

.1 This section of the specification is an integral part of the Contract Documents and shall be read accordingly.

.2 Where applicable, all portions of the Mechanical Supplementary Tender Form shall be

submitted by bidders. 1.2 DUTIES OF MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR

.1 The mechanical contractor shall assume the responsibilities and duties including, but not limited to, the ones described below.

.2 Superintendence

1. Provide full time on-site superintendent personnel and supporting staff with proven

experience in project of similar value and complexity.

2. Site superintendent shall have over-all authority to speak for and represent the mechanical contractor.

.3 Coordination

1. Coordinate the work with all the sub-trades involved to ensure that the work will be

carried out on schedule and in proper sequence.

2. Take complete responsibility for all remedial work that results from failure to coordinate any aspect of the mechanical work prior to its fabrication and/or installation.

3. Take responsibility for the delivery of equipment necessary to complete the work in

accordance with the approved schedule. .4 Staffing and Scheduling

1. Within seven days after the award of the contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall

provide to the Owner’s representative the following information:

a. Appointment of official representatives in the project. b. Schedule of work. c. Delivery schedule for specified equipment. d. Requirements for temporary facilities, site signs, storage, etc.

.5 Work Completion Meeting

1. Prior to application for Substantial Performance of the Work, the mechanical contractor

shall participate in the take-over meeting. Agenda to include the following:



a. Review of outstanding deficiencies. b. Submission of maintenance manuals, warranties and as-built drawings. c. Results of performance tests and described further in this section. d. Scheduling of training to Owner’s personnel.

1.3 INTENT

.1 Bidders for this work shall include for all labor, material, equipment and all other related cost including all applicable taxes (except HST) and fees to provide the work as indicated on the drawings.

.2 Misinterpretation of any requirement of the drawings and specifications will not relieve the

Mechanical Contractor of responsibility. If in any doubt, the Mechanical Contractor shall contact the Consultant for written clarification prior to submitting a bid for the Work.

1.4 INTERFERENCE

.1 The mechanical drawings do not show all the architectural and structural details, and any information involving accurate measuring of the building shall be taken from the building drawings or at the building. Make without additional change, any necessary changes or additions to the runs of drains, pipes, ducts, etc., to accommodate the above conditions. The location of equipment may be altered without charge providing the change is made before installation and does not necessitate major additional material.

.2 Wherever differences occur between specifications, riser diagrams or schematics and

drawings, the maximum conditions shall govern and the bid shall be based on whichever information indicates the greater cost.

.3 Field verifications of dimensions on plans shall be made since actual locations, distances,

and levels will be governed by actual field conditions.

.4 Discrepancies between different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions, or between plans and specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the Consultant for a decision.

.5 Install all mechanical services including but not exclusive to drains, pipes, and ducts, to

conserve headroom and interfere as little as possible with the free use of the space through which they pass. All drains, pipes, ducts, etc., particularly those which may interfere with the inside treatment of the building, or conflicting with other trades, shall be installed only after the locations have been approved by the Consultant. Special care shall be taken in the installation of all mechanical services including, but not exclusive to drains, pipes, and ducts, which are to be concealed, to see that they come within the finished lines of floors, walls, and ceilings. Where such drains, pipes, ducts, etc., have been installed in such a manner as to cause interference, they shall be removed and re-installed in suitable locations without extra cost to the Owner.

.6 Before commencing work, check and verify all grade and invert elevations, stacks, levels,

and dimensions, to ensure proper and correct installation of the work.



.7 In every place where there is space indicated as reserved for future or other equipment, leave such space clear, install blank offs, shut off valves with blind flanges and other work so that the necessary connections can be made without any stoppages to the system. Consult with the Consultant whenever necessary for this purpose.

.8 In addition to the work specifically mentioned in the Specifications and shown on the

drawings, provide all other items that are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation, including those required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction over the work.

.9 The mechanical plans show approximate locations for wall mounted devices. Obtain

Consultant's approval of mounting heights and locations before commencement of work. 1.5 EXAMINE SITE

.1 Examine the site and the local conditions affecting the work. Examine carefully all drawings and the complete specifications to ensure that the work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown. No allowance will be made later for any expenses incurred through the failure to make these examinations or to report any such discrepancies in writing to the Consultant.

1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR’S SHOP

.1 Provide Job site office, work-shop, tools, scaffolds, material storage, etc., as required to complete the work.

1.7 CLEANING

.1 During the performance of the work and on the completion, remove from the place of the work all debris, rubbish and waste materials caused by the performance of the work. Remove all tools and surplus materials after completion and acceptance of the work.

.2 All equipment shall be thoroughly vacuumed out at the time of final acceptance of the

work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Protection of Equipment:

1. Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the Contractor until phased acceptance, whether or not the Owner has reimbursed the Contractor for the equipment and material. The Contractor is solely responsible for the protection of such equipment and material against any damage.

2. Place damaged equipment in first class, new operating condition; or, replace same as

determined and directed by the Consultant. Such repair or replacement shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.



3. Protect interiors of new equipment and piping systems against entry of foreign matter. Clean both inside and outside before painting or placing equipment in operation.

4. Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be under the

custody and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for new work.

.2 Cleanliness of Piping and Equipment Systems

1. Exercise care in storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be

incorporated in the work. Remove debris arising from cutting, threading and welding of piping.

2. Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to deliver clean systems.

3. Clean interior of all tanks prior to delivery for beneficial use by the Owner.

4. Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damage, and delay arising from

failure to provide clean systems.

1.9 INSTALLATION OF WORK

.1 Be responsible for:

1. The layout of the work shown on the drawings and specified herein, and for any damage caused to the Owner by improper location or carrying out of this work.

2. The prompt installation of the work in advance of concrete pouring or similar work.

3. The condition of all material and equipment supplied and for the protection and

maintenance of work completed. .2 Coordinate with other trades and schedule all work to suit the date for the substantial

performance established in the construction contract.

.3 Furnish items to be "built-up" in ample time and give necessary information and assistance in connection with the building in of the same.

.4 Proceed with the work as quickly as practical so that construction may be completed in as

short a time as possible and in accordance with the building schedule.

.5 Ensure that all equipment and material is ordered in time to meet the building schedule. Provide a schedule of equipment deliveries to the Owner within the time limit stipulated.

.6 Furnish promptly information required for the construction schedule.

.7 Manufactured products supplied with instructions for their installation shall be installed in

strict accordance with those instructions.



1.10 CODES, PERMITS, FEES, AND CONNECTIONS

.1 Conform to Federal, Provincial and Municipal regulations and perform work in accordance with requirements of By-Laws and Regulations in force in area where the building is to be erected.

.2 Apply for, obtain, and pay for all permits, fees and service connections for the work and the

inspections required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction in the area where the building is to be erected.

.3 In particular, coordinate with and pay for the local gas supply company to

adjust/modify/replace the existing gas meter assembly and PRV as required to ensure that the available gas pressure is adequate for all gas fired equipment to operate simultaneously at maximum capacity. The minimum gas pressure at the boiler shall not be less than 8" w.g. under simultaneous maximum operating condition of all gas-fired equipment.

.4 For information, a specific code or standard might be mentioned. This information must not

be taken as the only code or standard applicable.

.5 When part of equipment does not bear the required CSA label, the contractor shall obtain from CSA or Hydro Electric Power Commission, when that part of the equipment is an electric component, a special approval and pay the applicable fees.

.6 Furnish necessary certificates as evidence that the work installed conforms to laws and

regulations of Authorities having jurisdiction. Changes in work requested by an Authority having jurisdiction shall be carried out without charge.

1.11 MATERIALS

.1 Where materials, equipment, apparatus, or other products are specified by the manufacturer, brand name, type or catalogue number, such designation is to establish standards of desired quality style or dimensions and shall be the basis of the Bid. Materials so specified shall be furnished under this Contract, unless changed by mutual agreement. Where two or more designations are listed, the contractor shall choose one of those listed and state the choice made on the Bid Form or Supplementary Tender Form (where applicable).

1.12 EQUIVALENTS AND ALTERNATIVES

.1 Unless requests for changes in base bid specifications are received and approved min. 5 days prior to the opening of the bids, the Contractors will be held to furnish specified items under the base bid. After the Contract is awarded changes in specifications will be made only as defined in this section (see Material Substitutions below).

.2 Equipment of the Contractors' choice may be offered as alternates to the items named in the

specifications. Alternate proposals must be accompanied by full descriptive and technical data on the article proposed, together with a statement of the amount of addition or deduction from the base bid if the alternate is accepted. Prior approval from the Consultant



is not required on submitting alternative items, but the decision on acceptance of the alternate(s) will rest with the Consultant and the Owner Representative.

.3 Unspecified materials and/or rejected alternates built into the work shall be replaced with

specified or accepted materials at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.13 MATERIAL SUBSTITUIONS

.1 After execution of the Contract, requests for substitution of materials of makes other than those specifically named in the Contract Documents may be approved by the Consultant, subject to Owner’s review and acceptance of the financial credits involved.

.2 In the absence of such express approval by the Consultant, the Mechanical Contractor will

be held to furnish specified items under the base bid. 1.14 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES

.1 Submit to the Consultant detailed dimension shop drawings and installation wiring diagrams for all mechanical equipment. Further details and special requirements called for in these specifications shall be shown on the shop drawings.

.2 Ensure that copies of all reviewed shop drawings are available on the job site for reference.

.3 Provide samples of mechanical equipment as requested in the specification at the same time

as the shop drawing submission. 1.15 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

.1 Maintain up to date “as built” drawings on site.

.2 At the conclusion of the project, the Consultant will forward to the Contractor a set of electronic files of the project. The Contractor shall modify the files as required, to reflect the as-built conditions, mark them conspicuously in the title block as “as-built drawings” and submit the modified files to the Consultant for review.

.3 Upon certifications by the Consultant that the as-built files are correct, the files shall be

transferred on a CD and handed over to the Owner as part of the Operations and Maintenance manuals.

.4 Any subsequent changes found by the Consultant shall remain the responsibility of the

Contractor at no charge to the Owner. 1.16 TEMPORARY AND TRAIL USAGE

.1 After any part of the work has been completed, the Consultant will make an inspection, and performance tests of such parts shall be carried out under the direction of the Consultant. If deficiencies are found, they shall be immediately rectified to the satisfaction of the Consultant. After such deficiencies have been rectified, the work shall be placed in service



at such time and in such order as the Consultant may direct. If, in placing a portion of the equipment in service, it is necessary to make temporary connections in the wiring in order to obtain proper operation, such connections shall be provided to the extent and in the manner required by the Consultant.

.2 Temporary or trial usage of any mechanical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment or

materials shall not be construed as evidence of the acceptance of same.

.3 No claims for damage will be considered for injury to, or the breaking of any parts of such work which may be used.

1.17 CONSULTANT’S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 During construction the Consultant will issue such instructions as may be necessary for verification and corrections of the work. These instructions shall be binding as part of the specification.

1.18 ADDITIONAL WORK AND CHANGES

.1 Unless a written order, reviewed by the Consultant and countersigned or otherwise approved by the Owner Representative, no additional work shall be undertaken by the Contractor.

1.19 WARRANTY

.1 The Mechanical Contractor shall guarantee all work and apparatus installed under his contract against all defects of workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year after the Substantial Performance of the Work, unless otherwise mentioned in the Specifications, and shall make good any and all defects developing during such time without expense to the Owner. Any materials shall be further guaranteed as may be called for in these specifications. Where warranties on equipment extend beyond one (1) year the Mechanical Contractor shall honor the extended warranty.

1.20 SCHEDULING OF WORK

.1 For all work to be performed under this contract, adhere to Construction Schedule agreed upon with the Owner Representative.

1.21 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION

.1 Permit equipment maintenance and disassembly by use of unions or flanges to minimize disturbance to connecting piping and duct systems and without interference from building structure or other equipment.

.2 Provide accessible means for lubricating equipment including permanent lubricated

bearings.



.3 For all base mounted boilers, pumps, compressors, air handling units, fans and other rotating equipment, provide chamfered edge housekeeping pads a minimum of 4" high and 4" larger than equipment dimensions all around. Work shall be performed by the trades specializing in this work.

.4 Pipe drain lines, overflows and safety relief vents to drains. If the horizontal drains present

a tripping hazard, use aluminum checkered plate covers.

.5 Line-up equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items with building walls wherever possible.

1.22 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS

.1 Provide equipment with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might be encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and braking of load.

1.23 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

.1 General

1. Pipe Supports: Comply with MSS SP 58. Type Numbers specified refer to this standard. For selection and application comply with MSS SP 69.

.2 Attachment to Concrete Building Construction

1. Concrete insert: MSS SP-58, Type 18.

2. Self-drilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Permitted in

concrete not less than 102 mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Consultant for each job condition.

3. Power driven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than 102

mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Resident Engineer for each job condition.

.3 Attachment to Steel Building Construction

1. Welded attachment: MSS SP 58, Type 22.

2. Beam clamps: MSS SP-58, Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 C clamp may be used for

individual copper tubing up to 23mm (7/8 inch) outside diameter. .4 Attachment to Metal Pan or Deck

1. As required for materials specified Steel Decking section of the specification.



.5 Attachment to Wood Construction

1. Wood screws or lag bolts.

.6 Hanger Rods

1. Hot rolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS SP 58. For piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or 15 turn buckles shall provide 38 mm (1 1/2 inches) minimum of adjustment and incorporate locknuts. All thread rods are acceptable.

.7 Hangers Supporting Multiple Pipes (Trapeze Hangers)

1. Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal member, not less than 41 mm

by 41 mm (1 5/8 inches by 1 5/8 inches), 2.7 mm (No. 12 gage), designed to accept special spring held, hardened steel nuts. Not permitted for steam supply and condensate piping.

2. Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating less 91kg (200 pounds).

3. Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with 6

mm (1/4 inch) U bolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield, secured by two 13mm (1/2 inch) galvanized steel bands, or preinsulated calcium silicate shield for insulated piping at each hanger.

.8 Supports for Piping Systems

1. Select hangers sized to encircle insulation on insulated piping. To protect insulation,

provide Type 39 saddles for roller type supports or preinsulated calcium silicate shields. Provide Type 40 insulation shield or preinsulated calcium silicate shield at all other types of supports and hangers including those for preinsulated piping.

.9 Piping Systems (MSS SP 58)

1. Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut. 2. Riser clamps: Type 8. 3. Wall brackets: Types 31, 32 or 33. 4. Roller supports: Type 41, 43, 44 and 46. 5. Saddle support: Type 36, 37 or 38. 6. Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15. Preinsulate. 7. U bolt clamp: Type 24. 8. Copper Tube:

a. Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with tubing shall be

painted with copper colored epoxy paint, plastic coated or taped with non-adhesive isolation tape to prevent electrolysis.



b. For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.

c. For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe straps for copper tube or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.

9. Insulated Lines:

a. Provide pre-insulated calcium silicate shields sized for copper tube.

10. Supports for plastic or glass piping: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer with

black rubber tape extending one inch beyond steel support or clamp.

.10 Piping with Vertical Expansion and Contraction

1. Movement up to 20 mm (3/4 inch): Type 51 or 52 variable spring unit with integral turn buckle and load indicator.

2. Movement more than 20 mm (3/4 inch): Type 54 or 55 constant support unit with

integral adjusting nut, turn buckle and travel position indicator. .11 Heat Exchanger and Expansion Tank Hangers

1. May be Type 1 sized for the shell diameter. Insulation where required will cover the

hangers. 1.24 PIPE PENETRATIONS

.1 Install sleeves during construction for other than blocked out floor openings for risers in mechanical bays.

.2 To prevent accidental liquid spills from passing to a lower level, provide the following:

1. For sleeves: Extend sleeve 25 mm (one inch) above finished floor and provide sealant

for watertight joint.

2. For blocked out floor openings: Provide 40 mm (1 1/2 inch) angle set in silicone adhesive around opening.

3. For drilled penetrations: Provide 40 mm (1 1/2 inch) angle ring or square set in silicone

adhesive around penetration. .3 Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete beam

flanges. Any deviation from these requirements must receive prior approval of Consultant.

.4 Sheet Metal: Provide for pipe passing through floors, interior walls, and partitions, unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are specifically called for below.



.5 Cast Iron or Zinc Coated Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through exterior walls below grade. Make space between sleeve and pipe watertight with a modular or link rubber seal. Seal shall be applied at both ends of sleeve.

.6 Galvanized Steel or an alternate Black Iron Pipe with asphalt coating Sleeves: Provide for

pipe passing through concrete beam flanges, except where brass pipe sleeves are called for. Provide sleeve for pipe passing through floor of mechanical rooms. Except in mechanical rooms, connect sleeve with floor plate.

.7 Brass Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through quarry tile, terrazzo or ceramic tile

floors. Connect sleeve with floor plate.

.8 Sleeves are not required for wall hydrants for fire department connections or in drywall construction.

.9 Sleeve Clearance: Sleeve through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be one

inch greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with insulation shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation. Interior openings shall be caulked tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases.

1.25 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

.1 Furnish, and turn over to the Owner, special tools not readily available commercially, that are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished.

.2 Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease

required for each motor or other equipment.

.3 Tool Containers: Hardwood or metal, permanently identified for intended service and mounted, or located, where directed by the Owner.

.4 Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (one quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (one pound) of grease, of

equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers and properly identified as to use for each different application.

1.26 WALL, FLOOR, AND CEILING PLATES

.1 Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes and cover the entire pipe sleeve projection.

.2 Thickness: Not less than 2.4 mm (3/32 inch) for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates,

not less than 0.64 mm (0.025-inch) for up to 80 mm (3 inch pipe), 0.89 mm (0.035-inch) for larger pipe.



.3 Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, in finished areas only. Use also where insulation ends on exposed water supply pipe drop from overhead. Provide a watertight joint in spaces where brass or steel pipe sleeves are specified.

1.27 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

.1 Grade the bottom of the pipe trench excavation as required.

.2 In firm, undisturbed soil, lay pipes directly on the soil, and shape soil to fit the lower one-third segment of all pipes and pipe bells. Ensure even bearing along the barrels. Backfill excess excavation with 25 mPa concrete.

.3 Where rock or shale is encountered, arrange to have this excavated and removed. After

excavation, backfill with a bedding of 10 mm crushed stone.

.4 Prepare new bedding under the pipe in unstable soil, in fill, and in all cases where pipe bedding has been removed in earlier excavation, particularly near perimeter walls of buildings, at manholes and catch basins. Compact to maximum possible density and support the pipe by 200 mm (8 inches) thick firm supports. Install reinforcing steel in cradle or construct piers every eight feet or closer, down to solid load bearing strata. Provide a minimum of one pier per length of pipe. Use same method where pipes cross.

.5 Where excavation is necessary in proximity to and below the level of any footing, backfill

with 25 mPa concrete to the level of the highest adjacent footing. Proximity is determined by the angle of repose as established by the Consultant.

.6 Provide support over at least the bottom one third segment of the pipe in all bedding

methods.

.7 Do not open trench ahead of pipe laying and backfilling more than weather will permit. Keep walls of trenches straight to at least 450 mm (18") above the top of the pipe to keep the diameter load within the pipe design limits. Have excavations inspected at least once a week by authorities.

.8 Before backfilling, obtain approval. Remove all shoring during backfill.

.9 Backfill trenches within building, with clean sharp sand or gravel in individual layers of

maximum 150 mm (6") thickness, compacted to a density of 100% Standard Proctor. Hand compact the first layers up to a compacted level of minimum 300 mm (12") above the top of pipe. Hand or machine compact the balance up to grade, using approved equipment.

.10 Backfill trenches outside buildings, not under roads, parking lots, or traffic areas, up to a

compacted level of 450 mm (18") above the pipes with individual layers of material 150 mm (6") thick, hand compacted to a density of 95% Standard Proctor, using approved 10 mm (3/8") crushed stone. Backfill the balance with 150 mm (6") layers of approved excavated material, compacted to 95% Standard Proctor, using approved equipment.



.11 Backfill all other trenches outside buildings with 150 mm (3/8") crushed stone in layers not exceeding 6" thickness, compacted to 100% Standard Proctor density up to grade level. Manual compaction up to 450 mm (18") above the pipe with approved equipment for the balance.

.12 Fill all depressions to a correct grade level with appropriate material. After a period has

passed adequate to reveal any settlement, use maximum possible compaction. Pay all costs required to make good all damages caused by settlement.

.13 Dispose of excavated materials in accordance with the requirements of the Authorities

having Jurisdiction. 1.28 TESTS

.1 Do not insulate or conceal work until tested and approved. Follow construction schedule and arrange for tests.

.2 Conduct tests in presence of Consultant.

.3 Bear costs including retesting and making good.

.4 Pipe pressure:

1. Hydraulically test piping systems at 1.5 times system operating pressure or minimum

125 psi, whichever is greater.

2. Maintain test pressures without loss for 4 hours unless otherwise specified.

3. Test natural gas systems to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and as per Ontario Gas Utilization Code O.Reg. 452/89.

4. Test drainage, waste and vent piping to code.

.5 Prior to tests, isolate all equipment or other parts which are not designed to withstand test

pressures. 1.29 PAINTING

.1 Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to supports, and equipment fabricated from ferrous metals.

.2 Touch-up paint all damaged equipment with products matching original finish in quality

and appearance.

.3 Paint the entire gas line where with two coats of yellow paint.



1.30 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS

.1 Furnish spare parts as follows:

1. One set of packing for each pump. 2. One glass for each gauge glass installed. 3. One set of v-belts/bolts for each piece of machinery. 4. One spare set of filters for each filter bank installed.

.2 Upon completion of project and immediately before hand-over, replace all filters.

1.31 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS

.1 Provide wherever pipes of dissimilar metals are joined.

.2 Provide insulating unions for pipe sizes larger than 2" diameter and under; same for flanges of pipe sizes over 2" diameter.

.3 Cast brass adapters may be used on domestic water systems and where approved by the

Consultant.

.4 Provide rubber gaskets to prevent dissimilar metals contact. 1.32 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATING STAFF

.1 Supply certified personnel to instruct Owner operating staff on operation of new mechanical equipment. Supply maintenance specialist personnel to instruct operating staff on maintenance and adjustment of mechanical equipment and any changes or modification in equipment made under terms of guarantee.

.2 Provide minimum 6 hrs of instruction time during regular work hours prior to acceptance

and turn-over to operating staff for regular operation.

.3 Use operation and maintenance data manual for instruction purposes. On completion of instruction, turn manuals over to the Consultant.

.4 Scheduling of the timing for the training of the operating staff shall be arranged 10 days

prior to the completion of the project.

.5 For training on controls, refer to Section 15900. 1.33 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

.1 Provide minimum of three (3) copies of Mechanical Maintenance Manuals, in accordance to the following:

1. Mechanical Maintenance Manuals to be delivered to the Consultant’s office 10 days

prior to the substantial completion of the Contract.



.2 Manuals to be bound in a hard cover neatly labeled: "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS".

.3 The Maintenance Manuals shall be divided into sections with neatly labeled and tabbed

dividers between each section. The sections to be included in the manual are:

1. Section I - General 2. Section II - Piping and Pump Systems, Plumbing Fixtures and Accessories 3. Section III - Boilers, Heat Exchangers, Pool Filters and Accessories 4. Section IV - Automatic Controls 5. Section V - Air and Water Balancing

.4 The following information shall be contained within the sections:

1. SECTION I: A list giving name, address and telephone number of the Consultant,

Engineers, General Contractor, Mechanical Trade and Controls Trade. Written guarantees for the Mechanical Systems. A copy of the Valve directory giving number, valve location, normal valve position, and purpose of valve (a framed copy of Valve Directory to be hung in Boiler Room). Equipment lists and certificates shall be provided - certificates shall be signed and sealed by the appropriate suppliers.

2. SECTION II, III: A copy of all pressure tests and operational tests. A copy of Gas

Operational Tests for gas fired equipment. A list giving name, address and telephone number of all suppliers. Details of chemical treatment equipment and substances. A copy of all reviewed Shop Drawings for all mechanical equipment and ancillary devices (valves, expansion tanks, pumps, strainers, plumbing, etc.). Copies of warranties.

3. SECTION IV: Complete Control Diagrams, Wiring Diagrams and description of

Control system and the functioning sequence of the system. Also refer to section 15900.

4. SECTION V: For balancing reports and formats, refer to section 15015 of these

specifications.

1.34 CONCRETE

.1 All concrete work required to complete this project, whether shown on the drawings or not, shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

.2 Refer to this specification section for requirements for housekeeping pad.

1.35 METALS

.1 All steel construction required for the completion of this project, whether shown on the drawings or not, shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.



1.36 CUTTING, PATCHING, ROOFING, AND X-RAY

.1 All cutting, patching, roofing and X-Rays required for the completion of this project whether shown on the drawings or not, shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. The cutting and patching work shall be performed in accordance with the following:

1. All cutting and patching shall be done by the trades specializing in the materials to be

cut.

2. All flashing and equipment supports on the roof shall be done in strict accordance with the Owner standards by Owner-approved roofing contractors only.

.2 Should any cutting, roofing and/or repairing of finished surfaces be required, the Sub-trade

contractor for the Contractor shall employ the particular trades engaged on the site for this type of work to do such cutting and/or repairing. Obtain the approval of the Consultant before doing any cutting. In the event that tradesmen required for particular cutting and/or repairing are not already on the site, bring to the site tradesmen to do this work.

.3 Supporting members of any floor, wall or the building structure shall be cut only in such a

location and manner as approved by the Consultant.

.4 Where slabs in the portions of the building which are existing must be saw-cut or core drilled, all locations shall be x-rayed prior to saw-cutting or core-drilling. All x-raying shall be done by personnel qualified in the use of the type of equipment required to x-ray the saw-cuts shall be permitted to perform this work on the site. No allowance will be made later for expenses incurred through the failure of performing these x-rays.

1.37 MECHANICAL PROJECT COMPLETION

.1 Ten (10) days prior to substantial performance of work obtain documentation and/or prepare certification of the following items and submit them to the Owner's representative:

1. All inspection certificates including drainage, Plumbing, and refrigeration. 2. Guarantee certificates as called for under "Warranty". 3. Record drawings. 4. Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 5. Test certifications as called for under "Testing". 6. Provide a signed statement to the effect that all tests for mechanical systems and

equipment have been completely carried out in the Trade Sections of these Specifications and to the manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.

1.38 PERFORMANCE TESTS AND EQUIPMENT START-UP

.1 After all equipment has been installed, adjusted, balanced and started up, subject equipment to a series of performance tests, as soon as conditions permit.



.2 The timing of the tests shall be arranged to suit the convenience of the Consultant, and the manner and duration shall be as the Consultant deems necessary. Record the daily start and stop times, operating hours and functions performed. Ensure that the performance tests are witnessed by the Consultant.

.3 All major equipment including but not limited to boilers, pumps, sand filters are to be

inspected by the manufacturer to ensure that the equipment has been installed in accordance with their recommendations.

.4 Operate equipment under varying load conditions, demonstrate start-up sequence, normal

shutdown, simulated emergency shutdown, operation of temperature, etc., and safety controls. Operate switches and electrical devices for correct wiring sequences. Adjust components to achieve a proper functional relationship among all the components of all the systems. Repeat these functions as many times as deemed necessary by the Consultant to achieve reliable operation.

.5 Repair defects and repeat tests as necessary. During test maintain lubrication schedule, set,

align and tension drives.

.6 At the successful completion of Performance Tests and all testing and balancing, make the systems ready for final inspection and subsequent acceptance of the Owner. Replace and clean filters, flush out lines and equipment, remove and clean strainers, fill liquid systems and purge air. Provide water treatment to pipes and report in accordance to Section 15602. Disinfect all domestic water as required by current by-laws and Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

.7 Conduct tests to demonstrate operation and ability to meet requirements of all equipment

and freedom from undue noise and vibration at the time of final inspection, having ensured that it has previously been subjected to Performance Tests.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 15015-1 BARRIER FREE UPGRADES 490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.


PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

.1 Testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of heating and ventilating systems. TAB includes the following:

1. Systems Inspection Report.

2. Duct Air Leakage Test Report.

3. Balancing air and water distribution systems; adjustment of total system to provide

design performance.

4. Recording and reporting results.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 TAB: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing; the process of checking and adjusting HVAC systems to meet design objectives.

.2 AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

.3 Hydronic Systems: Includes heating hot water, domestic hot water recirculation, chilled

water, condenser water, and glycol water systems, as applicable to the project.

.3 Air Handling Systems: Includes all central and distributed air handling equipment that provide outside air, supply air, return air, exhaust air, and relief air to and from the building, as applicable to the project.

.4 Air distribution systems: Includes all grilles, diffusers, terminal units (bypass/VAV).

.5 Flow rate tolerance: The allowable percentage variation, minus to plus, of actual flow rate

from values (design) in the contract documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Qualifications:

1. TAB Agency: The TAB agency shall be a subcontractor of the General Contractor and shall report to and be paid by the General Contractor.

2. The TAB agency shall be either a certified member of AABC to perform TAB service

for HVAC and water balancing equipment. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the agency loses subject certification during this period, the General Contractor shall immediately notify the Consultant and the Owner and submit another TAB firm for approval.



3. TAB Specialist: The TAB specialist shall be either a member of AABC or an experienced technician of the Agency.

.2 TAB Agency shall be identified by the General Contractor within 60 days after the award

of the contract.

.3 The TAB specialist will be coordinating, scheduling and reporting all TAB work and related activities and will provide necessary information as required by the Consultant. The responsibilities would specifically include:

1. Shall directly supervise all TAB work.

2. Shall sign the TAB reports that bear the seal of the TAB Agency. The reports shall be

accompanied by report forms and schematic drawings required by the TAB standard, AABC.

3. Would follow all TAB work through its satisfactory completion.

4. Shall provide final markings of settings of all HVAC adjustment devices.

5. Permanently mark location of duct test ports.

.4 Test Equipment Criteria: The instrumentation shall meet the accuracy/calibration

requirements established by AABC National Standards and or by the instrument manufacturer.

.5 Tab Criteria:

(a) Air Filter resistance during tests, artificially imposed if necessary, shall be at least 90

percent of final values for pre-filters and after-filters.

(b) Flow rate tolerance:

a. Air handling unit and all other fans, cubic meters/min (cubic feet per minute): Minus 5% to plus l0%.

b. Grilles, diffusers and air terminal units (maximum values): -5% to +l0%. c. Exhaust hoods/cabinets: 0 % to + l0 %. d. Minimum outside air: 0 % to +10 %. e. Individual room air outlets and inlets, and air flow rates not mentioned above: -

5 % to +l0 % except if the air to a space is 100 CFM or less the tolerance would be 0 to plus 5 %.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit the following for review to the Consultant:

1. Systems inspection report on equipment and installation for conformance with design.



2. Duct Air Leakage Test Report.

3. Final TAB reports covering flow balance and adjustments, performance tests.

4. Include in final reports uncorrected installation deficiencies noted during TAB and applicable explanatory comments on test results that differ from design requirements.

1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

.1 The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. In text the publications are referenced to by the acronym of the organization.

.2 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

(ASHRAE): HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

.3 Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.

.4 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): HVAC

Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUGS

.1 Provide plastic plugs to seal holes drilled in ductwork for test purposes. 2.2 INSULATION REPAIR MATERIAL

.1 Coordinate with the mechanical Contractor the TAB activity such that it does take place before the insulation is installed on ductwork and piping.

.2 In the absence of such coordination, the mechanical contractor shall be responsible for the

repair to the ductwork and or piping insulation removed for TAB purposes, including the integrity of the vapor barrier material and the insulation jacket.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

.1 Obtain applicable contract documents and copies of approved submittals for HVAC equipment and automatic control systems.

3.2 SYSTEMS INSPECTION REPORT

.1 Inspect equipment and installation for conformance with design.



.2 The inspection and report is to be done after air distribution equipment is on site and duct installation has begun, but well in advance of performance testing and balancing work. The purpose of the inspection is to identify and report deviations from design and ensure that systems will be ready for TAB at the appropriate time.

.3 Verify that all items such as ductwork piping, ports, terminals, connectors, etc., that is

required for TAB is installed. Provide a report to the Consultant.

.4 Reports: Follow check list format developed by AABC or SMACNA, supplemented by narrative comments, with emphasis on air handling units and fans. Check for conformance with submittals. Verify that diffuser and register sizes are correct. Check air terminal unit installation including their duct sizes and routing.

3.3 TAB REPORT

.1 Format to be in accordance with referenced standard listed above, but using design drawing units.

.2 Produce "as-built" full system schematics. Use as-built drawings for reference.

.3 Submit 1 copy of preliminary TAB reports, each in “D" ring binders, complete with index

tabs for verification and approval of Consultant.

.4 Submit copies of final TAB reports after approval by the Consultant, to be incorporated into the Maintenance and Operations Manual, as indicated in section 15010.

3.4 PROCEDURES

.1 Tab shall be performed in accordance with the requirement of the Standard under which TAB agency is certified.

.2 Start final TAB only when building is essentially completed, including:

1. Installation of ceilings, doors, windows and other construction affecting TAB.

2. Application of sealing, caulking and weather-stripping.

3. Normal operation of mechanical systems affecting TAB.

.3 General: During TAB all related system components shall be in full operation. Fan and

pump rotation, motor loads and equipment vibration shall be checked and corrected as necessary before proceeding with TAB. Set controls and/or block off parts of distribution systems to simulate design operation of variable volume air or water systems for test and balance work.



3.5 AIR BALANCE AND EQUIPMENT TEST

.1 Include all air handling units, fans, terminal units, fan coil units, room diffusers/outlets/inlets, as applicable to this project.

.2 Adjust fan speeds to provide design air flow.

.3 Test and balance systems in all specified modes of operation, including variable volume,

economizer, and fire emergency modes. Verify that dampers and other controls function properly.

.4 Parameters to be measured:

1. Air flow. 2. Air velocity. 3. Static pressure. 4. Velocity pressure. 5. Temperature.

a. Wet bulb. b. Dry bulb.

6. Cross-sectional area. 7. Fan’s RPM. 8. Electrical power.

a. Voltage. b. Current draw.

.5 Locations of measurements:

1. Inlet and outlet of each:

a. Fan. b. Coil. c. Filter. d. Balancing damper. e. Other auxiliary equipment.

2. Main ducts. 3. Main branch ducts. 4. Sub-branch ducts. 5. Each supply, exhaust, and return air inlet and outlet. 6. Before and after the silencers.

3.6 WATER BALANCE AND EQUIPMENT TEST:

.1 Include all circulating pumps, heat exchangers, boilers, coils, as applicable to this project.

.2 Adjust flow rates for equipment to the values indicated on the drawings and schedules. Set balancing valves and circuit setters to the values on indicated on the equipment schedules



.3 Record final measurements for hydronic equipment on performance data sheets. Include entering and leaving water temperatures for heating and cooling coils, and for heat exchangers. Include entering and leaving air temperatures (DB/WB for cooling coils) for air handling units and reheat coils. Make air and water temperature measurements at the same time.

.4 Parameters to be measured

.1 Water/Glycol Flow (as applicable to the project) .2 Pressure. .3 Temperature. .4 Specific gravity. .5 Pumps RPM .6 Electrical power:

.1 Voltage

.2 Current draw.

.5 Locations of Measurements

.1 Inlet and outlet of each .1 Balancing valve. .2 Automatic control valves

3.7 VERIFICATION

.1 Reported measurements shall be subject to verification by Consultant. Provide instrumentation and manpower to verify results of up to 30 % of all reported measurements. Number and location of verified measurements to be at discretion of Consultant.

.2 Bear costs to repeat TAB, as required, to satisfaction of Consultant.

3.8 MARKING OF SETTINGS

.1 Following approval of TAB final Report, the setting of all HVAC adjustment devices including balancing valves, splitters and dampers shall be permanently marked by the TAB Specialist so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Style and colors used for markings shall be coordinated with the Consultant.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION OF TEST PORTS

.1 The TAB Specialist shall permanently and legibly identify the location points of duct test ports. If the ductwork has exterior insulation, the identification shall be made on the exterior side of the insulation. All penetrations through ductwork and ductwork insulation shall be sealed to prevent air leaks and maintain integrity of vapor barrier.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 15060-1 BARRIER FREE UPGRADES 490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.



.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.

.2 Conform to Section 15010, Mechanical General Requirements, as applicable. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Conform to Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements.

.2 Installation of inserts, sleeves and anchors supplied by this Section: Section 04200, Masonry.

1.3 REFERENCES

ANSI B31.1 to B31.9 (inclusive) Piping CAN/CGSB-1.40-97 Primer, Structural Steel, Oil Alkyd Type CSA B51-03 Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code CSA B52-99 Mechanical Refrigeration Code CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21-98 General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural

Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel CAN/CSA-S16-01 Limit States Design of Steel Structures CSA W47.1-92(R2001) Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel

Structures CAN/CSA W48-01 Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding. CSA W59-M1989 (R2001) Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) CAN/CSA W117.2-01 Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Shop Drawings: Prepare and submit shop drawings for equipment covered by this Section including upper, middle and pipe attachments, riser clamps, shields and saddles, and sway braces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Welding Studs:

• Graham • Omark • Nelson

.2 Concrete Inserts and Anchors:



• Readhead by ITW • SSS by Star • Parabolt by USM • Kwik-Bolt by Hilti

.3 Beam Clamps:

• Grinnell • Myatt • Hilti

.4 Concrete Grout:

• Sikagrout 212 by Sika Canada Inc. • Embeco 636 Grout by Master Builders • Sealtight V-3 Grout by W.R. Meadows

.5 Pipe Hangers:

• Grinnell • Myatt • Hilti

.6 Zinc-Rich Paint:

• Galvafroid by W.R. Meadows

.7 Primer:

• CAN/CGSB-1.40-M

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Attachment to Building Construction

1. Use welding studs of size not larger than 10 mm (3/8") for attaching miscellaneous materials and equipment to building steel. If weight of materials or equipment require bolts or studs larger than 10 mm (3/8") diameter use steel clips or brackets, secured to building steel by welding or bolting method of attachment as approved by Consultant.

2. Use self-drilling expansion type concrete inserts for securing miscellaneous equipment

and materials to masonry or concrete construction already in place, of sufficient number and size to prevent concrete from breaking away. Use of powder or power



actuated fasteners will not be allowed unless prior written approval is obtained from Consultant.

3. Support rods for any suspended item must not be attached to or extended through steel

pan type roofs or through concrete slab roofs.

4. Provide beam clamps of 2-bolt design and of such type that rod load is transmitted only concentrically to beam web centreline. Use of "C" and "I" beam side clamps and other similar items will not be allowed without written consent of Consultant.

5. Where roof or floor framing consists of open web or long span steel joists, ensure that

hangers are located at or within 150 mm (6") of joist top or bottom chord panel points, otherwise provide additional structural steel as required where hanger spacing does not coincide with joist spacing. Design suspension assembly such that hanger load is transmitted only concentrically to supporting joist. Do not use "C" and "I" beam side clamps, brackets and other similar, without written consent of Consultant.

6. Locate secondary structural steel members between joists at or within 150 mm (6") of

top or bottom chord panel points. Where secondary structural steel member cannot be located at or near joist panel point, provide additional diagonal structural steel web member(s) designed for applicable load to nearest panel point in opposite chord member. This condition may be waived if load to be suspended between panel points is not in excess of 45 kg (100 lbs). Diagonal hangers which will induce lateral stresses in chord member of joist will not be permitted. Submit shop drawings of suspension assembly indicating location of suspension or support points, max load at each suspension point, location and size of hangers, brackets and intermediate framing members when required, and also details of connection to building structure.

3.2 PIPING CONSTRUCTION METHODS

.1 Unless specified otherwise herein, construct and install piping in accordance with ANSI Sections B31.1 to B31.9 as applicable to service, except that soldered joints will not be permitted in compressed air piping.

.2 To avoid unnecessary cutting of masonry, provide inserts, sleeves and anchors to other

trades for building in as Work proceeds. Arrange with other trades to leave openings, slots and chases to accommodate later installation of mechanical work.

3.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

.1 General

1. Support or suspend piping with necessary hangers, structural supports and/or brackets as indicated on Drawings and/or as required, to prevent sagging, warping and vibration and to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Place hangers and supports close to fittings, valves and/or other heavy parts.



2. Do not allow loads of any nature to be transmitted through piping connections to equipment not specifically designed for such loads. Where flexible connections are not called for at connections to equipment, support pipe by stands attached to both pipe and supporting structure so that force in any direction is not transmitted to equipment.

3. Provide suitably dampened spring hangers for first 3 supports from equipment

connection on piping subject to excessive movement or shock from any source, thermal expansion and contraction, selected in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Where it is evident that no undue loads will be transmitted to equipment by system concerned, i.e. small bore connections to comparatively large equipment, cold service piping not subject to shock, etc., then spring hangers may be omitted and standard hangers used.

4. Use trapeze type hangers where pipes are grouped together, unless specifically

indicated otherwise on Drawings. Suspend horizontal member by adjustable rods with locking feature for maintaining level and slope. Space trapeze type hangers based on closest interval required by any pipe supported thereon. Provide any auxiliary steel required to support trapeze between building steel.

5. Do not hang any pipe from another pipe unless specifically indicated on Drawings.

.2 Saddles and Roller Supports

1. Provide saddles at roller supports for piping carrying liquids at 10.5°C (51°F) or

higher. Weld saddles to black or galvanized steel piping. Refinish galvanized surfaces destroyed by welding with zinc rich paint.

.3 Hangers

1. For insulated piping up to NPS 4 carrying liquids at temperatures 10.5°C (51°F) and

higher, use standard weight clevis hangers with level adjustment and locknut.

2. For insulated lines of NPS 4 diameter and larger carrying liquids at temperatures 10.5°C (51°F) or higher, use adjustable roller type hangers with locknuts, and rollers of sufficient width to clear outside diameter of insulation on piping. Support rollers at both ends, either by yoke, swivel type hanger or by 2 adjustable rods with locknuts.

3. For insulated piping carrying liquids at temperature of 10°C (50°F) or less, use

elongated clevis type hangers, with clevis of sufficient width to fit over insulation bearing plate.

4. Provide insulation protection bearing plates at hangers and supports for piping carrying

liquids at temperature of 10°C (50°F) or less. Install temporary spacers between plate and pipe equal to thickness of insulation specified. (Refer to Section 15081, Piping Insulation).

5. Bearing plates may be either shop fabricated, or manufactured plates of size required to

properly fit outside diameter of pipe insulation.



6. Fabricate bearing plates conforming to following table for various pipe sizes: Length of Thickness of:

Pipe Size (NPS) Plate - mm (in) Plate - mm (ga) 1/2 thr. 1-1/2 130 (5) 1.2 (18)

2 150 (6) 0.52 (16) 2-1/2 200 (8) 1.52 (16)

3 230 (9) 1.52 (16) 4 and up 250 (10) 1.52 (16)

7. Form bearing plates to outside diameter of adjoining pipe insulation and extend plate

up to horizontal centre line of pipe.

8. For non-insulated piping use clevis type of wrought steel construction with adjustable rod, level locking feature and backnuts.

9. For copper tubing provide copper coated hangers. Regulations of some municipalities

require that copper tubing be taped with plastic tape at hanger location, or hanger be provided with plastic insert. Meet these requirements when required, in which case copper coating may be omitted on hanger.

10. Attach hanger rods to building structure by means of malleable iron beam clamps,

concrete inserts, and/or approved anchors as hereinbefore specified. .4 Hanger Spacing

1. For horizontal runs of plumbing and drainage piping comply with hanger spacing

requirements of OBC.

2. For horizontal runs of black or galvanized steel pipe, other than for plumbing service, do not exceed max distances between supports and with minimum diameter rods as follows:

Pipe Size (NPS) Distance - m (ft) Diameter of Rod - mm (in)

Up thru 1-1/4 1.8 (6) 10 (3/8) 1-1/2 1.8 (6) 10 (3/8)

2 3.05 (10) 10 (3/8) 2-1/2 & 3 3.66 (12) 12 (1/2)

4 4.27 (14) 16 (5/8) 6 5.18 (17) 19 (3/4) 8 5.79 (19) 22 (7/8)

10 & 12 6.71 (22) 22 (7/8)

3. Provide additional hangers in locations where there are concentrated loads such as valves, specialties and other such items.

4. For horizontal runs of copper tubing for services other than plumbing, do not exceed

1.8 m (6 ft) between hangers for lines up to and including NPS 3/4 and 2.4 m (8 ft) for lines of NPS 1 and larger.



5. For horizontal runs of piping fabricated of PVC, use hanger spacing as recommended

by the manufacturer.

.5 Vertical Piping Supports

1. Support vertical plumbing and drainage piping as required by OBC, unless more stringent requirements are specified herein.

2. Support cast iron soil pipe at every floor and other piping at every other floor unless

otherwise required by expansion conditions or otherwise specified.

3. Support bottom of riser with base fitting set on concrete pier or by hanger located at top of riser pipe as close to riser as possible.

4. For supports at intermediate floors, use Grinnell Fig. 261 or approved equal steel

extension pipe clamp, bolted securely to pipe. Rest ends of clamp on pipe sleeve or on floor.

5. Provide lateral stability of vertical piping by fabricated brackets or malleable iron,

extension type split hangers. Run vertical piping at columns in column webs, on either or both sides of column, unless otherwise directed.

.6 Anchors and Guides

1. Supply and install anchors where indicated on Drawings and/or as required to maintain

permanent location of pipe lines. Construct anchors for steel or galvanized pipe of approved steel straps and/or rods and for anchoring copper lines use copper plated anchors or provide insulation bands between tubing and clamps if steel straps or rods are used. Install anchors and guides in approved manner.

2. Acceptable Materials: Grinnell #256 or Myatt.

3.4 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL

.1 General

1. Supply and install miscellaneous structural supports, platforms and braces as may be required to hang or support piping unless Drawings or other Sections of Specifications state otherwise.

2. Submit detailed shop drawings to structural engineer for review before commencing

fabrication. .2 Materials and Fabrication

1. Conform to CAN/CSA-S16 for materials, design of details, and execution of work.



2. Conform to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, grade 300W for structural shapes, plates, and

other similar items.

3. Use welded construction wherever practicable, with bolted joints allowed for field assembly using high strength steel bolts. Chip welds to remove slag, and grind smooth.

4. Conform to the latest issue of the following CSA Specifications:

a. CSA W47.1, for qualification of welders b. CSA W48.1-M, for electrodes (only coated rods allowed) c. CSA W59-M, for design of connections and workmanship d. CSA W117.2, for safety

.3 Painting & Cleaning

1. Touch up minor damage to finish on equipment with standard factory applied baked

enamel finish. If, in Consultant's opinion, damage is too extensive to be remedied by touch up, replace damaged equipment.

2. Clean steel by scraping, wire brushing or other effective means to remove base scale, rust, oil, dirt or other foreign matter.

3. Apply one coat of zinc chromate iron oxide primer, conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.40-M

to miscellaneous steel.

4. In field, touch up bolt heads and nuts, previously unpainted connections and surfaces damaged during erection with primer as herein before specified.

5. Give two coats of primer to surfaces which will be inaccessible after erection.

6. Remove foreign matter from steelwork on completion of installation.

7. With exception of prime painting of miscellaneous steel or any other specific

requirements as specified above or under respective Sections of Division 15, or equipment otherwise factory painted, painting will be provided under Division 9, Finishes.

3.5 CONCRETE INSERTS

.1 Install inserts required for attachment of hangers, either for suspension of piping or equipment.

.2 For masonry or poured concrete construction use expansion type units. Insert into concrete

after concrete has cured. Anchors or inserts installed by explosive means shall not be used.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. ACCESS DOORS YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 15075-1 BARRIER FREE UPGRADES 490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.



.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010 – Mechanical General Requirements.

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010 – Mechanical General Requirements.

.2 Submit for approval, manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation and

fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

.1 Supply access doors to the relevant building trade to provide access in furred ceilings for the following:

1. Servicing equipment. 2. Access to plumbing cleanouts. 3. Access to shut-off valves. 4. Inspection of life safety equipment. 5. Service of operating devices. 6. All locations where periodic maintenance is required.

.2 Access door sizes shall be as follows:

1. Body Entry: 24” x 24” (600 x 600 mm) 2. For Hand Entry: 18” x 18” (450 x 450 mm) 3. For Viewing Only: 12” x 12” (300 x 300 mm)

.3 All doors shall open 180 degrees and have rounded safety corners.

.4 For fire rated ceilings or wall provide a fire rated access door that will match the fire rating

of the wall that the access door is installed in. The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing the drawings and providing fire rated access doors where they are required.

.5 Where body access is possible the access doors shall be provided with a releasing

mechanism on both sides of the door.

.6 Refer to Section 08310 of the specification.



2.2 RECESSED ACCESS DOOR FOR DRYWALL APPLICATIONS

.1 Door shall be 16 gauge steel. Mounting frame shall be 14 gauge galvanized steel.

.2 Door shall be provided with a 25 mm (1”) recess or 14 mm (5/8”) to suit the thickness of the drywall ceiling.

.3 The frame shall be provided with a galvanized steel drywall taping bead on all sides.

.4 The hinge shall be a concealed pivoting rod.

.5 The latch shall be a flush to the surface, screwdriver operated cam latch.

.6 The steel finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate preparation with prime coat of grey baked

enamel.

.7 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor DW-5015, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers. 2.3 RECESSED ACCESS DOOR FOR PLASTER APPLICATIONS

.1 Door shall be 16 gauge steel. Mounting frame shall be 14 gauge galvanized steel.

.2 Door shall be provided with a 14 mm (5/8”) recess and shall be lined with self-furring galvanized lath.

.3 The frame shall be provided an expansion casing bead with 75 mm (3”) wide galvanized

lath, recessed 20 mm (3/4”) to receive plaster.

.4 The hinge shall be a concealed pivoting rod.

.5 The latch shall be a flush to the surface, screwdriver operated cam latch.

.6 The steel finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate preparation with prime coat of grey baked enamel.

.7 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor AP-5010, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers.

2.4 FLUSH ACCESS DOORS FOR TILED WALL APPLICATIONS

.1 For doors 400 x 400 mm (16” x 16”) and smaller the door shall be 16 gauge with 18 gauge mounting frame.

.2 For doors over 400 x 400 mm (16” x 16”) the door shall be 14 gauge with 16 gauge

mounting frame.

.3 Door shall be flush to frame with rounded safety corners.

.4 The frame shall be one piece welded to the mounting frame.



.5 The hinge shall be a continuous concealed hinge.

.6 The latch shall be a stainless steel screwdriver cam latch.

.7 The finish shall be type 304 #4 satin polish stainless steel.

.8 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor UF-5000, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers. 2.5 FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS

.1 Door shall be constructed of 20 gauge steel with a 16 gauge mounting frame.

.2 Door shall be filled with 50 mm (2”) thick fire rated insulation.

.3 The door frame shall be provided with a 25 mm (1”) wide flange and mounting frame to have anchor straps.

.4 The hinge shall be concealed and shall be provided with a spring closer.

.5 Door shall be UL/ULC rated for 1 ½ hour “B” label with 250 degree F temp rise in 30

minutes.

.6 The latch shall be a universal self-latching bolt, operated by either a knurled knob.

.7 The steel finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate prepared with a prime coat of grey baked enamel.

.8 Door shall be provided with an interior latch release.

.9 For drywall applications, provide a galvanized steel drywall taping bead flange.

.10 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor FB-5060, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers.

2.6 FIRE RATED ACCESS DOOR WITH INSIDE LATCH RELEASE

.1 Door shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with a 16 gauge mounting frame.

.2 Door shall be flush to frame with reinforced edges.

.3 The door frame shall be provided with a 25 mm (1”) wide flange and shall be provided with anchor straps.

.4 The hinge shall be concealed and shall be provided with a spring closer.

.5 The door shall be UL/ULC rated for 1 ½ hour “B” label or 2 hour “B” label as required

where temperature rise is not a factor.

.6 The latch shall be a universal self-latching bolt, operated by either a knurled knob.



.7 The steel finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate prepared with a prime coat of grey baked enamel.

.8 Door shall be provided with an interior latch release.

.9 For drywall applications provide a galvanized steel drywall taping bead flange.

.10 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor FB-5060, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers.

2.7 VALVE BOX – SURFACE MOUNT

.1 Door shall be stainless steel in public areas and steel in mechanical rooms and service areas.

.2 Door and box shall be 16 gauge steel.

.3 The door shall overlap the box, providing a tight and secure fit.

.4 The box shall be fully enclosed, attached to the door.

.5 The hinge shall be a continuous piano hinge.

.6 The door shall be provided with a cylinder lock and key.

.7 For steel doors the finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate preparation with prime coat of

grey baked enamel.

.8 Stainless steel doors shall be #4 satin finish.

.9 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor ASVB, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers. 2.8 VALVE BOX – RECESSED

.1 Door shall be stainless steel in public areas and steel in mechanical rooms and service areas.

.2 Door and box shall be 16 gauge steel.

.3 The door shall be flush to the frame with rounded safety corners.

.4 The box shall be fully enclosed, completely attached to the frame.

.5 The hinge shall be a continuous concealed hinge.

.6 The door shall be provided with a cylinder lock and key.

.7 For steel doors the finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate preparation with prime coat of

grey baked enamel.



.8 Stainless steel doors shall be #4 satin finish.

.9 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor ARVB, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 On some drawings, access door locations have been indicated for coordination. The drawings do not show all access doors required.

.2 The Division 15 Contractor shall provide a set of drawings showing locations and types of

all access doors located in public areas to the Consultant for approval, prior to commencing the installation of any piping or ductwork within these areas.

.3 Access doors shall be turned over to the building trade that is responsible for finishing the

wall or ceiling where the access door is required.

.4 The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for providing the access doors required to be installed in ductwork. Refer to section 15820 for requirements.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. IDENTIFICATION YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 15090-1 BARRIER FREE UPGRADES 490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.



.1 This section includes:

1. Valve tags. 2. Pipe Markers/Arrow Tape above ground. 3. Underground Piping Warning Tape. 4. Mechanical Equipment and HVAC Controls Identification. 5. Safety Signs. 6. Isolation Valves Numbering.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 Exposed Areas

1. Finished areas and other areas used by personnel in normal use of building, such as equipment rooms and storage rooms.

.2 Concealed Areas

1. Duct or pipe tunnels, duct or pipe chases, spaces above accessible ceilings, and crawl

spaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE

.1 W. H. Brady Co. catalogue numbers are used as a basis of identification.

.2 Stock catalogue numbers are listed in these specifications. Subcontractor is responsible to review schedules and provide required markers. In some instances, "non-stock" markers (special) may be required.

2.2 MANUFACTURER’S NAMEPLATES

.1 Manufacturer’s nameplates:

1. Provide metal nameplate on each piece of equipment, mechanically fastened with raised or recessed letters.

2. Provide Underwriters' Laboratories or CSA registration plates, as required by

respective agency.

3. Manufacturers nameplate to indicate size, equipment model, manufacturer's name, serial number, voltage, cycle, phase and power of motors.



4. Locate nameplates so that they are easily read. Do not insulate or paint over plates.

2.3 VALVE TAGS

.1 Metal Tags: Brass or aluminium with stamped or engraved letters; tag sizes minimum 2” (round, square, or rectangle) with smooth edges. Thickness 19 gauge (0.040”) minimum.

.2 Beaded Chain: Size 6, brass or aluminium, 4-1/2” long with locking link.

2.4 PIPE MARKERS/ARROW TAPE ABOVE GROUND

.1 Colour: Conform to ANSI A13.1.

.2 Self-Sticking Pipe Markers/Arrow Tape: Material B-946, flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive permanent adhesive backing and printed markings.

.3 Suitable for indoor/outdoor application.

.4 Temperature range: Minus 40 degrees to 180 degrees F.

2.5 UNDERGROUND PIPING WARNING TAPE

.1 Tracer wire and test station(s) required when burying cast iron, ductile iron, or non-metallic piping.

.2 Tracer Wire: #10AWG THHN/THWN, yellow, solid copper.

.3 Tracer Wire Test Station: C.P. Test Services. Test Station: Plastic Pipe, cast iron cover, 2-

point terminal box. 2.6 CONTROLS IDENTIFICATION

.1 Refer to Section 15900. 2.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

.1 Labelling shall be furnished and installed by the contractor.

.2 Engraved signs shall be dark letters on light background.

.3 Identify mechanical equipment and HVAC controls, e.g., air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, water treatment devices, controls instruments, stationary tanks/containers, and similar items, with nameplates or tags.

.4 Provide engraved nameplates made of rigid plastic laminate in which coloured top and

bottom layers of the material are thermoset with a contrasting colour core. Minimum thickness 0.062”.



.5 Size: Minimum 1” x 3”.

.6 Material Colour: White background/black lettering.

.7 Manufacturer: Brady, No. B-1.

.8 Provide lettering as follows:

1. Size: 10 point minimum. 2. Spacing: 1/4” from top, 1/8” from bottom, 1/16” between lines. 3. Provide nameplate with component nomenclature as noted in the Equipment

Schedules. Coordinate with the controls sub-contractor.

.9 As a minimum, identify the system, e.g., HVAC (heating, ventilating, and air conditioning), the component, e.g., FGF (furnace, gas fired), and the sequence number.

2.8 SAFETY SIGNS

.1 Colours associated with specific words such as "Danger," "Warning," "Caution," or "Notice" shall conform to ANSI Z35.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Valve Tags:

1. Install with brass beaded chain. 2. Steel stamp or engrave valve tag in accordance with schedule herein. 3. Letter style block, 1/4" height minimum. 4. Tag all valves in concealed or exposed areas except isolation and by-pass valves

installed adjacent to the equipment they serve. 5. Provide typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location. Frame under glass and

hang where directed.

.2 Pipe Markers above Ground:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Seal markers with clear lacquer. 3. Identify piping in exposed or concealed areas in accordance with schedule herein. 4. Pipe marker consists of pipe contents identification with flow direction arrow tape.

Provide consistent colour scheme, unless otherwise noted. 5. Wrap arrow tape completely around pipe at both ends of pipe markers. 6. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.



7. Label piping at intervals of not more than 20 feet on horizontal and vertical runs, at each branch connection, and where pipe penetrates walls, ceilings and floors (both sides).

8. Size of label depends on outside diameter (OD) of pipe. Pipe OD includes insulation or protective coating.

9. Minimum length of marker, including arrows:

a. 2” diameter pipe or smaller: 8” b. 2” to 8”: 12” c. 8” to 10” 24” d. Over 10” 32”

.3 Safety Signs

1. Install in clear view.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. PIPING INSULATION YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 15260-1 BARRIER FREE UPGRADES 490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.



.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 15010.


.1 Comply with OBC and NFPA 90A requirements, particularly paragraphs pertaining to the maximum flame spread index (currently set at 25) and maximum smoke development index (currently set at 50).

.2 All materials shall be compatible and suitable for service temperature and shall not

contribute to corrosion or otherwise attack surface to which applied in either the wet or dry state.

.3 Every package or standard container of insulation or accessories delivered to the job site

for use must have a manufacturer's stamp or label giving the name of the manufacturer and description of the material.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data in accordance with Section 15010.

.2 Provide the following:

1. Insulation materials: Specify each type used and state surface burning characteristics.

2. Insulation facings and jackets: Each type used. Make it clear that white finish will be furnished for exposed ductwork, casings and equipment.

3. Insulation accessory materials: Each type used.

4. Manufacturer's installation and fitting fabrication instructions for flexible unicellular

insulation.

1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIAL

.1 Store materials in clean and dry environment, pipe covering jackets shall be clean and unmarred. Place adhesives in original containers. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions as required by printed instructions of manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and finishing cements.

1.5 STANDARDS OF ACCEPTANCE

.1 Knauf Fiber Glass



.2 Owens/Corning Fiberglass

.3 Armstrong

.4 Johns Manville

.5 Rockwool Manufacturing PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

.1 K-factors (thermal conductivity) shown are expressed in BTU•in/hr•ft2•F. 2.2 FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION

.1 Insulation

1. Rigid molded in compliance with ASTM C547, Class 1, minimum density 3.5 pounds/cubic foot, K-factor of approximately 0.24 at 75°F, suitable for temperatures from -20°F to 450°F.

.2 Vapor Barrier

1. Factory applied vapor barrier all-service type with self-sealing lap and butt strips.

.3 Valves and Fitting Covers

1. Pre-molded PVC covers with fiber glass insert. Manufacturers: Proto Corp., Ceelco.

.4 Applications

1. All domestic cold water piping.

2. All hot water heating piping.

3. All domestic hot water supply and recirculation piping.



2.3 INSULATION THICKNESS

PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS Service Fluid Design

Operating Temperature

Range (°F)

Nominal Pipe Size Insulation Thickness

Runouts Up To 2 1 & Less 1-3/4 To 2 2-1/2 To 4

Dom. Hot Water &

Recirc. Piping & Tempered

Water

Up to 140°F (60°C) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm) 1.5"

(40mm)

Hot Water Heating

(all sizes) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm)

Domestic Cold Water 40°F to 50°F 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm)

2.4 ADHESIVE, MASTIC, CEMENT

.1 ASTM C449: Mineral fiber hydraulic setting thermal insulating and finishing cement.

.2 Other: Insulation manufacturers' published recommendations. 2.5 MECHANICAL FASTENERS

.1 Wire: 1.3 mm thick (18 gage) soft annealed galvanized or 1.9 mm (14 gage) copper clad steel or nickel copper alloy.

.2 Bands: 20 mm (3/4 inch) nominal width, brass, galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless

steel. 2.6 CANVAS JACKETING

.1 Apply in concealed areas, compact, firm ULC listed heavy plain weave, cotton fabric at 220 g/m sq.

2.7 PVC JACKETING

.1 Apply in exposed areas on piping with operating temperatures less than 180°F (80°C).

.2 Piping: ULC listed PVC moulded type jacketing material, gloss white complying with 25 Flame Spread and 50 Smoke Developed ratings.

.3 Fittings: ULC listed PVC, gloss white, 1-piece, pre-moulded fittings complying with

25 Flame Spread and 50 Smoke Developed ratings.



.4 PVC Application: strictly in accordance with the requirements of Authorities having jurisdiction.

.5 Ultraviolet resistant.

.6 Fastenings: To manufacturer’s standard(s). 2.8 METAL JACKETING

.1 At all locations where the pipe is located outdoors or in heavy abuse areas, use metal jacketing to protect piping or ductwork insulation.

.2 Jacketing: Aluminum, 0.016” thick, embossed surface with factory bonded moisture

barrier.

.3 Valve and Fitting Insulation Covers: Fabricate from same material as jacketing or use prefabricated insulation covers made in two matching halves.

.4 Metal Jacketing Bands: 0.5” wide, aluminum or stainless.

2.9 PROTECTION SADDLES AND SHIELDS

.1 Provide factory engineered galvanized steel hanger shields on horizontal insulated pipe complying with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-59 standards for gauge and length of saddle.

2.10 SADDLES (PIPING/TUBING UP TO 2 INCHES)

.1 Use 180 degree saddle on systems utilizing teardrop type hangers.

.2 Use 360 degree saddle on systems utilizing trapeze hangers or clamps. 2.11 INSERTS AND SHIELDS (PIPING/TUBING OVER 2 INCHES)

.1 Use 360 degree calcium silicate insert with a 180 degree shield on systems utilizing clevis or teardrop type hangers.

.2 Use 360 degree calcium silicate with a 360 degree shield on systems utilizing trapeze

hangers or clamps.

.3 The unit shall have an integral moisture barrier consisting of a tri-laminate All-Service Jacket equal and similar to the jacketing on the adjoining insulation.

.4 Insert: Calcium silicate, minimum density 9 psi.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION



.1 Verify that items to be insulated have been pressure tested and approved before applying insulation material.

.2 Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.2 INSTALLATION – GENERAL

.1 Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Required pressure tests of piping joints and connections shall be completed and the work approved by the Consultant for application of insulation. Surface shall be clean and dry with all foreign materials, such as dirt, oil, loose scale and rust removed.

.3 Except for specific exceptions, insulate entire specified equipment, piping (pipe, fittings,

valves, accessories). Insulate each pipe and duct individually. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length section will fit.

.4 Insulation materials shall be installed with smooth and even surfaces, with jackets and

facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Insulation shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings, except at fire dampers and duct heaters (NFPA 90A). Vapor retarders shall be continuous and uninterrupted throughout systems with operating temperature 16°C (60°F) and below. Lap and seal vapor barrier over ends and exposed edges of insulation. Anchors, supports and other metal projections through insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed for a minimum length of 150 mm (6”).

.5 Install vapor stops at all insulation terminations on either side of valves, pumps and

equipment and particularly in straight lengths of pipe insulation.

.6 Insulation on hot piping and equipment shall be terminated square at items not to be insulated, such as access openings and nameplates. Cover all exposed raw insulation with white sealer or jacket material.

.7 Protect all insulations outside of buildings with aluminum jacket using lock joint or other

approved system for a continuous weather tight system. Access doors and other items requiring maintenance or access shall be removable and sealable.

.8 Piping work not to be insulated:

1. In hot piping: Unions, flexible connectors, control valves, PRVs, safety valves and

discharge vent piping, vacuum breakers, thermostatic vent valves, exposed piping through floor for convectors and radiators. Insulate piping to within approximately 75 mm (3 inches) of uninsulated items.

.9 Plumbing work not to be insulated:

1. Piping and valves of fire protection system.

2. Chromium plated brass piping.



3. Piping in pipe basement serving wall hydrants.

4. Small horizontal cold water branch runs in partitions to individual fixtures may be

without insulation for maximum distance of 900 mm (3 feet). .10 Work shall be performed by qualified insulation journeymen.

.11 Apply insulation and coverings on hot piping while surface is between 50 to 60°C.

.12 Vapor barriers and insulation to be complete over full length of pipe or surface, without

penetration for hangers, and without interruption at sleeves, pipe and fittings.

.13 Do not insulate factory-insulated equipment.

.14 Do not insulate nameplates.

.15 Fit insulation tightly against surface to which it is applied.

.16 For non-fire rated barriers (e.g., wall, floor, ceiling, or roof) continue insulation and vapor barrier through penetrations. For fire rated barriers, provide ULC/FM approved through penetration stop systems.

.17 Weatherproof outdoor installations of piping or ductwork covered with aluminum jacket.

Provide watershed lap joints and seal with mastic as required.

.18 Do not install metal jacketing with raw edges; provide a safety edge. 3.3 INSTALLATION – PIPING

.1 On exposed piping located in finished areas, locate cover seams in least visible area.

.2 Provide continuous insulation through pipe hangers or supports. Do not notch insulation. Provide shields or saddles to prevent crushing insulation.

.3 Where insulation terminates, taper to pipe and finish with insulating cement or acrylic

mastic.

.4 Cover insulated pipes located outdoors or in utility tunnels with aluminum jacket. Secure with aluminum bands and screws as required.

.5 Tape circumferential joints of pipe insulation with 3” wide white vinyl tape.

.6 Insulate fitting and valves where required with same material thickness as specified for

adjacent pipe.

.7 Insulate potable and non-potable cold water piping within walls, chases, or ceiling plenums where return air is present.



.8 Insulate potable and non-potable cold water piping in equipment rooms.

.9 Do not insulate unions, flanges and valves in potable or non-potable piping systems of

140°F or less, except for chilled water.

.10 Vertical pipe over 3" diameter: use insulation supports welded or bolted to pipe directly above lowest pipe fitting. Thereafter locate on 12 feet centers and at each valve and flange.

.11 Expansion joints: Terminate single layer and each layer of multiple layers in straight cut.

Leave space of 1" between terminations. Pack void tightly with glass wool. Protect joints with aluminum sleeves.

.12 Use factory fabricated, easily disassembled insulation, for valves, fittings and process

equipment requiring periodic maintenance of parts and sub-assemblies listed or indicated.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. DUCTWORK INSULATION YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 15270-1 BARRIER FREE UPGRADES 490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL


.2 Application: all interior and roof mounted ductwork, including silencers. .3 Do not externally insulate ductwork which is internally lined.


.1 Comply with OBC and NFPA 90A requirements, particularly paragraphs pertaining to the

maximum flame spread index (currently set at 25) and maximum smoke development index (currently set at 50).

.2 All materials shall be compatible and suitable for service temperature, and shall not contribute

to corrosion or otherwise attack surface to which applied in either the wet or dry state.

.3 Every package or standard container of insulation or accessories delivered to the job site for use must have a manufacturer's stamp or label giving the name of the manufacturer and description of the material.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit in accordance with Section 15010 shop drawings and product data

.2 Provide the following:

1. Insulation materials: Specify each type used and state surface burning characteristics. 2. Insulation facings and jackets: Each type used. Make it clear that white finish will be

furnished for exposed ductwork, casings and equipment. 3. Insulation accessory materials: Each type used. 4. Manufacturer's installation and fitting fabrication instructions for flexible unicellular

insulation.

1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIAL

.1 Store materials in clean and dry environment, pipe covering jackets shall be clean and unmarred. Place adhesives in original containers. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions as required by printed instructions of manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and finishing cements.



1.5 STANDARDS OF ACCEPTANCE

.1 Knauf Fiber Glass

.2 Owens/Corning Fiberglass

.3 Armstrong

.4 Johns Manville

.5 Rockwool Manufacturing

.6 Armaflex.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 RIGID INSULATION WITH VAPOUR BARIER AND FOIL

.1 High-strength, rigid, resin bonded fibrous glass board for use on outdoor mounted ductwork.

.2 Complete with factory applied poly encapsulated all service jacket (ASJ) on both sides. Contractor is responsible for confirming adhesion between the rigid insulation foil and the weather proof insulation cover specified herein.

.3 Thickness: 50mm (2”)

.4 Comply with the following American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C612, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal

Insulation. 2. ASTM C1136, Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for

Thermal Insulation. 3. ASTM C1393, Standard Specification for Perpendicularly Oriented Mineral Fiber Roll

and Sheet Thermal Insulation for Pipes and Tanks. 4. ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

2.2 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY

Mean Temp.(°C) l (W/m-OC) 10 0.032 25 0.034 50 0.037 75 0.041 100 0.045 125 0.049 150 0.053



2.3 ACCESSORIES

.1 Provide accessories per insulating system manufacturer’s recommendations, including the following:

1. Closure Materials: Butt strips, bands, wires, staples, mastics, adhesives; pressure-

sensitive tapes. 2. Support Materials: Hanger straps, hanger rods, saddles, support rings. 3. Contact adhesive: quick-setting, non-flammable fire resistive adhesive to adhere fibrous

glass to ducts. Flame spread 15 smoke development 0.

.2 Pins

1. Foil faced insulation boards shall be applied using mechanical fasteners such as weld pins or speed clips.

2. Fasteners shall be located not less than 3" (75 mm) from each edge or corner of the board.

3. Pin spacing along the equipment shall be no greater than 12" (300 mm) on center. Additional pins or clips may be required to hold the insulation tightly against the surface where cross breaking is used for stiffening.

4. If duct is over 24" wide, use on bottom of duct as well. 5. Weld pin lengths must be selected to ensure tight fit but avoid “oil canning.” 6. Weld pins 4 mm diameter, with 1½” diameter head for installation through the

insulation. Length to suit thickness of insulation.

2.4 OUTDOOR JACKET PROTECTION

.1 Insulation protection jacket shall be a composite membrane consisting of a multi-ply embossed UV-resistant aluminum foil/polymer laminate to which a layer of rubberized asphalt is applied, specially formulated for use on insulated duct applications.

.2 A metalized polyester film coated with a high quality low temperature acrylic adhesive is then

applied to the rubberized asphalt.

.3 The protection jackets are 'peel and stick', include self-healing if punctured, are UV stable, and will expand and contract with the mechanical system.

.4 Products is supplied in rolls for ease of application. Product is laminated to a disposable release

sheet and require only a “peel ‘n stick” application procedure. .5 Standard of Acceptance:

1. Polyguard Alumaguard All-Weather Jacket. 2. Warranty: Polyguard Products warrants material to be free from leaks caused by defects

in materials or manufacturing for a period of ten (10) years from the date of installation when material is applied according to installation instructions in effect at the time of installation.



PART 2 EXECUTION

3.1 WATER SHEDDING TOP OF DUCTWORK

.1 All roof-top ductwork to must be designed and built with adequate slope (watershed) to prevent ponding water. Ponding water is defined as water that stays in place for greater than 24 hours.

.2 Also refer to section 15801 for duct construction and top of duct sloping.

3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION

.1 Install insulation materials and accessories in accordance with Contract Documents and manufacturer's published instructions to ensure that it will serve its intended purpose.

.2 Install insulation on ductwork only subsequent to the successful execution of the leakage test.

.3 Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Do not use cut pieces or scraps

abutting each other. Butt insulation joints firmly to ensure complete, tight fit over surfaces. .4 Maintain the integrity of factory-applied vapor barrier jacketing on insulation, protecting it

against puncture, tears or other damage. Staples used on cold insulation shall be coated with suitable sealant to maintain vapor barrier integrity.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE - INSULATION

.1 Upon completion of insulation work covered by this specification, visually inspect the work

and verify that it has been correctly installed. This may be done while work is in progress, to assure compliance with requirements herein to cover and protect insulation materials during installation.

3.4 INSULATION PROTECTION

.1 Replace damaged insulation, which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, including insulation with

vapor barrier damage and moisture-saturated insulation.

3.5 INSULATION JOINTS

.1 All insulation joints should be sealed with pressure-sensitive joint sealing tape to match the insulation facing. Rub hard with a plastic sealing tool to effect a tight bond.

.2 Recommended practice suggests 3" (76mm) wide tape on flat surfaces or where edges are ship-

lapped and stapled. Use 5" (102mm) wide tape in lieu of ship-lapping. .3 All sheet metal joints must be sealed prior to insulating.

3.6 INSULATION AT DUCT SUPPORTS



.1 Refer to and conform strictly to insulation and protection jacket manufacturers’ instructions.

.2 To properly insulate through a roof top duct support; lift duct off of support, insulate duct

through the support, install protection jacket through the support and add an additional layer of protection jacket 6" wide on the bottom and both sides at the point of contact with the support system.

.3 When it is not possible to lift a duct off the rooftop supports, it is necessary to incorporate the

support system into the insulation system by encapsulating the supports with insulation. This same system must be used if duct supports are screwed onto the ductwork

3.7 PROTECTION JACKET INSTALLATION

.1 Refer to and follow strictly the manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Prior to the installation of protection jacket, ducts must be sealed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, 3rd Edition (2005), Seal Class A. Also refer to section 15801.

.3 Installation Method:

1. Cut one piece of Alumaguard All-Weather to cover the bottom of the duct and up 6" on

each side, install this piece first. 2. Starting at the bottom of one side of the duct, go up the side, over the top, and down the

other side, trimming the Alumaguard flush with the bottom corner of the duct; do not terminate this piece on the bottom of the duct.

3. Roll the Alumaguard All-Weather with a laminate roller as the release film is removed to insure adhesion to the substrate.

4. At the interface between the insulation and the penthouse or plenum wall, follow manufacturer’s instructions for jacket termination. Clean the penthouse wall/plenum casing, install a 12” strip of jacket (6” on the duct and 6” on the vertical face of the wall/casing) and install 4”x4” painted steel angle flashing screwed through the protection jacket and into the wall or plenum casing material. Cover flashing angles with 6” wide jacket material.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL – PROTECTIVE JACKET

.1 Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to perform field

inspections and prepare inspection reports. Inspect the jackets on the exterior ductwork

.2 Perform the field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

.3 All jacketing applications will be considered defective work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work.

.4 Install new insulation and jackets to replace insulation and jackets removed for inspection.



Repeat inspection procedures after new materials are installed.

.5 Obtain written confirmation from jacket manufacturer that completed installation meets manufacturer’s installation requirements.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM





1 GENERAL

1.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.

1.1.1 Conform to General Mechanical Requirements, Section 15010 as applicable.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

1.2.1 Plumbing specialties and accessories: Section 15430.

1.2.2 Plumbing equipment: Section 15450.

1.3 REFERENCES

CAN/CSA-B45 Series-02 CSA Standards on Plumbing Fixtures.

CAN/CSA-B125-01 Plumbing Fittings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 Product Data

1.4.1.1 Submit product data in accordance with General Requirements.

1.4.1.2 Indicate dimensions, construction details and roughing-in dimensions for all fixtures and trim.

1.4.2 Maintenance Data

1.4.2.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in General Requirements.

1.4.2.2 Data to include:

- Description of plumbing fixtures and trim giving manufacturers name, type, model, year

capacity and flow.

- Details of operation, servicing and maintenance.

- Recommended spare parts list.

1.5 FIXTURES AND TRIM

1.5.1 Manufacture plumbing fixtures in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 Series. Conform to latest

code requirements for water saving features noted in the Ontario Building Code.

1.5.2 Manufacture plumbing fittings in accordance with CAN/CSA-B125.

1.5.3 Architectural drawings to govern in determination of number and location of fixtures.

1.5.4 Trim in any one washroom or location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type, unless

otherwise noted.






1.5.5 Exposed plumbing to be chrome plated.

1.5.6 The type number and letter allocated to each style of fixture identifies that particular fixture on

Mechanical Drawings.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL HUNG WATER CLOSET, ‘WC1’ (BARRIER FREE DESIGN)

2.1.1 Water Closet: Wall hung exposed flush valve (barrier free design)- American Standard “Afwall

Elongated” low consumption toilet #3351.101 “Low Consumption”, wall hung for flush valve,

vitreous china, elongated syphon jet flush action bowl, fully glazed 2-1/8” (54 mm) internal trap

way, 10”x12” (254 mm x 305 mm) large water surface 1.6 gal (6 L) flush, 1-1/2” (38 mm) top

spud.

2.1.2 Flush Valve: Flush Valve & Supplies: Sloan Regal #111-XL-CP, exposed manual Flushometer

for Top Spud toilet, chrome plated, 6L (1.6 US Gal) factory set flow, quiet action diaphragm

type, non-hold open feature, A. D. A oscillating handle, back-check angle stop (screwdriver

operated), flush tube for 292mm (11-1/2") rough-in, vacuum breaker.

2.1.3 Seat: Centoco #AM820STS toilet seat, elongated heavy duty plastic open front with cover,

reinforced S.S. check hinge, post, washers and nuts. Power for device by electrical trade. Ensure

that sensor clear seat cover.

2.1.4 Supply & Installation: To meet Code requirements for Barrier free access.

2.1.5 Coupling: Mission Heavy Weight #HW Coupling, couplings, constructed of four extra wide

corrugated type 304 stainless steel bands, connect from 100mm (3-15/16") MJ to 100mm (3-

15/16") MJ, from cast iron to cast iron, heavy duty worm drive clamps.

2.1.6 Floor Supported Carrier: Jay R. Smith #0208Y single, horizontal carrier, 3” (75 mm) drain, all

duco coated cast iron fittings, rear anchor bolt, face plate, heavy duty legs, adjustable nipple,

plated hardware, cap nuts, test plug and protection cap.

2.2 LAVATORY, ‘LV1’ (BARRIER FREE DESIGN)

2.2.1 Lavatory: American Standard “Murro” #0954.123EC - 22” x 21” x 5-7-1/2” deep, wall hung,

vitreous china, rear overflow, for concealed arm carrier. American Standard #0059 020EC

shroud/knee contact guard to cover exposed piping. Provide RH Hole for new Soap Dispenser

(soap dispenser is to be supplied and installed by the Architectural Division).

2.2.2 Faucet: Chicago Faucets No. 420-E2805ABCP, Deck Mounted 4" Fixed Centers Single Lever

Hot and Cold Water Mixing Sink Faucet, Chrome Plated solid brass construction. 4 5/8" Center

to Center Rigid Cast Brass Spout. 0.5 GPM (1.9 L/min) Pressure Compensating Econo-Flo

Vandal Proof Non-Aerating Spray. 1/2" NPSM Supply Inlets for 3/8" or 1/2" Flexible Riser.

ECAST® construction with less than 0.25% lead content by weighted average. CALGreen

Compliant. Secondary Control Valve: 4 5/8" Center to Center Rigid Cast Brass Spout.






2.2.3 Balancing Valve: Supply to hot water side of faucet and cold water supply to cold water side of

faucet. Mechanical mixing valve with thermostatic limit stop by Lawler model TMM-1070 with

temperature adj. dial & with integral back checks. Set valve temperature at 115F, shut-off at

120F. ASSE1070 approved. Provide tee, adaptor and flex copper tubing to suit installation.

2.2.4 Supplies: McGuire #H170BVRB supplies, C.P., polished brass, rigid short horizontal integral

copper sweat tube nipples 1/2"x5” long, all brass ¼ turn ball valve angle stops with combination

V.P. loose key, and handles, escutcheons and S.S. braided flexible risers. McGuire #8872C-17T

‘P’ trap, C.P. brass adjustable body, 17 gauge, 1-1/4” and escutcheon.

2.2.5 Carrier: Jay R. Smith #0700-Z-M basic carrier, with concealed arms and block base feet support

with semi-pedestal supported plate.

2.3 HANDHELD SHOWER, ‘HS1’

2.3.1 Shower: American Standard #7866.115 with brass control valve complete with wheel handle,

vacuum breaker, and 10” spray end with self-closing hand valve, 46” hose, wall bracket with

hook.

2.3.2 Thermostatic Water Mixing Valve: Symmons 7-225-CK-MS-B-T or approved equal complete

with recessed stainless steel (SS) cabinet with hinged & lockable SS door. 1/2” inlet and outlet.

Set temperature regulator to a maximum 37 degrees Celsius (98 degrees Fahrenheit).

2.4 DRINKING FOUNTAIN, ‘DF1’

2.4.1 Drinking Fountain: Model EZSDWSVRSK. Unit shall be hands-free, Green Ticker, laminar

flow, antimicrobial, real drain. Furnished with vandal-resistant bubbler. Electronic bottle filler

sensor with electronic front and side bubbler pushbar activation. Elkay EZH20 Bottle Filling

Station with Single ADA Cooler Non-Filtered Non-Refrigerated Stainless Steel finish. Product

shall be wall mount (on-wall); for indoor applications, serving 1 station(s). Unit shall be certified

to UL 399 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 120. Unit shall be lead-free design which is certified to

NSF/ANSI 61 & 372 (lead free) and meets local codes and lead requirements. Full load amps:

2A, rated watts: 15W, 115V, 60Hz. Dimensions: 18-3/8” x 19” x 36-1/16”. Mount at barrier free

height as per local code requirements. Unit shall be barrier free compliant as per OBC. Connect

to the water supply using dielectric coupling and utilize the furnished non-metallic strainer.

Designed to operate on a 20 psi to 105 psi supply line pressure.

2.4.2 Supplies: McGuire #LFHST11LK, Drinking Fountain Supply, chrome plated polished brass,

straight stops, 10 mm (3/8") I.P.S. Inlet, V.P. Loose key. The cooler is furnished with a non-

metallic strainer. The drain trap shall also be plastic to isolate the cooler from building plumbing

system.

2.4.3 Carrier/Wall-Support: Mount on the solid masonry. Make allowance for modification of existing

piping in the pipe chase at no extra cost to the Contract to suit installation of the drinking fountain.






3 EXECUTION

3.1 FIXTURE INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Install wall hung lavatory brackets supplied with fixtures to wall by means of a manufactured

chair carrier of MIFAB, Smith, Watts or Zurn.

3.1.2 Install wall-hung water closets with chair carriers of MIFAB, Smith, Watts or Zurn manufacturer,

and of type and model recommended by manufacturer for each particular installation with due

regard to construction and piping details.

3.1.3 Rough-in and install plumbing fixtures and drinking fountains at the recommended height for

normal or handicapped use as applicable to location and to comply with OBC & NBCC. Measure

mounting height from finished floor.

3.1.4 Insulate exposed indirect waste of barrier free usage lavatory & sink with McGuire #PW-

2000WC for basin & #PW-2000 for sink "Pro-Wrap" sanitary covering for covering all exposed

piping per local codes (to protect against heat/ contusions)

3.1.5 Adjust flush valves to limit the quantity of water per flush cycle allowed by code. Consult

manufacturer for adjustment procedures.

3.2 ADJUSTMENT

3.2.1 Verify maximum settings of thermostatic mixing valves.

3.2.2 Clean out aerator screens and strainers after lines have been flushed.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING





PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by

the requirements outlined in Section 15010.

.2 All valves must have a valid CRN Number. Statutory declaration must be provided on

request.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Do the work in accordance with the Ontario Building Code Plumbing Code and local

authority having jurisdiction.

.2 ASTM B62-09 - Specifications for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

.3 ANSI/ASME B16.5-2005 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

.4 ANSI/ASME B16.11-2009 - Forged Fittings, Socket Welding.

.5 ASTM B88-03 - Specifications for Seamless Copper Water Tube.

.6 CSA B242-M80 - Groove and Shoulder Type Mechanical Pipe Couplings.

.7 MSS SP 67-2002 - Butterfly Valves.

.8 MSS SP 70-2006 - Cast Iron Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

.9 MSS SP 71-2005 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends.

.10 MSS SP 80-2003 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 15010.

.2 Indicate the following: Valves.

.3 Provide shop drawings for all grooved end components.

.4 All grooved end components shall be provided by one manufacturer.






PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING

.1 Domestic hot, cold and recirculating tubing, within building:

1. Above ground: Copper tube, hard drawn, Type L: to ASTM B88M.

2. Buried: Copper tube, soft annealed, Type K: to ASTM B88M.

.2 All piping shall have certification markings for compliance with ASTM B88.

2.2 FITTINGS

.1 Brass or bronze flanges and flanged fittings: to ANSI B16.24.

.2 Brass or bronze threaded fittings: to ANSI B16.15.

.3 Cast bronze to ANSI B16.18- 1984 or wrought copper and bronze to ANSI B16.22.

2.3 JOINTS

.1 Rubber gaskets, 0.063" (1.6 mm) thick: to AWWA C111-95.

.2 Bolts, nuts, hex head and washers: to ASTM A307-92a-07b, heavy series.

.3 For installation of the potable water system only lead free solder shall be used in

accordance with Ontario Building Code Standards.

.4 Solder, tin antimony, 95:5: to ASTM B32.

2.4 GROOVED COPPER METHOD

.1 Application

1. Grooved piping system may be used in lieu of flanged or sweated copper in size 2" (50

mm) and larger. Couplings shall be designed with angle bolt pads to provide a rigid

joint, complete with EPDM flush seal gasket suitable for temperatures from -30F to

230F (-34C to 110C).

.2 Fittings

1. Housing: ductile iron conforming to ASTM-A536, Grade 65-45-12.

2. Coating: rust inhibiting lead free paint.






3. Bolts and nuts: heat treated, zinc electroplated carbon steel oval-neck track bolts

conforming to ASTM A-183 and zinc electroplated carbon steel heavy hex nuts

conforming to ASTM A-563.

4. Hinge Pin: carbon steel.

5. Gaskets: in accordance with ASTM D-2000. Grade E: EPDM rated for service

between -30F and 230F (-34C to 110C).

6. Copper Fittings: Copper per ASTM B-75 and ASTM B-584.

7. When connecting dissimilar metals in liquid systems from grooved end steel (IPS) to

Copper (CTS) provide a dielectric waterway between the two materials.

.3 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic, Anvil.

2.5 GROOVED END BUTTERFLY VALVES

.1 NPS 2 1/2 and over, grooved ends:

1. Class 300, bubble tight shut off to 300 psi (2065 kPa) bronze body.

2. Operators:

a. NPS 4 and under, lever handle.

b. NPS 6 and over, gear operated.

3. Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic Series 608, Grinnell. Mueller.

2.6 GATE VALVES

.1 Gate valves shall only be utilized where specifically noted on the drawings. For all other

shut off valve applications utilize ball valves for 2" (50 mm) or smaller and butterfly valves

for 2.6" (65 mm) and larger.

.2 NPS 2 and under, soldered:

1. Non-rising stem to MSS SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, screw-in or bolted

bonnet.

2. Standard of Acceptance: Jenkins, Crane, Toyo 281, Kitz 41, Grinnell.

.3 NPS 2 and under, screwed:

1. Rising stem: to MSS SP-80, class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, solid wedge disc.


.4 NPS 2-1/2 and over, in mechanical rooms, flanged:

1. Rising stem: to MSS SP-70, class 125, 860 kPa, FF flange, cast-iron body, OS&Y

bronze trim.


.5 NPS 2-1/2 and over, other than mechanical rooms, flanged:

1. Non-rising stem: to MSS SP-70, class 125, 860 kPa, FF flange, cast-iron body, bronze

trim, bolted bonnet.







2.7 GLOBE VALVES

.1 NPS 2 and under, balancing, soldered:

1. To MSS SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, renewable composition disc,

screwed over bonnet.

2. Lockshield handles: as indicated.


.2 NPS 2 and under, balancing, screwed:

1. To MSS SP-80, class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, screwed over bonnet, renewable

composition disc.

2. Lockshield handles: as indicated.


2.8 SWING CHECK VALVES

.1 NPS 2 and under, soldered:

1. To MSS SP-80, class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap,

regrindable seat.


.2 NPS 2 and under, screwed:

1. To MSS SP-80, class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap,

regrindable seat.


.3 NPS 2-1/2 and over, flanged:

1. To MSS SP-70, class 125, 860 kPa, cast iron body, FF flange, regrind renewable seat,

bronze disc, bolted cap.


2.9 BALL VALVES

.1 NPS 2 and under, branch isolators, screwed:

1. 600 WOG, bronze body, solid chrome plated bronze ball, with Teflon seal.

2. Ball valves shall have full port opening.

3. Standard of Acceptance: Jenkins, Crane, Toyo 5044A, Kitz 58, Grinnell, Apollo.

2.10 AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES

.1 Circuit balancing valves shall be of the automatic variety. Manual circuit balancing valves

will not be accepted.

.2 Circuit Balancing Valves are required on the domestic hot water recirculation system.

.3 Provide the following sizes:






1. Provide 0.032 l/s (0.5 gpm) for 12 mm pipe size.

2. Provide 0.063 l/s (1.0 gpm) for 20 mm pipe size.

.4 Product Warranty and Performance Guarantee

1. Valves shall be warranted by the manufacturer to be free of defects in material and

workmanship for a period of five years.

2. Valves shall control flow to within plus/minus 5 percent of design over an operating

differential range of at least 14 times the minimum required for control. Four operating

pressure ranges shall be available with the minimum range requiring less than 3 psid to

actuate the mechanism.

3. The valve flow curve shall be smooth over its entire nominal control range. Gaps,

bumps and dips in flow curves shall not be acceptable.

.5 Shop Drawing Submission

1. The Balancing Valve Manufacturer shall submit a complete list of balancing valves,

their location and their performance.

2. The Balancing Valve Manufacturer shall mark up a set of full size plans showing the

location of each balancing valve and assign an appropriate identification tag for the

balancing valve.

3. The Balancing Valve Manufacturer shall submit these drawings for the Consultant to

review, incorporate any comments from the Consultant and then submit copies of this

drawing to the Mechanical Contractor, Mechanical Consultant, Architect and

Construction Manager.

4. All balancing valves shall be shipped to site with this tag number firmly attached to the

valve and the full size drawings shall be utilized to identify the location where they are

to be installed.

.6 Valve Flow Control Cartridge (typical for all valves)

1. The non-adjustable flow control cartridge shall be 100% stainless steel. Parts made of

soft metals such as brass with only a coating of hard metal such as nickel shall not be

allowed. Rubber based materials whose properties change with temperature and

pressure shall not be allowed.

2. The cartridges shall have segmented ports through which water can pass, rather than a

continuous large port, to eliminate noise and full travel linear coil spring.

3. The cartridge movement shall result in a shearing action that will dislodge or shear any

particle that may tend to get stuck in a port.






4. Cartridge shall be removable from the housing and shall be held in place in the housing

without adhesive.

`

5. All flow control cartridges shall be warranted by the manufacturer for five years from

the date of sale.

.7 Sizes 40 mm and smaller

1. Valves shall have forged brass bodies and stainless steel cartridge assembly rated for a

minimum of 230 psi/250F.

.8 Valve end connections shall be either female sweat or FPT.

.9 Valves shall be provided with two pressure/temperature taps.

.10 Valves shall be provided with a union tailpiece and built in isolation valve.

.11 The body design shall allow for inspection or removal of the cartridge without disturbing

piping connections.

.12 The valve shall come fully assembled and shall be permanently marked to show direction

of flow and shall have a body tag to indicated flow rate and model number.

.13 Provide a shut off valve upstream of the valve to allow the system to be shut off and the

balancing valve to be removed without shutting down the entire heating system.

.14 Standard of Acceptance: Griswold Isolator R valve.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Install tubing close to building structure to minimize furring, conserve headroom and

space. Group exposed piping and run parallel to walls.

.3 Cut square, ream and clean tubing and tube ends, clean recesses of fittings and assemble

without binding.

.4 Lay buried tubing in accordance with AWWA Class "B" bedding.

.5 Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with ball valves.

.6 New or repaired potable water systems shall be purged of deleterious matter and

disinfected prior to utilization. The method to be followed shall be that prescribed by the

health authority having jurisdiction or in the absence of a prescribed method as follows:






1. The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until dirty water does not

appear at the points of outlet.

2. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at

least 50 parts per million (50 mg/L) of chlorine, and the system or part thereof shall be

valved off and allowed to stand for 24 hours; or the system or part thereof shall be

filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million (200mg/l)

of chlorine and allowed to stand for three (3) hours.

3. Following the required standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean potable

water until the chlorine is purged from the system.

4. The procedure shall be repeated where shown by a bacteriological examination that

contamination remains present in the system.

.7 Compression fittings are not acceptable.

.8 All valves packing shall be asbestos free.

.9 Provide isolation valves on all main branch feeds to each washroom group.

.10 Install all grooved end components as per manufacturer’s latest recommendation.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. DRAINAGE PIPING AND VENT YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 15413-1 BARRIER FREE UPGRADES 490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.



.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 15010 of this specification.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Do the work in accordance with the Ontario Building Code - Plumbing Code and local authority having jurisdiction.

.2 CSA B70 – 2006 - Specifications for Cast Iron Soil Pipe Fittings and Means of Joining

.3 CSA B125 – 2005 - Specifications for Plumbing Fittings

.4 ASTM B32 – 2008 - Specifications for Solder Metal

.5 ASTM B306 – 2009 - Specifications for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)

.6 ANSI B16.29

.7 ASTM B88, ASTM B88M – 2003 - Specifications for Seamless Copper Water Tube

.8 ASTM A74 – 2009 - Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

.9 ASTM C564 – 2009 - Specification for Rubber Gasket for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

.1 For all above grade vent, sanitary, and storm piping, Type DWV to:

1. ASTM B306 - Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).

2. CSA B158 for cast brass fittings.

3. ANSI B16.29 for wrought copper fittings.

4. Solder: tin-lead, 50:50, to ASTM B32, type 50A - Specification for solder metal.

5. ASTM B88.

6. ASTM C564.



2.2 CAST IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS

.1 For above grade storm, sanitary and vent piping, minimum NPS 3, to CSA B70, ASTM A74 with heavy bituminous coating.

.2 For above grade storm, sanitary and vent piping 4" (100 mm) size and larger: Cast iron.

.3 For storm, sanitary and vent piping joints.

1. Mechanical Joints.

a. Neoprene of butyl rubber compression gaskets for all pipe connections: to ASTM C564-2009.

b. SS Clamps. 2.3 PUMPED DRAINAGE

.1 Pumped drains shall be galvanized steel. 2.4 SANITARY DRAINAGE AND VENTS

.1 Piping and fittings.

.2 For buried sanitary, storm, and vent piping:

1. ASTM D2665, ASTM D2949, ASTM B251. 2. ASTM D3034, ASTM F891.

3. CAN/CSA- B181.2 for PVC DWV or

4. CAN/CSA B182.1- for plastic DWV.

.3 Joints

1. Solvent weld for PVC: to ASTM D2564.

2. Solvent weld for ABS: to ASTM D2235.

3. For sizes above 4” (100 mm), provide Ring-Tite joints Canron Ring-Tite joints PVC

DR35 gravity sewer pipe, with locked in rubber ring sealing feature providing tight flexible seal. Spigot ends to be supplied complete with bevel.

.4 All PVC piping below grade shall be a minimum of SDR 35.



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install piping parallel and close to walls to conserve space, and to grade indicated, and to suit installation of related work.

.2 Apply two coats of asphalt paint to pipe laid in, or passing through concrete.

.3 Where piping passes through floor or wall below grade pack and seal in concrete complete

with Link Seal in accordance with Section 15010.

.4 PVC piping shall not be utilized above grade. The PVC piping shall convert to cast iron/copper prior to the point where it penetrates the floor slab.

.5 Provide venting to plumbing fixtures and fixture groups in accordance with the Ontario

Building Code - Plumbing Code and local authorities having jurisdiction.

.6 Install buried pipe on 6" (150 mm) bed of clean sand, shaped to accommodate hubs and fittings, to line and grade as indicated. Backfill with clean sand.

.7 Install piping parallel and close to walls to conserve space and to grade indicated, and to

suit the installation of related work.

.8 Apply solvent to male end of joints only.

.9 Pipe installation: Pipe shall be installed as specified and indicated on the drawings.

.10 The piping system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s current published installation procedures.

.11 Where piping passes through floor or wall below grade pack and seal in concrete in

accordance with Section 15010.

.12 Provide venting to all plumbing fixtures and fixture groups in accordance to the Ontario Building Code - Plumbing Code and local authorities having jurisdiction.

.13 If tests are required by an authority having jurisdiction, perform tests in presence of each

governing authority and obtain certification. Repeat tests as often as necessary to obtain certification.

.14 Test pressure shall not exceed 1-1/2 times the maximum rated pressure of the lowest

related element in the system.

.15 Remove all fittings which do not withstand test pressure, replace and retest.

.16 Eliminate leaks, or remove and refit defective parts.



3.2 TESTING

.1 The drainage and vent system shall be tested in accordance with the Ontario Building Code - Plumbing Code and tested in accordance with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction, perform tests in the presence of each governing authority and obtain certification. Repeat tests as often as necessary to obtain certification.

.2 Perform tests before piping is covered or concealed.

.3 Remove all fittings which will not withstand test pressure, and replace after test.

.4 Eliminate leaks, or remove and refit defective parts.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 15430-1 BARRIER FREE UPGRADES 490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.



.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1, as applicable.

.2 Conform to Section 15010 – Mechanical General Requirements, as applicable. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim: Section 15410.

.2 Plumbing Equipment: Section 15450. 1.3 REFERENCES

CAN3-B79-94 Floor Drains and Trench Drains PDI-G101 Testing and Rating Procedure for Grease Interceptors with

Appendix of Sizing and Installation Data PDI-WH201 Water Hammer Arrestors

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 15010 - Mechanical General Requirements.

.2 Indicate dimensions, construction details and materials for the following: floor drains,

cleanouts, water hammer arrestors, strainers, traps, trap seal primers. 1.5 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements.

.2 Data to include:

1. Description of plumbing specialties and accessories, giving manufacturers name, type,

model, year and capacity.

2. Details of operation, servicing, and maintenance.

3. Recommended spare parts list.



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

.1 Furnish plumbing and drainage specialties. Ancon catalogue numbers are specified to indicate quality and features required. Furnish sizes as shown on Drawings.

.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Ancron, Zurn, Empoco.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

.1 New floor drain shall be Zurn ZN415R (or approved equal from Wade and Jay R. Smith) c/w clamping devices and suitable for proposed floor installation. Complete installation shall be in accordance with flooring manufacturer’s instructions.

2.3 FLOOR DRAIN TRAPS AND PRIMERS

.1 Furnish each floor drain installation with a deep seal "P" trap unless otherwise shown.

.2 Furnish trap seal primer valves Ancon No. M3-810 with cast brass body, vacuum breaker and NPS 1/2 sweat connections.

.3 Where a floor drain trap is not within a reasonable distance from a plumbing fixture,

furnish an automatic flush tank for priming of trap, Crane No. 7-170 1/2 L, or American Standard No. AF-4104L, complete with automatic syphon, tank liner, concealed top cover, bottom supply and screw driver stop.

.4 As an alternative to automatic flush tanks for remote floor drains, furnish ZURN Model

Z1022 trap primers and distribution units, as supplied by S-M-S Ltd. 2.4 DRAINAGE CLEANOUTS

.1 Furnish drainage cleanout fittings in drainage piping at locations indicated on the Drawings, at base of each vertical stack or rainwater leader, and as required to comply with applicable plumbing code.

.2 For buried piping furnish flush floor type cast iron ferrule cleanout with push-on, MJ,

inside caulked or spigot connection outlet, closure plug and nickel brass frame and cover suitable for type of floor in which it is to be installed, e.g. tile, terrazzo, carpet, concrete, etc.

2.5 SHOCK ABSORBERS

.1 Size shock absorbers in accordance with P.D.I.-WH201.

Ancon “Shok-Gard” Zurn Z-1700 Enpoco HT Series



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with Canadian Plumbing Code, provincial codes and local authority having jurisdiction except where specified otherwise.

.2 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.

3.2 CLEANOUTS

.1 In addition to those required by code, and as indicated, install at base of all soil and waste stacks and rainwater leaders and where indicated.

.2 Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceable from below floor.

.3 Building drain cleanout and stack base cleanouts: line size to maximum NPS 4.

3.3 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

.1 Install on branch supplies to each fixture or group of fixtures and where indicated.

.2 Hot and cold water fixture outlets provided with a vertical air chamber, a minimum of 450 mm long. Air chamber of the same pipe dimension as the branch pipe diameter leading to the fixture, and located as close to the fixture as possible.

.3 Hot and cold water main branches 75 mm (3") diameter and under to 25 mm (1") diameter:

Provided with vertical air chambers of sizes and dimensions specified above, located at points where the pipe line changes direction through 90 degrees in horizontal plane, and at the top of all hot and cold water risers.

3.4 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

.1 Install trap seal primer valve in cold water supply line to nearest plumbing fixture (preferably a water closet) and run NPS 1/2 Type K copper piping to primer connection on floor drain body. Obtain Minister's Designee's approval for location of primer valves prior to installation.

.2 Install trap primer tank in truss space or other suitable location as directed by ORC

Designee, or as shown on Drawings.

.3 (Install in access pit as indicated). 3.5 COMMISSIONING

.1 After start-up, test, adjust and prove operation as indicated, to suit conditions.

.2 Clean out strainers periodically until clear.



.3 Clean out and prime all floor drain traps using trap seal primers or other means acceptable to the Canadian Plumbing Code.

.4 Prove freedom of movement of cleanouts.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. METALLIC DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 15801-1 BARRIER FREE UPGRADES 490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.




1.2 DESCRIPTION

.1 Ductwork and accessories for HVAC including the following:

1. Supply air, return air, outside air, exhaust, and relief systems. 1.3 DEFINTIONS

.1 SMACNA Standards as used in this specification means the HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.

.2 Seal or Sealing: Use of liquid or mastic sealant, with or without compatible tape overlay, or

gasketing of flanged joints, to keep air leakage at duct joints, seams and connections to an acceptable minimum.

.3 Duct Pressure Classification: SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and

Flexible.

.4 Exposed Duct: Exposed to view in a finished room, and/or exposed to weather. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Fire Safety Code: Comply with NFPA 90A.

.2 Duct System Construction and Installation: Referenced SMACNA Standards are the minimum acceptable quality.

.3 Duct Sealing, Air Leakage Criteria, and Air Leakage Tests: Ducts shall be sealed as per

duct sealing requirements of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual for duct pressure classes shown on the drawings.

.4 Duct accessories exposed to the air stream, such as dampers of all types (except smoke

dampers) and access openings, shall be of the same material as the duct or provide at least the same level of corrosion resistance.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit in accordance with Section 15010, Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Rectangular ducts



a. Schedules of duct systems, materials and selected SMACNA construction alternatives for joints, sealing, gage and reinforcement.

b. Sealants and gaskets.

c. Access doors. .2 Round and flat oval duct construction details:

1. Manufacturer's details for duct fittings.

2. Sealants and gaskets.

.3 Access sections.

.4 Volume dampers, back draft dampers.

.5 Upper hanger attachments.

.6 Fire dampers, fire doors, and smoke dampers with installation instructions.

.7 Sound attenuators, including pressure drop and acoustic performance.

.8 Flexible ducts and clamps, with manufacturer's installation instructions.

.9 Flexible connections.

1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

.1 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

.2 Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA):

1. 500D 98 Laboratory Method of Testing Dampers for Rating. 2. 500L-99 Laboratory Method of Testing Louvers for Rating.

.3 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A653-01 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip process.

2. A1011-02 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip Hot rolled Carbon structural, High-Strength Low- Alloy and High Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

3. B209 01 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 4. C1071-00 Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal

and Sound Absorbing Material). 5. E84-01 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.



.4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 90A-99 Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 2. 96-01 Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.

.5 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

1. 2nd Edition – 1995 HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. 2. 1st Edition - 1985 HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 3. 6th Edition – 1992 Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT MATERIAL

.1 General: Except for systems specified otherwise on drawings, construct ducts, casings, and accessories of galvanized sheet steel, ASTM A527, coating G90.

2.2 GALVANIZED STEEL – RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK

.1 G-90 coated galvanized of lock-forming grade conforming to ASTMA653 and A924 Standards. The minimal yield strength for steel sheet and reinforcements shall be 30,000 psi (207 kPa).

.2 Thickness: to ASHRAE and SMACNA.

.3 Fabrication: to ASHRAE and SMACNA.

.4 Joints: to ASHRAE and SMACNA or proprietary manufactured duct joint. Proprietary

manufactured flanged duct joint shall be considered to be a class B seal.

1. Standard of Acceptance: NamascoDuctmate; Exanno Nexus.

.5 Fittings

1. Fabrication: to SMACNA.

2. Radiused elbows: standard radius.

3. Square elbows: over 16" with double thickness vanes. Not to be used unless specifically shown on drawings.

4. Main supply duct branches with splitter damper. If splitter damper is not used, provide

branch and main duct balancing damper.

5. Sub branch duct with 45° entry and balancing damper on branch. .6 Transitions:

1. Diverging: 20° maximum included angle.



2. Converging: 30° maximum included angle.

.7 Offsets: radiussed elbows as indicated.

.8 Obstruction deflectors: maintain full cross-sectional area. Maximum included angles as for transitions.

2.3 SEALING CLASSIFICATION

.1 Sealing classification as follows:

Seal Class Sealing Requirement Applicable Static Pressure Construction

Class

Allowable Leakage Rate

A All traverse joints, longitudinal seams

and duct wall penetrations

4'' w.g. (1000 Pa) -4'' w.g. (-1000 Pa)

1% of total system design at system

operating pressure 4''(1000 Pa)

B All transverse joints and

longitudinal seams

Up to 3" w.g. (750 Pa) -3'' w.g. (-750 Pa) and

less

1% of total system design at 3'' w.g.

(750 Pa) C All transverse

joints only Up to 2" w.g. (500 Pa) -2'' w.g. (500 Pa) and

less

1.5% of total system design at 2'' w.g.

(500 Pa) D Not sealed Up to 1'' w.g. (250 Pa)

-1'' w.g. (-250 Pa) and less

5% of total system design at 1" w.g.

(250 Pa) 2.4 PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS

.1 Ductwork material shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA ratings for the following pressure classifications. Seal classifications shall be in accordance with the following table:

Ductwork Operating Pressure Seal

Classification Remarks

All supply ductwork Up to 2". w.g. (500 Pa)

B

All return ductwork Up to 1 '' w.g. (250 Pa)

B

All exhaust ductwork Up to -1'' w.g. (-250 Pa)

B

2.5 SEALANT AND TAPE

.1 Joint Sealing: Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, paragraph S1.9.



.2 Sealant: Elastomeric compound, gun or brush grade, maximum 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed (dry state) compounded specifically for sealing ductwork as recommended by the manufacturer. Generally provide liquid sealant, with or without compatible tape, for low clearance slip joints and heavy, permanently elastic, mastic type where clearances are larger. Oil base caulking and glazing compounds are not acceptable because they do not retain elasticity and bond.

.3 Tape: Use only tape specifically designated by the sealant manufacturer and apply only

over wet sealant. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used on bare metal or on dry sealant.

.4 Gaskets in Flanged Joints: Soft neoprene.

.5 Approved factory made joints such as DUCTMATE SYSTEM may be used. 2.6 DUCT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

.1 Follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

.2 Where specified, all ductwork shall be made liquid tight with continuous external weld for all seams and joints. Provide neoprene gaskets at flanged connections. Where ducts are not self-draining back to the equipment, provide low point drain pocket with copper drainpipe to sanitary sewer. Provide access door in side of duct at drain pockets.

.3 Casings and Plenums

1. Construct in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Section

6, including curbs, access doors, pipe penetrations, eliminators and drain pans. Access doors shall be hollow metal, insulated, with latches and door pulls, 500 mm (20 inches) wide by 1200-1350 mm (48-54 inches) high. Provide view port in the doors where shown. Provide drain for outside air louver plenum. Outside air plenum shall have exterior insulation. Drain piping shall be routed to the nearest floor drain.

.4 Volume Dampers

1. Opposed blade, multi louver type as detailed in SMACNA Standards. Refer to

SMACNA Detail Figure 2-12 for Single Blade and Figure 2-13 for Multi-blade Volume Dampers.

2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

.1 Strap hangers: of same material as duct but next sheet metal thickness heavier than duct.

.2 Hanger configuration: to ASHRAE and SMACNA. Maximum size duct supported by straphanger: 500 mm.

.3 Hangers: galvanized steel angle with black galvanized steel rods to ASHRAE and

SMACNA following table:



Duct Size (mm) Angle Size (mm) Rod Size (mm) Up to 750 25 x 25 x 3 6

751 to 1500 40 x 40 x 3 10 1501 to 2400 50 x 50 x 5 10 2401 and over 50 x 50 x 6 10

.4 Upper hanger attachments:

1. For concrete: manufactured concrete inserts.

a. Standard of Acceptance: Myatt fig 485.

2. For concrete after concrete pour:

a. Expanded concrete anchors shall be made of steel.

b. Powder actuated fasteners shall only be utilized for slabs that are thicker than

100 mm (4'') and shall not be utilized in lightweight aggregate concretes.

c. Holes for expanding fasteners shall be drilled either by a carbide bit or by the teeth on the fastener itself. Expansion shield shall be “set'' by driving it into the hole and expanding it with a conical plug.

.5 For steel joist: manufactured joist clamp or steel plate washer.

1. Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell fig 61 or 86 for joist clamps.

.6 For steel beams: manufactured beam clamps.

1. Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell fig. 60.

.7 For round ductwork the duct shall be supported as follows:

1. For duct dimensions 900 mm (36''), single hangers are acceptable.

2. For duct dimensions over 900 mm (36"), hanger rods shall be provided on both sides of

the duct.

3. Minimum hanger sizes shall be in accordance with table 4-2 of SMACNA. .8 Loading on trapeze bars shall be in accordance with Table 4-3 of SMACNA.

2.8 DUCT ACCESS DOORS, PANELS, AND SECTIONS

.1 Provide access doors, sized and located for maintenance work, upstream and downstream of:

1. Each duct mounted coil.



2. Each fire damper (for link service), smoke damper and automatic control damper.

3. Each duct mounted smoke detector. .2 Openings shall be as large as feasible in small ducts, 300 mm by 300 mm (12 inch by 12

inch) minimum where possible. Access sections in insulated ducts shall be double wall, insulated. Transparent shatterproof covers are preferred for uninsulated ducts.

.3 For rectangular ducts: Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Figure 2-

12).

.4 For round and flat oval duct: Refer to SMACNA HVAC duct Construction Standards (Figure 2-11).

2.9 FIRE DAMPERS

.1 Galvanized steel, interlocking blade type, UL listing and label, 1 1/2 hour rating, 70°C (160°F) fusible line, 100 percent free opening with no part of the blade stack or damper frame in the air stream.

.2 Fire dampers in wet air exhaust shall be of stainless steel construction, all others may be

galvanized steel.

.3 Provide sleeves and mounting angles, minimum 1.9 mm (14 gage), required to provide installation equivalent to the damper manufacturer's UL test installation.

.4 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions conforming to ULC rating test.

.5 Combination fire and smoke dampers: Multi louver or curtain type units meeting all

requirements of both dampers shall be used where shown and may be used at the Contractor's option where applicable.

.6 Standard of Acceptance: Nailor, Ruskin.

2.10 OPERATING DAMPERS

.1 Opposed or Parallel blade type. Two position dampers to be parallel, modulating dampers to be opposed blade type.

.2 Damper frame shall be of extruded aluminum not less than 0.08" (2.03 mm) in thickness.

Damper frame to be 4" (101.6 mm) deep and shall be insulated with Styrofoam on four sides. Entire frame shall be thermally broken by means of polyurethane resin pockets, complete with thermal cuts.

.3 Blades to be of extruded aluminum, internally insulated with expanded polyurethane foam

and shall be thermally broken. Complete blade shall have an insulating factor of R-2.29 and a temperature index of 55.



.4 Blade and frame seals shall be of extruded silicon and be secured in an integral slot within the aluminum extrusions.

.5 Bearings to be comprised of a Celcon inner bearing fixed to a 7/16" aluminum hexagon

blade pin rotating within a polycarbonate outer bearing inserted in frame.

.6 Linkage hardware shall be installed in frame side and be constructed of aluminum and corrosion resistant, zinc and nickel plated steel, complete with cup point trunnion screws for slip proof grip.

.7 Dampers to be designed for operation in temperatures ranging between - 40°F and 212°F (-

40°C to 100°C).

.8 Damper actuator shall be provided by the Controls Contractor.

.9 Performance: leakage in closed position to be less than 4.9 cfm/ft2 against 4” differential static pressure at -40°F.

.10 Air leakage through a 48” x 48” (1220 mm x 1220 mm) damper shall not exceed 4.12

cfm/ft2 against 4” w.g. differential static pressure at standard air. Standard air leakage data to be certified under the AMCA certified ratings program.

.11 Pressure drop of a fully open 48” x 48” (1220 mm x1220 mm) damper shall not exceed

0.03” w.g. at 1000 fpm.

.12 Dampers shall be made to size and shall not be limited to standard sizes.

.13 Standard of Acceptance: Tamco Air Foil Series 9000 BF, Ruskin CDTI-50 BF Series, Arrow AFDTI-25LT insulated.

2.11 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS

.1 Provide standard product to meet capacity, throw, noise level, throat, and outlet velocity.

.2 Where grilles, registers and diffusers penetrate fire walls and fire partitions, provide approved steel sleeve secured to structure in accordance with NFPA 90A-2009 and required fire damper.

.3 Frames:

1. Steel: primed cold rolled steel with exposed welded joints and mitred corners.

2. Aluminum: extruded satin finish with mechanical fasteners and mitred corners.

3. Provide plaster frames as plaster stops where set into plaster or gypsum board.

4. Provide concealed fasteners and balancing operators in all finished areas.



5. Final finish to be selected by Architect from standard manufacturer finishes at shop drawing stage.

.4 Sizes and capacities: as indicated in the schedule.

.5 Standard of Acceptance: EH Price, Titus, Nailor.

.6 Supply Grilles and Registers

1. 1-1/4" (32 mm) border double deflection with airfoil shape horizontal face and vertical

rear bars, opposed blade dampers (OBD) where indicated with concealed manual operator and gaskets.

.7 Return and Exhaust Grilles

1. 1-1/4" (32 mm) border, single deflection, air foil shape, horizontal bar type 35E max

turn up, when shown on the schedule opposed blade damper with concealed operator and rubber sealing strips.

2. Egg crate to be ½" x ½" x 1" (12 x 12 x 25), type as per schedule. .8 Diffusers

1. Diffusers shall consist of a precision formed back cone of one piece seamless

construction which incorporates a round inlet collar of sufficient length for connecting rigid or flexible duct.

2. Refer to schedule for finish.

3. As indicated on the schedule, Circular, square or perforated type, having adjustable fixed pattern, and volume control dampers with flow straightening devices and blank-off quadrants.

4. For plaque diffusers an inner plaque assembly shall be incorporated that drops no more

than 1/4" below the ceiling plane to assure proper air distribution performance. The inner plaque assembly shall be completely removable from the diffuser face to allow full access to any dampers or other ductwork components located near the diffuser neck.

2.12 INSTALLATION

.1 Fabricate and install ductwork and accessories in accordance with referenced SMACNA Standards.

.2 Drawings show the general layout of ductwork and accessories but do not show all required

fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect ducts to equipment, boxes, diffusers, grilles, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Fabricate ductwork based on field measurements. Provide all necessary fittings and offsets at no additional cost to the Owner.



Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories on ceiling grid. Duct sizes on the drawings are inside dimensions which shall be altered by Contractor to other dimensions with the same air handling characteristics where necessary to avoid interferences and clearance difficulties.

.3 Provide duct transitions, offsets and connections to dampers, coils, and other equipment in

accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section II. Provide streamliner, when an obstruction cannot be avoided and must be taken in by a duct. Repair galvanized areas with galvanizing repair compound.

.4 Supply and install volume control dampers on all branch take-offs (applicable to supply,

return and exhaust ductwork) whether shown on the drawing or not.

.5 Provide bolted construction and tie rod reinforcement in accordance with SMACNA Standards.

.6 Construct casings, eliminators, and pipe penetrations in accordance with SMACNA

Standards, Chapter 6. Design casing access doors to swing against air pressure so that pressure helps to maintain a tight seal.

.7 Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Chapter 4.

.8 Install fire dampers in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to conform to the

installation used for the rating test.

.9 Seal openings around duct penetrations of floors and fire rated partitions with fire stop material as required by NFPA 90A.

.10 Where diffusers, registers, and grilles cannot be installed to avoid seeing inside the duct,

paint the inside of the duct with flat black paint to reduce visibility.

.11 Control Damper Installation

1. Provide necessary blank off plates required to install dampers that are smaller than duct size. Provide necessary transitions required to install dampers larger than duct size.

2. Assemble multiple sections dampers with required interconnecting linkage and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors.

3. Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and provide air

volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation, and affix and seal permanently in place, only after stratification problem has been eliminated.

4. Install all damper control/adjustment devices on stand-offs to allow complete coverage

of insulation. .12 Air Flow Measuring Devices (AFMD): Install units with minimum straight run distances,

upstream and downstream as recommended by the manufacturer.



.13 Protection and Cleaning: Adequately protect equipment and materials against physical damage. Place equipment in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply for repair or replacement, as determined by the Consultant. Protect equipment and ducts during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both inside and outside before operation and painting. When new ducts are connected to existing ductwork, clean both new and existing ductwork by mopping and vacuum cleaning inside and outside before operation.

2.13 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS AND REPAIR

.1 Ductwork leak test shall be performed for the entire air distribution supply and return system including fans, coils and filter section designated as static pressure class 750 Pa (3 inch w.g.) and above.

.2 All supply ductwork less than 500 Pa (2 inch w.g.) shall also be tested to the air distribution

equipment or terminal device (where applicable).

.3 Test procedure, apparatus and report shall conform to SMACNA Leakage Test manual. The maximum leakage rate allowed is 4 percent of the design air flow rate.

.4 All ductwork shall be leak tested first before enclosed in a shaft or covered in other

inaccessible areas.

.5 All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Consultant and the TAB agency. The Test and Balance agency shall measure and record duct leakage and report to the Consultant and identify leakage source with excessive leakage.

.6 If any portion of the duct system tested fails to meet the permissible leakage level, the

Contractor shall rectify sealing of ductwork to bring it into compliance and shall retest it until acceptable leakage is demonstrated to the Consultant.

.7 All tests and necessary repairs shall be completed prior to insulation or concealment of

ductwork.

.8 Make sure all openings used for testing flow and temperatures by TAB Contractor are sealed properly.

PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTENT YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 16000 BARRIER FREE UPGRADES 490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.


CONTENT

SECTION TITLE 16000 Electrical Specifications Content 16010 Electrical General Requirements 16050 Basic Materials and Methods 16700 Fire Alarm Panel Replacement

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS





PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Division 1, General Requirements, is a part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated

here.

1.2 APPLICATION

.1 This section applies to and is a part of all Sections of Division 16.

1.3 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Sections of these Electrical Specifications are not intended to delegate functions nor work

and supply to any specific trade and the work shall include all labour, materials, equipment

and tools required for a complete and working installation as described.

1.4 INTENT

.1 Mention herein or indication on drawings of articles, materials, operations or methods

requires: supply of each item mentioned or indicated, of quality, or subject to qualifications

noted; installation according to conditions stated and; performance of each operation

prescribed with furnishing of necessary labour, equipment and incidentals for Electrical

Trade, Division 16.

.2 Supplementary to definitions established are: `Supply' shall mean furnishing to site in

location required or directed complete with accessory parts. Ìnstall' shall mean set in place

and secured or affixed to building structure as noted or directed. `Provide' shall mean

supply and install as each is described.

.3 Where used, wordings such as "approved, to approval, as directed, permitted, permission,

accepted, acceptance", shall mean: approved, directed, permitted, and accepted, by

authorized representative of the Owner.

.4 Equipment and installation provided under this Division shall conform to applicable

standards and regulations of the following organizations:

Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

Ontario Electrical Safety Code (OESC)

Electrical Safety Authority (ESA)

Ontario Building Code (OBC)

1.5 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Workmanship and method of installation shall conform to best standards and practice.

Where required by local or other By-Laws and Regulations, tradesmen shall be licensed in

their trade.






1.6 TEMPORARY & TRIAL USAGE

.1 Temporary or trial usage of any equipment or materials shall not be construed as evidence

of acceptance of same and no claim for damage shall be made for injury to or breaking of

any part of such work which may be so used.

1.7 BY-LAWS & REGULATIONS

.1 Work shall conform to the latest rules, regulations and definitions of the Canadian

Electrical Code and applicable Municipal and Provincial Codes and Regulations, and with

requirements of other authorities having jurisdiction in the area where work is to be

performed. Minor changes required by an authority having jurisdiction shall be carried out

without change to the Contract amount. Standards established by drawings and

specifications shall not be reduced by applicable codes or regulations.

1.8 PERMITS & FEES

.1 File Contract Drawings with proper authorities and obtain their approval of installation and

permits for same before proceeding with work. Prepare and submit necessary detailed shop

drawings as required by Authorities.

.2 Pay all fees in connection with examination of drawings, permits, inspections and final

certificate of approval.

1.9 CERTIFICATES

.1 Finish necessary certificates as evidence that work installed conforms to laws and

regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.10 GUARANTEE-WARRANTY

.1 Guarantee and warranty requirements of the Contract shall apply except for incandescent

lamps which shall be guaranteed for a period of ninety days after acceptance by the

Owners.

1.11 SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND JOB CONDITIONS

.1 Electrical Drawings do not show structural and related details. Take information involving

accurate measurement of building from building drawings, or at building. Make, without

additional charge, any necessary changes or additions to electrical work or equipment

locations to accommodate structural conditions. Equipment locations may be altered by

Engineer without extra charge provided change is made before installation and does not

necessitate major additional material.






.2 Examine site and local conditions. Examine carefully all drawings and complete

specifications to ensure that work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown. Before

commencing work, examine the work of other Sections and report at once any defect or

interference affecting the work, its completion or warranty. No allowance will be make

later for any expense incurred through failure to make these examinations or to report any

such discrepancies in writing.

.3 Relocate equipment and/or material installed but not coordinated with work of other

Sections as directed, without extra charge.

.4 Furnish "built-in" items in ample time and give necessary information and assistance in

connection with building-in of same. Notify Section concerned in writing of size and

location of recesses, openings and chases at least 48 hours before walls are erected, floors

poured and similar work.

1.12 TENDER & SUBSTITUTIONS

.1 Tender shall be submitted based on specified manufacturer or "approved manufacturers"

and equipment only.

.2 Substitutions for materials may be proposed by submitting details with Supplementary

Tender Form together with price difference to Stipulated Sum Tender amount under the

following conditions:

1. Product name shall be stated together with price difference, if any, to stipulated sum for

each substitution proposed.

2. Material or equipment substituted shall not exceed space requirements allocated. Extra

charges will not be allowed for any additional installation cost resulting from

acceptance of proposed substitutions.

3. If an item of material specified is unobtainable or unavailable to meet proposed

completion, state in tender the proposed substitute and amount to be added or deducted

for its use. Extra charges will not be allowed for substitutions after the Contract has

been awarded.

1.13 INTERFERENCE DRAWINGS

.1 Prepare and submit composite interference drawings if required to avoid and/or resolve

conflict of trades and to co-ordinate work of Electrical Division with all other trades.

.2 Interference drawings shall indicate exact arrangements, of all areas and equipment to scale

with dimensions.

.3 Co-operate with work of Division 15 and provide data requested and as required in the

preparation of interference drawings for the work of Division 15.






.4 Make interference drawings in conjunction with all parties and trades concerned showing

sleeves and openings and passage of electrical work through building structure. Drawings

shall also show inserts, special hangers and other features to indicate routing through

confined spaces, installation of equipment in such areas.

.5 Provide detail drawings, fully dimensioned, of equipment in Boiler and Mechanical

Equipment Rooms, Electrical Rooms, Fan Rooms, etc. Base equipment drawings on

approved Shop Drawings and include, but do not necessarily limit to, details pertaining to

access, clearances, sleeves, connections, etc.

.6 Provide detailed drawings of pulling pits, equipment bases, anchors, floor and roof curbs,

etc., pertaining to Electrical work.

1.14 SHOP DRAWING MATERIAL & LISTS

.1 Prepare and submit shop drawings and lists of materials for review in accordance with

Architectural Sections. Make submittals of more than two pages in booklet form.

Individual and loose drawings will not be accepted for review.

.2 Prior to equipment fabrication, delivery or installation, submit complete lists of materials

proposed, indicating manufacturer, catalogue numbers and complete performance data.

.3 Review of Shop Drawings by Consultant is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance

with general design concept. This review shall not mean that Architect and/or Engineer

approves detail design inherent in Shop Drawings, responsibility for which shall remain

with Contractor and such review shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for

meeting all requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for dimensions

to be confirmed and correlated at site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication

processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of work

with all trades.

.4 Shop drawings transmitted via facsimile (fax) machines, or copies of same, will not be

accepted for review.

1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS

.1 Conform to General Requirements. Maintain at least 2 sets of documents and clearly mark

on same as job progresses, changes and deviations from work shown so that on completion

Owner will have records of exact location of ducts and equipment and record of material

and equipment changes.

.2 Record all homerun conduits, junction boxes for complete lighting, power and systems on

As-Built Drawings.

.3 Contractor shall obtain clean set of prints from Consultant at start of Contract Work and

shall keep these prints up-to-date at jobsite, accurately recording all changes made on

project and locating all services, equipment, etc. which may have been shown only

diagrammatically on Contract Documents.






.4 Contractor shall ensure that as-built information is accurately recorded and shall check same.

As-Built drawings shall be reviewed with Consultant at each jobsite meeting.

.5 Upon completion of Contract Work, prior to Substantial Performance inspection and after

final review with Consultants, Contractor shall neatly transfer recorded information and make

final As-Built submission to Consultant in the following form:

• One (1) set of clean, legible prints.

• Updated ACAD R2004 drawings.

.6 Consultants shall be responsible for reviewing As-Built information provided by

Contractor. Revise drawings to suit any comments until acceptable for submission to

owner.

1.16 JOB SITE WORK SHOP AND STORAGE

.1 Supply job site office, workshop, tools, scaffolds and material storage as required to

complete the work of this Division. Location of temporary buildings, use of space on site or

within building shall be to later direction.

1.17 PROTECTION

.1 Securely plug or cap open ends of electrical raceways or equipment to prevent entry of dirt,

dust, debris, water, snow or ice. Clean all equipment inside and outside before testing.

.2 Equipment stored on site shall be protected from weather and kept dry and clean at all

times. Take care to avoid corrosion of metal parts.

.3 Protect work installed from damage. Secure all unfinished or loose work to prevent

movement.

1.18 INSTRUCTIONS TO OPERATOR

.1 Instruct Building Operators in repair, maintenance and operation of Electrical Systems and

associated equipment.

.2 Supply three (3) full Operation and Maintenance Instructions each in stiff cover, three-ring

binder suitably indexed, separated and labeled. Operate each item of equipment in presence

of Operators to ensure understanding of working parts and function of each item of

equipment. Supply one complete set of "Reviewed" Shop Drawings in separate hard cover

binder suitably separated and labelled for Owner's use.

.3 Operation and maintenance manuals shall be carefully prepared in co-operation with

equipment manufacturers and include miscellaneous parts necessary for proper, efficient

operation of all equipment.






.4 Manuals shall also include spare parts list for each type of equipment, component, control

and device installed together with manufacturer's name and address so such items can be

suitably identified and purchased. Include list of recommended spares.

1.19 CLEANING, LUBRICATION AND ADJUSTMENT

.1 Immediately prior to completion of work:

1. Remove all dust, dirt and other foreign matter from internal surfaces of enclosed

electrical apparatus and equipment.

2. Remove all temporary protective coverings and coatings, temporary labels.

3. Clean, repair, lubricate and adjust all mechanism and moveable parts of apparatus and

equipment leaving it in new condition and operating properly.

4. Balance demand loads for service and distribution feeders within 5 percent upon

completion of work and after the building is in full operation.

1.20 INSPECTION & TESTING

.1 Systems, equipment, and all major items of material shall be tested to the satisfaction of the

Architect, and as required to establish compliance with plans and specifications, and with

the requirements for the Supply and Inspection Authorities.

.2 Faulty and defective equipment shall be replaced with new materials. Conductors which are

found to be shorted or grounded, or to have less than proper insulation resistance, shall be

replaced with new conductors.

.3 Tests shall include but are not limited to the following:

1. Test of secondary voltage cables shall include megger tests to establish proper

insulation resistance, and phase-to-ground resistance of cables.

2. Proper functioning of all systems.

3. Polarity tests - to establish proper polarity connections to all sockets and receptacles.

4. Test of system neutral to establish proper insulation resistance and isolation of neutral

from ground except for required ground connection at Service.

1.21 CERTIFICATE OF TESTS

.1 When work is complete submit three copies of test results and a signed statement listing all

tests that have been performed as required by specifications and manufacturer's

instructions.






1.22 COMPLETION

.1 Provide receipts from designated representative of Owner for portable and loose materials

(e.g. spare fuses, fixture re-lamping equipment and the like).

.2 Provide copy of final inspection certificate from Electrical Inspection Authority and fire

alarm verification report.

.3 Provide manufacturers corrected "as built" shop drawings for all major electrical items and

systems, including all shop drawings returned for modifications.

1.23 ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING BUILDING

.1 Note that certain alterations and structural changes are to be made to existing building.

Architectural drawings and site are to be examined to determine extent of alterations

affecting existing electrical systems. Where existing conduits and wires run through areas

to be altered, to feed other parts of existing building, they shall be re-routed and

reconnected to maintain their original function. Drawings do not necessarily indicate

outlets, switches, receptacles, and the like, and other electrical equipment which are

required to be relocated or abandoned. Provide decorative blank cover plates for obsolete

outlet boxes remaining.

.2 Electrical services and auxiliary services (fire alarm, P.A. intercom, and the like) shall be

maintained continuously without interruption. Interruptions to services shall be confined to

periods of time to be designated by Architect, and/or Owner’s designated representative.

Include in tender for temporary connections, overtime labour charges, and such related

allowances in order to conform to these conditions.

.3 The Electrical Contractor is responsible for removal, reinstallation, cutting and patching of

ceiling and walls as required in the existing building.

.4 Cutting directly related to electrical work, regardless of whether such work occurs in new

or existing construction, shall be coordinated and paid for by Electrical Subcontractor

involved, under supervision of Contractor.

.5 Where existing electrical items or systems are demolished and removed from existing

construction assemblies, Electrical Subcontractor involved shall be responsible for infilling

entire hole left after removal of item or system with new construction assembly to match

existing. Where new electrical items or systems are installed through existing construction

assemblies, Electrical Subcontractor involved shall be responsible for properly sized and

accurate cutting of existing construction assembly to allow installation of new work.

1.24 PROJECT SPECIFIC NOTES

.1 Obtain all approvals from public authorities having jurisdiction prior to commencing any

work. Include, in the tender price, for all ESA permit and inspection fees. Arrange for and

attend all inspections required as per requirements of the electrical safety authority and the

building department.






.2 Examine architectural drawings and specifications and all contract documents before

proceeding with the work. Any discrepancies between the drawings and specifications of

all disciplines must be referred to the architect before any affected work is commenced.

.3 The electrical contractor shall furnish all labour, material, tools, equipment, etc. required to

complete all work shown on the drawings and as specified in the contract documents. The

work shall be performed in accordance with rules and regulations of all authorities having

legal jurisdiction over the work. This contractor shall provide any small items of work not

specifically called for but required to complete the intended installation and/or required to

achieve the desired intent or functional utility.

.4 Perform all work in full accordance with the Ontario building code, Ontario electrical

safety code, TDSB standards and good practices and the requirements of all other

authorities having jurisdiction. All work performed by this division shall be done in

accordance with all manufacturer's recommendations. Obtain all available manufacturer's

recommendations and comply.

.5 All cutting, patching, coring, scanning, xraying, making good and fire stopping required for

the work of this division shall be carried out by this division. The electrical contractor is

responsible for and shall pay for any and all damage to the building and/or surrounding

area incurred by work of this division.

.6 Review the designated substances survey provided by the board in detail prior to

commencing any work.

.7 The electrical contractor must review and submit shop drawings for the proposed door

hardware in conjunction with the general contractor to the architect and electrical

consultant prior to ordering. Order only upon receipt of approval. Order, supply and install

as per all comments.

.8 All materials used throughout shall be new, of best quality, C.S.A. approved, and of one

manufacturer. Wherever trade names are not used to describe materials, these materials

shall be of the best available quality. Obtain and pay for special ESA inspections of

specified non-C.S.A. electrical equipment.

.9 Provide all wiring, raceways, electrical boxes, and such components as required for a

complete and operational installation.

.10 All conduit shall be rigid steel or EMT with gland watertight connectors and compression

type couplings, unless otherwise noted. Exposed raceways in finished areas shall be

wiremold channels installed neatly in appearance, run parallel to building lines, and

concentric right angle bends only shall be used. Exterior exposed conduit shall be rigid

galvanized steel. Supply and install access doors as necessary due to the proposed work.

All access panel ratings shall match that of the surface in which it is being installed.

.11 All wiring shall be of minimum #12 gauge copper, except as otherwise noted. All wiring

shall be 600 volt type rw90. All wiring shall be run in conduit from the source to the load.






BX cable may be used where permitted by code in ceiling space for final connections only

and for a maximum length of 5'. Maximum voltage drop shall not exceed 2 percent.

.12 Coordinate with all other trades present on site throughout the full course of construction.

Lay out of all work so as not to conflict with the work of other trades. Carry out work

promptly which may interfere with the work and/or schedule of any other trades.

.13 After completion of the work, provide the consultant with a set of 'as-built' record drawings

in pdf format prior to submission to the owner. Incorporate all changes in the pdf drawings.

.14 Alterations and additions: contractors shall note that this contract is an alteration to an

existing building and as such the contractor shall thoroughly investigate the existing

electrical installation and electrical, mechanical, structural, and architectural conditions

prior to pricing and construction.

.15 Demolition: remove all exposed conduits, branch wiring, outlets, etc. from surfaces being

demolished.

.16 Cleanup and garbage: the contractor is responsible for maintaining as clean of a work area

as possible during construction. The contractor is responsible to clean-up and remove tools

from the site at the end of every working day. Disposal of all redundant materials, devices,

and equipment is the responsibility of the contractor on a daily basis.

.17 All work shall be done with minimum possible interruption to the existing building systems

and in the time schedule permitted by the school board. Consult with the project supervisor

prior to pricing. Complete the project within the allocated schedule.

.18 Paint all exposed conduit and backboxes, inside and outside of the building, to match the

surrounding colour. Minimize exterior conduit run where feasible.

.19 All backboxes installed indoors shall be wiremold or approved equal. All backboxes

installed outside shall be of cast aluminum finish.

.20 For all panels where new circuits are added, provide a new typed panel directory based on

the new loads. Incorporate all existing circuit information from the existing panel directory

on site in the new panel directory.

1.25 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS

.1 Coordinate with the General Contractor to submit a consolidated copy of Closeout

Documents, in which all Electrical Closeout Documents too shall be included. Documents

shall be provided in one (1) hard copy (binder) format and three (3) electronic CD/USB

formats. Electrical Closeout Documents shall include:

1. Electrical Contractor Warranty Letter.

2. ESA Inspection Certificate.

3. ESA ‘Final Requested’ Certificate

4. All Project Shop Drawings.

5. O&M Manuals for all major equipment installed for the project.






6. Emergency Lighting Letter.

7. Fire Alarm CAN/ULC-S524 Installer Letter.

8. Fire Alarm Verification.

9. As-Built Drawings.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS YORK MILLS COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE 16050-1 BARRIER FREE UPGRADES 490 YORK MILLS ROAD, NORTH YORK.


PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Conform to Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements. 1.2 MATERIALS

.1 Materials shall be new, of Canadian manufacture where available, first quality and uniform throughout. Submit tender based on the use of materials and equipment specified, or on the listed acceptable alternate equipment as further detailed.

.2 Electrical materials shall be C.S.A. approved and be so labeled. Material not C.S.A.

approved shall receive acceptance for installation by Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) Special Inspections Branch before delivery, and modifications and charges required for such acceptance shall be included in work of this Section. Material shall not be installed or connected to the source of electrical power until approval is obtained.

.3 Confirm capacity, ratings and characteristics of equipment items being provided to supply

power to equipment provided under other Sections of the work. Resolve discrepancies before such items are purchased.

1.3 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE

.1 Acceptance of materials installed presumes that materials have not been damaged or exposed to conditions that would adversely affect performance and life expectancy.

.2 If in the opinion of the Consultant, materials have sustained damage, or have been exposed

to abnormal conditions it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to have such tests performed as deemed necessary by the Consultant to establish condition and therefore, acceptability of installed materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS

.1 Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 45.

.2 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 83. Connectors and couplings to be forged steel and rain tight in sprinklered areas. Connectors to have factory-installed insulated throats.

.3 Rigid PVC conduit shall comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 136.

.4 Watertight flexible conduit: "Sealtite" PVC jacketed flexible steel with Hubbell-Kellum

strain relief grips; shall comply with CSA Standard C22.2 No. 56.



.5 Surface wall-mounted raceways shall be Wiremold No. 4000 metallic type complete with two channels and all necessary fittings, closers, device modules, etc. Wiremold or approved equal only.

2.2 WIRE & CABLE

.1 Branch wire and cable shall comprise copper conductors, sized as noted, rated 75 deg. C., 600 volt minimum flame retardant insulation, and CSA approved for application.

.2 Wire and cable installed in conduit shall be PVC insulated Type TWH - Flame retardant

and comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 75.

.3 Use Electrovert "Z-Type" code markers for control & communication conductors.

.4 All branch wiring shall be RW90. 2.3 DEVICES

.1 Wiring devices unless otherwise specified herein, or noted, shall be as manufactured by Hubbell, Leviton or Pass & Seymour.

.2 Switches for 120 volt branch lighting circuits, generally shall be A.C. "Quiet Type" rated

20 Ampere, 120 Volt, totally enclosed phenolic housing Hubbell 1200 Series, beige toggle handle.

.3 Double Pole lighting switches shall be connected to 2 pole circuit breakers.

.4 Key-operated switches shall be Hubbell 1221-L Series of the types listed above, except

key-operated, and shall be keyed-alike.

.5 Standard 15 Ampere, 125 volt duplex receptacles generally shall be specification grade Hubbell Cat. No.5262, beige, CSA #5-15R.

.6 Receptacles with integral ground fault interrupter shall be Hubbell No. GF-5252 or

approved equal.

.7 Service receptacle shall be Hubbell No. 5262-RD. 2.4 DEVICES-SPECIALIZED

.1 Flush floor boxes shall be Hubbell Cat. No. 3SFB-SSC 3-service box complete with devices shown on drawings.

.2 Provide low-voltage lighting control, as detailed.



2.5 DEVICE COVER PLATES

.1 Switch and receptacle and other device faceplates for flush mounted devices, generally shall be single or multi-gang as required, type 301, stainless steel, #4 brushed finish with removable protective covering.

.2 Weatherproof enclosures for outdoor receptacles shall be P & S 4600 with 4600-26

Mounting Plate, duplex ground fault receptacles and two #4609 Keys.

.3 Cover plates for other devices such as flush fan controls, telephone, etc., shall be stainless steel to match above.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS

.1 Approximate locations of electrical equipment, fixtures switches, outlets, and the like, are given on the drawings. Refer to the architectural drawings and room elevations for application. In absence of definite detail exact location of outlets shall be determined on site as work progresses.

.2 Device plates shall cover opening left for outlet box, and plates shall be attached to boxes

in an approved manner. Outlets and fixtures are to be located symmetrically, (i.e. centered in wall panels, ceiling panels or tiles, columns, between and above doors and the like).

.3 The right is reserved to alter the location of equipment and outlets a distance of up to 3

metres without involving a change to the Contract amount, providing notice is given prior to installation.

3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

.1 Mounting heights of outlets, top of outlet to finished floor, except for exposed masonry construction, shall generally be as follows:

Lighting/Exhaust Fann Switches - 1100 mm (to the center of the switch) Receptacles - 400 mm above finished floor Television Outlets - 400 mm Telephone Outlets - 400 mm Manual Fire Alarm Stations - 1200 mm Automatic Fire Alarm Stations - ceiling Panelboards - 2000 mm to top of trim for standard panels. Clocks - 2000 mm or 300 mm below ceiling. Thermostats - 1200 mm Fire Alarm Audible Temporal Pattern Horn/Strobes – 2300 mm



3.3 HOLES & DRILLING

.1 Pneumatic hammers and percussion drills are prohibited.

.2 Where not sleeved, make holes through concrete walls and floors by core-drill only. Obtain Architect's approval before drilling.

.3 Seal holes and sleeves through floors to serve as water dam.

3.4 CUTTING & PATCHING

.1 Layout and install work in advance of other Sections for all new work. Bear all costs resulting from failing to comply with this requirement.

.2 Pay for cutting and patching and making good as required for work of this Division by

reason of faulty or late work. Employ appropriate trades already engaged on the site to perform such cutting, patching and making good existing walls, floor, ceiling, etc. Before commencing, obtain Architect's approval for extent and nature of cutting. Make good, disturbed surfaces to the Architect's approval.

3.5 HANGERS & INSERTS

.1 Provide necessary hangers and inserts for work of this Division.

.2 Fasten to cast-in place concrete by suitable drilled or cast-in inserts.

.3 Fasten to structural steel using bolts or welded fasteners.

.4 Do not use wood, chain, wire lashings, strap or grappler bar hangers except where noted or detailed.

.5 Support fixtures independently of ceiling suspension systems. Provide additional supports

as required, which shall be fastened to building structure steel members, joists, beams, etc., but not metal pan or roof decking. Material for additional supports and their installation shall comply with requirements of U.L.C. Refer to "List of Equipment and Materials" Vol. 2, and "Supplement" for application to rated assemblies.

.6 Support outlet and junction boxes independently of the conduits running to them where

required by electrical code and where deemed necessary by the Architect, use steel angle brackets or steel rods to support outlets and fixtures, to the building structure.

.7 Drilled fastenings to concrete shall be self-drilling concrete anchors, Phillips 'Red-Head' or

approved equal. The maximum weight per fastening shall not exceed 25% of manufacturer's 'pull-out' load data.



.8 Surface mounted or stem suspended fixtures fastened to non-removable ceilings, 2 hr. fire rated ceiling assemblies, or mounted between metal suspension of exposed T-grid ceilings, shall be provided with minimum of two points of attachment for each 300 mm x 1200 mm (1' x 4') luminaire, using metal `channel-bar' fastened to building structure. Attach luminaires to `channel-bar' by means of threaded steel rods. Channel-bar shall be adequately supported and of a construction to prevent deflection under load, as selected from manufacturer's published data, and to Architect's approval. `Channel-bar' shall be Unistrut, Burndy, Flexibar, Cantrough, or Canadian Strut Products or approved equal.

.9 Use support clips (e.g. Caddy Type IDS) for suspension of fixtures attached to exposed

T-grid ceilings. Clips shall be supported directly from building structure and not from suspended ceiling system.

.10 Provide recessed fluorescent fixtures with support frames, and plastering frames where

applicable.

.11 Chain where permitted and specified for the installation of fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be No. 4, 2 mm (.080") Tenso Pattern coil steel chain, plated with a strength of 82 kg (180 lbs.) as manufactured by Dominion Chain Co. Ltd. or approved equal. Where 'S' hooks are used with chain, they shall be No. 6 type with open strength of 82 kg (180 lbs.) minimum. Attachment of chain at both ends of support shall develop full strength of chain.

.12 Support outlet boxes, junction boxes, conduit and the like, mounted on exposed steel deck

roofing by means of self-tapping minimum #10 gauge screws, secured through bottom member of deck corrugation. Do not pierce top of steel deck.

3.6 PAINTING

.1 Hangers, support framing and all equipment fabricated from ferrous metals which are not protected with zinc or other suitable corrosion-resistant finish shall have at least one coat of a corrosion-resistant paint applied before shipment or immediately on arrival at the site.

.2 After installation, touch up all scratches, chips, other damage and defects in paint, using

zinc chromate primer or paint or special enamels as necessary to match the original.

.3 Finish and colour of all equipment shall be coordinated to provide uniform appearance.

.4 Painting of conduits and supports and other exposed surface work will be done under Painting Section except as noted. Install materials in time to be painted together with mounting surfaces.

.5 Do not paint over nameplates.

.6 Refer to other Sections for special paint finishes of equipment.



3.7 NAMEPLATES & SCHEDULES

.1 Identify electrical equipment supplied under this Division with 3 mm thick black laminated plastic nameplate to indicate equipment controlled to provide instruction or warning. Fasten each plate with two chrome plated screws. Lettering shall be 6 mm high for small devices such as control stations and at least 13 mm high for all other equipment. Submit a list of proposed nameplates for approval before manufacture.

.2 Provide panelboards with typewritten schedules identifying outlets and equipment

controlled by each branch circuit including existing panels being changed. Protect schedules with non-flammable clear plastic.

.3 Identify junction boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduits and the like, provided for future

extension, indicating their function (e.g. power, fire alarm, communication).

.4 Verify room names and numbers prior to listing on nameplates and schedules. 3.8 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING & FEEDER CABLES

.1 Provide branch circuit wiring, conduits and feeders as required for Lighting, Power and Auxiliary Systems. Separate conduit systems shall be provided for feeder, lighting and power systems, for exit light system and auxiliary communication systems.

3.9 CONDUIT, RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS

.1 Wire and cable shall be installed in conduit as follows:

Rigid galvanized steel conduit with threaded IPS fittings to be used: 1. Where noted and required by regulations. 2. Where subject to mechanical damage. 3. For all exposed conduit work.

.2 Conduit embedded in concrete or buried below grade floors shall be CSA approved rigid

PVC type.

.3 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may be used in place of rigid conduit in dry locations subject to governing regulations, embedded in masonry walls, and concealed above suspended ceilings. Connectors shall be provided with factory-installed insulated throats.

.4 Use flexible metallic conduit for connections to chain suspended and recessed fixture

drops, motors and similar equipment to prevent transmission of vibration. A code-gauge green grounding conductor shall be provided for all such connections. Use "Sealtite" conduit with Hubbell-Kellum Sealtite conduit strain relief grips for all such connections at motors.

.5 Fasten every conduit and cable to structure by means of approved conduit clamps or clips.

Wire lashing is not acceptable.



.6 Conceal conduits and wiring except where noted. Run exposed conduits parallel to building lines and to other conduits. Provide every empty conduit with a pull rope (3 mm polypropylene rope) and identify to designate its function (Power, Telephone, Fire Alarm and the like).

.7 Where conduit is installed in concrete slabs, obtain general approval, prior to commencing

the work, on both maximum dimension and cross-overs which may be used therein. .8 Install conduits in such a manner as to conserve head room and interfere as little as possible

with free use of space through which they pass. Obtain approval for routing of same. Keep conduits at least 150 mm clear high temperature work.

.9 Conduits installed at the roof level of exposed structures, shall be run tight to roof deck,

above purlins and beams.

.10 Conduit and cables for electrical work in demountable type and drywall type partitions shall enter from above, from a junction box concealed in the ceiling above and shall comprise a flexible conduit connection.

.11 All branch wiring shall be provided with a separate code gauge supplementary grounding

conductor run in each conduit or duct, terminating at ground block at panelboards.

.12 Run conduit exposed in mechanical equipment rooms, electrical rooms, fan rooms, and the like, and installed after mechanical and other equipment is completed. Install fixtures, outlets, starters, etc., to clear and to suit application.

.13 Wiring, boxes, conduit fittings, etc., in hazardous areas shall conform to the Ontario

Electrical Code, covering explosion-proof areas. Provide conduit seals where required by these regulations.

.14 Provide housekeeping curbs around exposed conduits feeding panels, disconnect switches,

starters, etc. penetrating floors in front of walls. 3.10 WIRE & CABLE

.1 Wire and cable shall not be installed at temperatures below 20oC unless "minus 40" type is used. Wiring to heating equipment shall be rated 90oC minimum, the ampacity of which shall be limited to 75oC value.

.2 Conductors used for all auxiliary systems (e.g. Fire Alarm) shall be tagged and/or

colour-coded, and where applicable shall agree with manufacturer`s wiring diagrams.

.3 Minimum wire size for power wiring shall be No. 12 AWG gauge unless specified otherwise. Minimum wire size for "Common" neutral conductors shall be No. 10 AWG. Control wiring shall be #14 AWG red insulation. Maximum voltage drop between furthest outlet of any circuit, when fully energized, and panel to which it is connected shall not exceed two percent except for electric heating circuits which shall not exceed one percent.



.4 Cables shall be terminated with moisture-proof connectors, clamped to sheet metal enclosure by a single non-ferrous locknut and grounding bushing.

.5 Sheaths of multi-conductor cables shall be grounded at both cable ends.

.6 Sheaths of single conductor cables shall be grounded at supply end only. Provide a Code

Gauge Grounding Conductor with each feeder cable run.

.7 Numbers of wires indicated for lighting and power, motor and motor control, alarm, signal, communications, and auxiliary systems is intended to show general scheme only. The required number and types of wires shall be installed in accordance with equipment manufacturer's diagrams and requirements, and with requirements of the installation, except that specification standards shall not be reduced.

.8 Solderless connectors with nylon-jacketed "Vibration-proof" screw-on wire connectors

ideal "Wing Nuts", rated 600 volts shall be used for joints in Branch Wiring.

.9 Use compression joints and terminals for all control wiring; and all conductors #4 AWG and larger. Mechanical connections are acceptable at panelboards and circuit breakers where these are part of factory-assembly.

.10 Wire or cables in feeders, sub-feeders and branch circuits shall be colour-coded in

accordance with Ontario Electrical Safety Code. Each end of feeder terminations (e.g. in Switchboard, Panelboards, switches, splitters and the like) Code Phase A - Red, Phase B - Black, Phase C - Blue, Neutral – White.

.11 Use C.G.E. Vulcan X-Link insulated cables for circuits protected by ground fault circuit

interrupters.

.12 Include in each conduit, tubing and raceway, a code gauge green supplementary grounding conductor which shall be connected to suitable ground bus in equipment.

.13 Armoured or sheathed cables may be used only for wiring within demountable and dry wall

type partitions and if additionally specified or detailed; however it shall not be directly buried in or below concrete slabs. Once out of the wall, the run shall not exceed 5’-0”. All wiring after transition shall be run in conduits c/w junction boxes. No exposed run of BX cables in finished or unfinished areas will be acceptable.

3.11 OUTLET, JUNCTION, & PULL BOXES

.1 Use suitable electrical boxes for terminations and junctions on conduit work. Install pull boxes where necessary to permit installation of conductors. Support pull boxes, outlet boxes, panels and other cabinets independently of conduit.

.2 Provide each light switch, wall receptacle and other device with an outlet box of suitable

dimensions and a faceplate. Outlet boxes shall be adapted to their respective locations.

.3 "Thruwall" and "Utility" type boxes shall not be used.



.4 Electrical boxes and panels shall be CSA approved, code-gauge sheet metal, galvanized or

with suitable protective treatment. Secure covers with screws or bolts.

.5 Outlet boxes shall not be installed "Back-to-Back" in walls; separate by a minimum of 150 mm.

.6 Use "Masonry Type" outlet boxes for flush installation in masonry walls as detailed on

standard Detail Drawings attached hereto. Standard sectional boxes, 1004, 1104 and the like, shall not be used.

.7 Install surface mounted devices, in cast conduit fittings, with threaded hubs and suitable stainless steel faceplates.

.8 Main pull and junction boxes (excluding obvious outlet boxes) shall be clearly identified by

painting the outside of the cover in accordance with the following schedule:

• Lighting Yellow • Power Blue • Fire Alarms Red • Telephone Cream • Control Brown • Intercom & Sound Green

.9 In addition, each box shall be identified with a system and service designator of logic

reference to the service. 3.12 ACCESS DOORS & ACCESS MARKERS

.1 Supply access doors for installation under the work of other Division where electrical equipment requiring maintenance or adjustment or inspection is located above ceilings, within walls or behind furring; except ceilings of lay-in removable panel type.

.2 Access doors shall be 12 gauge hinged metal Stelpro Ltd. or equal #722 flush type,

minimum size 300 mm x 300 mm (12" x 12") "Reach-in" 300 mm x 600 mm (12" x 24") "Crawl-in", with prime coat finish, concealed hinges, screwdriver lock and plaster key. Access doors in finished masonry or drywall construction shall be #722 less plaster key. Access doors shall be #726 in acoustic tile ceilings; #704 in drywall ceiling and #726E in plaster ceilings.

.3 Access doors in fire rated ceiling assemblies, all fire rated walls, duct shaft or in corridor

walls shall be UL, ULC or WHI listed 1-1/2 hour fire rated access doors equal to LeHage #L1010 or Acudor #150B with screwdriver lock.

.4 Where lay-in removable panel ceilings requiring hold-down clips are used, access doors are

not required but panels shall be secured with accessible hold-down clips and marked with Buildemup #6 RH brass paper fasteners inserted through acoustic panel and bent over. Paint heads with blue enamel before installation.



.5 Obtain approval for sizes and locations. 3.13 ELECTRIC WORK FOR OTHER DIVISIONS

.1 Examine Architectural and Mechanical (Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning) plans and specifications to determine extent of electrical work in connection with these Divisions which is to be done under the work of the Electrical Division.

.2 In general, all loose motor starters and associated controls for mechanical equipment will

be supplied under Division 16 for installation and connection to both source and load side of the equipment.

.3 Co-ordinate the exact location and verify characteristics of electrical provisions for the

work of the Mechanical Division.

.4 Coordinate locations of starters, motors and associated equipment with the work of the Division 15 Mechanical Trade Sections to ensure proper location of equipment. The exact locations of conduit terminations at Mechanical units shall be determined from equipment manufactures' approved shop drawings. Conduits must be installed to enter only in the locations designated by equipment manufactures.

.5 Provide safety switches required for disconnection of remotely controlled motors, and

where required at motors by C.E.C. regulations whether shown on the drawings or not. Where required at fan motors, they shall be concealed in the fan housing if possible.

.6 Provide for the 120 volt mechanical equipment where noted, all necessary wiring and

connections including wiring and installation of starters, thermostats, aquastats, speed controllers and time switches controlling equipment.

.7 Where motor starters, switches and the like, are grouped together, a suitable 19 mm (3/4")

thick plywood panelboard shall be provided to which all such equipment shall be secured. Provide all necessary angle iron supports for support of panelboard and paint entire assembly with two coats of fire retardant type enamel acceptable to Building Inspection Department.

.8 Provide weatherproof un-fused safety disconnect switches, fastened to exterior of roof

mounted units, to approval.

.9 Connect high temperature thermostats "Firestats" provided in ductwork by Division 15, to exhaust fan systems, to provide fan shutdown on activation.

3.14 GROUNDING – GENERAL

.1 Ground all electrical systems in accordance with provisions of the Ontario Electrical Code.

.2 Provide a grounding electrode in accordance with Section 10 of the Canadian Electrical Code.



.3 Install grounding conductors to permit the shortest and most direct path from equipment to ground. Install grounding conductors in rigid galvanized conduit with both conductor and conduit bonded at both ends. Provide bonding jumpers with approved clamps to maintain ground continuity of metallic raceway systems at all expansion joints.

.4 Ground connections to grounding conductors shall be accessible for inspection and made

with approved solderless connectors bolted to the equipment of structure to be grounded. Clean contact surface prior to making connections to ensure proper metal to metal contact. Connections shall be of the type that grounds both conduit and conductor, and cap screws, bolts, nuts and washers shall be silicon bronze.

3.15 FIREPROOFING & SEALING

.1 Make watertight seal at sleeves and other openings through floors above grade. Sleeves to extend minimum 25 mm (1 inch) above finished floors.

.2 Provide Fireproofing protection of openings through floors and fire rated walls. Refer to

Architectural Drawings for rated surfaces.

.3 Caulk spaces between conduit, cables, bus ducts, raceways, and cable trays with "Cerafibre" 2300 F packing to Building Department approval. Pack and seal both sides of openings with Electrovert "Flameseal" putty, minimum thickness 25 mm (1"). Install in accordance with Electrovert Instruction Bulletin #3601.

END OF SECTION

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. FIRE ALARM PANEL REPLACEMENT





PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

1. Conform to Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements.

2. These specifications describe the minimum functional requirements for the undertaking of a

fire alarm panel replacement and fire alarm annunciator replacement to facilitate the barrier

free project.

3. All work in conjunction with this installation shall meet the provisions of the Ontario Hydro

Electrical Safety Code, Ontario Building Code, Underwriters Laboratories of Canada, and

any applicable local codes.


1. Each and all items of the fire alarm system shall be listed as the products of a single

manufacturer under the appropriate category by the Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada

and shall bear the Ù.L.C.' label.

2. Each and all items of the fire alarm system shall be covered by a one year parts and labour

warranty covering defects resulting from faulty workmanship and materials. The warranty

shall be deemed to begin on the date the system was accepted by the local authority having

jurisdiction.

1.3 MATERIALS

1. All components shall be CSA and ULC listed and labelled, acceptable to the Ontario Fire

Marshal and the local Fire Department and suitable for operation on service characteristics

noted. System equipment and operation and installation shall comply with the National and

Provincial Building Code; Canadian Underwriters Association Standards CUA-70 and

CUA-72A, Canadian Electrical Code, and ULC Standard CAN/ULC-S527-M87 and latest

amendments of each.

2. The equipment furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of one

manufacturer.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010.

2. Shop drawings shall include, without being limited to, the following drawings prepared

specifically for this project:

1. Information on Control Panel, Alarm Initiating and Signaling Devices complete

with catalogue numbers and wiring information.

2. Control Panel zoning.

3. Graphic Panel






4. As-built layouts marked on a set of building plans indicating panels, detectors, pull

stations, signals, conduit routes, wiring information, junction boxes and pull boxes.

3. Upon completion of the installation and testing, submit to the Consultant copies of all shop

drawings, diagrams, operating instructions and descriptive literature, assembled in loose leaf

binders identified by Project name.

1.5 GENERAL

1. The existing fire alarm system is that of Simplex, with a Simplex 4002 panel.

1.6 POWER REQUIREMENTS

1. The control panel shall receive 120/208 VAC power via a dedicated 2-pole fused disconnect

circuit.

2. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be

audibly and visually indicated at the control panel. A green `Power On' LED shall be

displayed continuously while incoming power is present.

3. Control panel power supply shall have the following operating characteristics:

1. Rated for five amps continuous duty

2. 24 VDC filtered and regulated

3. Power limited with a range of 20.4 VDC to 32 VDC.

4. Automatic "Brownout" transfer to standby batteries when supply voltage reaches

102 VAC.

4. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system

upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of

twenty-four hours with two hours of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system

shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging

and recharging operations shall be automatic.

5. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of

the batteries shall be audibly and visually annunciated at the control panel.

6. Control panel battery charger shall have the following operating characteristics:

1. Ability to charge batteries to 70% of their capacity within 12 hours.

2. Compatible with either lead acid or nicad batteries.

7. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be individually fused at the control panel.






1.7 WARRANTY

1. The warranty (supply and installation) on the new Fire Alarm Control Panel and

Annunciator shall be 18 months from the date of Substantial Completion of the Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

1. The new Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be from Simplex only. Fire alarm common controls

in the same cabinet for convenient use. New panel shall be Simplex 4100 ES, with a model

number 4100-9112 c/w all components required for a complete and operational fire alarm

system upon replacement. All system components required to be compatible with the

existing and new devices shall be incorporated in the panel.

2. Class A Addressable loop for the new addressable devices.

3. Class B Audible circuits (Adjacent device connected to alternate Circuit A & B).

4. Single-stage operation.

5. Addressable, zoned, non-coded.

6. Enclosure: CSA Enclosure Type 1. Sprinkler proof. Provide a locking hinged door with

viewing window. Surface or flush as required.

7. Supervised, site programmable, modular design with expansion modules to serve up to 125

sensors and 125 modules, per addressable loop.

8. Store all basic system functionality and job specific data in non-volatile memory. System is

to survive a complete power failure intact.

9. Build-in system programming to automatically address and map all system devices and

provide a minimum default single stage alarm system operation with support of alarm

silence, trouble silence, drill, lamp test, and reset common controls.

10. Make provision to allow down loading of a job specific custom program created by system

application software. Support programming of any input point to any output point. Allow

authorized customization of fundamental system operations using initiating events to start

actions, timers, sequences and logical algorithms.

11. Make provision to support distributed processor intelligent detectors with the following

operational attributes; integral multiple differential sensors, automatic device mapping,

electronic addressing, environmental compensation, pre-alarm, dirty detector identification,

automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment, dual normal/alarm LEDs, relay bases, and

isolator bases.

12. Support intelligent electronically addressable products of combustion, heat detectors, smoke






detectors and manual station configurations as follows;

1. Multisensor detectors with differential ionization, photoelectronic and heat sensors.

2. Multisensor detectors with a differential photoelectronic sensor and a fixed

temperature heat sensor.

3. Single differential sensor detectors with ionization, photoelectronic, or fixed

temperature and rate-of-rise heat sensors.

4. Manual stations.

13. Support remote electronically addressable modules factory or soft site-defined for the

following remote conventional circuits:

1. N.O. Alarm, Class B latching for conventional heat detectors or manual stations.

2. N.O. Alarm, Class B delayed latching for water flow devices.

3. N.O. Active, Class B latching for sprinkler supervisory devices.

4. N.O. Active, Class B non-latching for fan and damper monitor devices.

5. Signal Control, NAC 24 Vdc at 2A, Class B, single or dual riser (two stage) for

polarized signal devices.

6. Ancillary Control, Form 'C' contacts rated at 24Vdc at 2A or 120Vac at .5A.

14. Use full digital communications to supervise all addressable loop devices for placement,

correct location, and operation. Allow swapping of "same type" devices without the need of

addressing and impose the "location" parameters on replacement device. Initiate and

maintain a trouble if a device is added to a loop and clear the trouble when the new device is

mapped and defined into the system.

15. Provide support for a 100% compliment of detector isolator bases.

16. Supervise all panel modules for placement and return trouble if damaged or removed.

17. Provide a CPU watchdog circuit to initiate trouble should the CPU fail.

18. Provide a signal silence inhibit feature set to one minute and an automatic signal silence

timer set to 30 minutes. Audible notification appliances to be affected by signal silence

features. Set the system evacuation signal rate March time to Temporal Requirements.

19. Program the panel to meet the requirements of this project, current codes and standards, and

satisfy the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

20. Password protect any changes to system operations as defined by ULC.

21. Panel Components:

.1 Provide a high efficiency switch mode power supply with line monitoring to

automatically switch to batteries for power failure or brown out conditions. Provide

automatic battery charging capability with low battery discharge protection. Supply

internal power and 24 Vdc at 3.5A for signal notification circuits. Allow 10A output

surges for a minimum period of 50 ms. Provide auxiliary power at 24 Vdc at 500






mA. Electronically power limit all outputs.

.2 Size battery to support system for 24 hours of supervisory and trouble signal current

plus general alarm for 60 min.

.3 Provide a LCD Display Module of membrane style construction with a 4 line by 20

character Liquid Crystal Display. Use supertwist LCD technology and backlighting

for high contrast visual clarity. In the normal mode display the time, the total

number of active points and the total number of disable points. In the alarm mode

display the current time, event time, total number of messages waiting, type of event

on display, location message and event address. Reserve 40 characters of display

space for user custom messages. Provide visual indicators for the following

common control functions; AC Power, alarm, supervisory, monitor, trouble, disable,

ground fault, CPU fail, and test. Provide common control keys and visual indicators

for; reset, alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, and one custom programmable

key/indicator. Provide four pairs of display control keys for selection of event

display by type (alarm, supervisory, monitor and trouble) and forward / backward

scrolling through event listings.

Allow the first event of the highest priority to capture the LCD for display so that

arriving fire fighters can view the first alarm event "hands free". Provide system

function keys; status, reports, enable, disable, activate, restore, program, and test.

Provide a numeric keypad, zero through nine with delete and enter keys.

.4 Provide a Main Controller Module to control and monitor all local or remote

peripherals. Support the LCD Display Module, power supply, remote LCD and

zone display annunciators, strip and carriage printers, and communication interface

standard protocol (CSI) devices such as color computer annunciators and color

graphic displays. The RS-485 port shall be capable of supporting 32 remote

annunciators. Provide one loop controller circuit, two notification appliance circuits,

and common form 'C' contacts for alarm, supervisory, and trouble. Contact ratings

24Vdc at 2A.

.5 Provide a Loop Circuit Expander Module with one additional loop controller circuit

and two notification appliance circuits.

.6 Provide a march time module for signal rate control.

.7 Provide an interface module for remote site monitoring. Support a local energy

municipal loop or reverse polarity connections for each of alarm, supervisory and

trouble.

.8 Provide zone display indicator modules to annunciate zones per the fire alarm

zoning schedule.

.9 Provide printer & LAN Card built into the panel. Also provide by-pass switch.

.10 The new fire alarm panel shall be provided with sufficient zones to match the






existing panel + 25% for future zones. All features and capabilities of the existing

panel shall be incorporated in the new fire alarm control panel and shall be verified

by Simplex on site prior to pricing. Incorporate all costs in the tender price.

2.2 FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR

.1 New Fire Alarm Annunciator shall be Simplex 4602-9101 c/w 4602-8001 Modular

LED/Switch Annunicators; Cabinet Mounted, 4602-9110 SCU/RCU Option, 4603-9101

Remote LCD Annunicator with beige trim.

.2 All components shall be housed in a common, Simplex-supplied cabinet housing.

2.3 FIRE ALARM HORN/STROBE

.1 Fire Alarm horn/strobe shall be selected by Simplex at the time of pricing to match the tone

of the existing signaling devices in the School.

2.4 FIRE ALARM SMOKE DETECTOR

.1 Device shall be compatible with the new FACP.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

1. ULC and CSA standards and Ontario Electrical Safety Code shall establish installation

requirements.

2. Conductors entering the control panel shall be identified and terminated on individual

terminals.

3. Wiring for audible signal circuits shall be No. 14 AWG minimum. Voltage drop to any

signal shall not exceed 10 percent. Wiring for detection circuits shall be No. 16 AWG

minimum. Wire resistance shall not exceed 50 Ohms. Conductors shall be connected in

accordance with manufacturer's wiring diagram and run in conduit throughout.

4. End-of-line devices, resistors and diodes for station and signal circuits shall be mounted in

flush box, maximum of 6 feet above floor beyond last device on circuit.

3.2 TESTS

1. Retain the services of equipment supplier to provide Special Commissioning "Verification,

Inspection and Certification" and to supervise the connection, initial test and adjustment of

the system including existing equipment.

2. Verification procedure shall comply with CAN/ULC-S537-M86 latest revision and shall

include providing proper functioning and connection of each device and function of the

systems. Furnish upon completion of the work, a letter from the manufacturer as evidence






that such tests and instruction have been performed to their satisfaction, and additionally to

indicate that:

1. System complies with manufacturer's installation recommendations, ULC

requirements, and specified operation.

2. Installation is acceptable for Warranty.

3. Completed system complies with regulations concerning supervision of functions,

signals, stations, and automatic detectors.

4. Test completed systems for Building Approval Authority. Advise Authority when

"Verification" is to be performed.

3. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for all necessary Fire Watch Services for the whole

Building during the time for which the existing fire alarm system will be down due to the

replacement scope of work.

3.3 SHOP DRAWING & DOCUMENTS

1. Prepare maintenance schedule. Contractor to correct shop drawings to provide "as-installed"

record.

2. Shop Drawings for the Fire Alarm System shall include copies of documents to substantiate

ULC listing for all items, identified by catalogue number.

3.4 INSPECTION CERTIFICATION

1. Retain services of the manufacturer to perform tests and provide the following documents:

1. A copy of the inspection Technician's report showing location of each device, and

certifying the test results of each device.

2. A Certificate of Verification confirming that the inspection has been completed and

showing the conditions upon which such inspection and certification have been

rendered.

3. Proof of liability insurance for the inspection.

4. Submit copies of Inspection and Verification Certificates to Building Authority Fire

Department Fire Prevention Division.

5. Audibility Level Plots on Floor Plans throughout the building. Include for

adjustment of taps to obtain optimum audibility levels in areas being served

included adjacent spaces prior to submission of report. Ensure items noted deficient

are corrected and additional devices provided prior to issuance of final report for

consultant and building inspector review.

3.5 OTHER PROJECT NOTES

.1 All devices/equipment shown on the new/proposed layouts are expected to be fully supplied

and installed c/w all new wiring and new raceways as a part of this project.

.2 All devices/equipment shown on the existing/demolition layouts are expected to be fully

removed c/w all wiring and new raceways as a part of this project. All patching, repairing,






painting and making good of existing surfaces shall be done under this Contract. Remove all

redundant electrical boxes. Remove all existing 120V power connections.

.3 Unless otherwise noted in writing in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is responsible

to furnishing all materials, labour, equipment, etc. required to complete the work as per the

Contract Documents. It should not be assumed whatsoever that the Owner or any other party

will furnish any material, labour, equipment, etc. required to complete the work unless

explicitly noted in the tender documents.

.4 All conduits installed in finished areas shall be painted on site to match the adjacent paint

colour and finish. Paint prior to installation. Touch up upon installation to ensure

consistency.

.5 All waste material, devices parts, raceways/conduits, wiring, and equipment shall be

removed off site by the Contractor and disposed of on a daily basis. All removal and

disposal costs shall be included for in the tender price. Disposal of the old system (c/w

wiring, raceways, devices, panels, etc.) shall be included for in the tender price.

.6 All firestopping work associated with penetrations through all walls, floors, and ceilings

shall be done by the Electrical Contractor under this Contract. Firestopping shall be

completed in compliance with ULC requirements, Code requirements and the requirements

of all Authorities having Jurisdiction.

.7 All work shall be done after hours during hours approved by the Board.

END OF SECTION